CCF_100/ncsa-mosaic
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Releases Wiki Activity

Automatically remove trailing whitespace

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
Robert Clausecker 2013-03-10 01:59:42 +01:00
parent 62396c5250
commit 1446c97470
256 changed files with 6539 additions and 6539 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

962
CHANGES
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

86
FEATURES
View File

@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
NCSA Mosaic Features List
*************************
This list is up to date for version 2.5 of NCSA Mosaic.
This list is up to date for version 2.5 of NCSA Mosaic.
o Support for accessing documents, images, audio, video, animations, and data
through World Wide Web, Gopher, WAIS, FTP, NNTP/Usenet news, telnet,
tn3270, and local files; and via gateways, Techinfo, TeXinfo, Archie, CSO
qi/ph, relational databases, and other sources.
o Friendly X/Motif user interface.
o Color and monochrome default X resource settings.
o Multiple independent document viewing windows.
qi/ph, relational databases, and other sources.
o Friendly X/Motif user interface.
o Color and monochrome default X resource settings.
o Multiple independent document viewing windows.
o Completely interruptible network input/output, with full status indication
during network operations.
during network operations.
o Support for interactive fill-out forms inside documents, to enable powerful
database and search engine front-ends. Fill-out forms can contain text entry
areas (single- or multi-line), option buttons, radio buttons, option menus,
scrolled lists, and image maps. Fill-out form elements are instantiated as
Motif widgets.
Motif widgets.
o Support for standard World Wide Web authentication scheme, providing
security about equivalent to telnet's username/password scheme.
security about equivalent to telnet's username/password scheme.
o Customizable encryption hooks to allow external PEM or PGP encryption to
be used to request and receive encrypted documents.
be used to request and receive encrypted documents.
o Support for encrypted submission of forms.
o Support for first time encryption of all http communication.
o Extensive HTTP/1.0 support, including the ability to allow a remote
server to
server to
return URL redirections rather than documents for transparent forwarding of
information pointers.
information pointers.
o Ability to pass any or all URL access methods to a proxy gateway to simulate
direct network connection for those behind firewalls.
direct network connection for those behind firewalls.
o Direct access to WAIS databases, including support for binary files and
multiformat responses.
multiformat responses.
o Built-in support for recognizing and handling GIF, JPEG, TIFF, audio, AIFF,
DVI, MPEG, MIME, XWD, RGB, HDF, PostScript files and forking off
appropriate viewers.
appropriate viewers.
o Full customizability of recognized formats, external viewers, and file
extensions.
extensions.
o Ability to fire off arbitrary client-side shell scripts in response to
hyperlink
activations via format/viewer customization options.
hyperlink
activations via format/viewer customization options.
o Ability to natively view data inside HDF and netCDF scientific data files,
with powerful hypermedia interface to explore internal structure of data
files.
files.
o Inlined images in formatted (HTML) text: X bitmaps and GIF images can be
included anywhere inside a document, and can act as hyperlink anchors. Image
files themselves can be located anywhere on the network. Images can act as
maps, so clicking on them sends coordinates of click to remote server.
o Automatic dithering of inlined images on monochrome displays.
o Support of GIF89 transparent background in inlined images.
o Flexible inlined-image caching with customizable image cache size.
maps, so clicking on them sends coordinates of click to remote server.
o Automatic dithering of inlined images on monochrome displays.
o Support of GIF89 transparent background in inlined images.
o Flexible inlined-image caching with customizable image cache size.
o Delayed image loading mode, to avoid automatic loading of all images in
accessed documents for users with slow network connections.
o Visited document history list per window.
accessed documents for users with slow network connections.
o Visited document history list per window.
o Global history with previously visited locations visually distinct; global
history is persistent across sessions.
history is persistent across sessions.
o Hotlist/bookmark capability -- keep list of interesting documents,
add/remove/rename items, list is persistent across sessions. Now stored
in nested HTML.
o Personal annotations with GUI annotation entry dialog; annotations can later
be edited or deleted, and hyperlinks to existing annotations are inlined
into subsequent accesses of an annotated document. (Any document from any
server via any access method can be annotated.)
server via any access method can be annotated.)
o Audio (voice) annotations with GUI for controlling recording process (SGI,
SGI, and HP only).
SGI, and HP only).
o Transparent and automatic uncompression of compressed (.Z) and gzip'd (.z or
.gz) files (over FTP, HTTP0, HTTP/1.0, local files, and Gopher).
.gz) files (over FTP, HTTP0, HTTP/1.0, local files, and Gopher).
o "Load to local disk" mode, for pulling down arbitrary binary files and
saving them to local disk without viewing them.
o In-document search capability.
o Fully 8-bit clean for formatted and plain text.
o On-the-fly font and hyperlink style selection.
saving them to local disk without viewing them.
o In-document search capability.
o Fully 8-bit clean for formatted and plain text.
o On-the-fly font and hyperlink style selection.
o Hardcoded menu entries for popular network starting points, including the
NCSA Internet Resources Meta-Index.
o Keyword search capability (for WAIS, Gopher, Archie, etc.).
o Cut and paste formatted text into other X windows.
o Ability to display arbitrarily long documents.
NCSA Internet Resources Meta-Index.
o Keyword search capability (for WAIS, Gopher, Archie, etc.).
o Cut and paste formatted text into other X windows.
o Ability to display arbitrarily long documents.
o Save/mail/print documents in several formats, including formatted ASCII
text and PostScript.
o Online hypertext help and FAQ list.
text and PostScript.
o Online hypertext help and FAQ list.
o No config or resource file installation required; self-contained
executable.
executable.
o Extremely customizable via compile-time definitions, X resources, and
standard configuration file formats (including mailcap files for
format/viewer customization).
format/viewer customization).
o Can be controlled by signals to allow use as a full-featured help or
information presentation subsystems by existing applications.
information presentation subsystems by existing applications.
o Integrated with NCSA Collage and NCSA DTM to broadcast documents into
real-time networked workgroup collaboration sessions.
o It's PURIFY'D!!!
real-time networked workgroup collaboration sessions.
o It's PURIFY'D!!!
o Common Client Interface (CCI) support to allow external applications
to communicate with Mosaic via TCP/IP.
o Kiosk mode

14
INSTALL
View File

@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ xinc = -I/usr/openwin/include -I/usr/dt/include
:::
SWP
---
This is where you specify where you have installed your X libraries. Some
This is where you specify where you have installed your X libraries. Some
systems have everything off of /usr/lib, some are not so lucky. If you
are compiling and you get an error of "can't find include file XXX.h" it is
more than likely a problem here (or if you don't have a particular lib
@ -280,10 +280,10 @@ JPEG support. Comment it out if you aren't going to use it.
#### KERBEROS SUPPORT
####
#### If you want Mosaic to support Kerberos authentication, set the
#### If you want Mosaic to support Kerberos authentication, set the
#### following flags appropriately. You can support Kerberos V4 and/or V5,
#### although it's most likely that your realm supports one or the other.
#### To enable DES-encryption of HTTP messages via Kerberos key exchange,
#### To enable DES-encryption of HTTP messages via Kerberos key exchange,
#### define the KRB-ENCRYPT flag.
##krb4dir = /usr/athena
@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ JPEG support. Comment it out if you aren't going to use it.
#Do not comment out.
krbflags = $(krb4flags) $(krb5flags)
krblibs = $(krb4libs) $(krb5libs)
krblibs = $(krb4libs) $(krb5libs)
:::
SWP
---
@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ to leave it alone.
#### recommend linking with CNIDR's freeWAIS 0.5 distribution; other
#### WAIS distributions may work but we have not tested them with
#### Mosaic. freeWAIS 0.5 can currently (Sept.1995) be found at
#### ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/wais/servers/freeWAIS
#### ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/wais/servers/freeWAIS
#### If you do not wish to link to the WAIS libraries, then comment
#### the following lines out. Mosaic will then communicate with WAIS
@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ a slight to Tom...we simply had not thought it through.
Another note...the 2.8 distribution tree will be drastically changing. Do not
expect patches for 2.7x to work for 2.8x. We will be moving the libraries
out of the distribution tree and into a "library" distribution along with
pointers to completely external libs (jpeg, png, zlib, etc). Since we have
pointers to completely external libs (jpeg, png, zlib, etc). Since we have
these libs in binary form, we will probably distribute a "binary_libs" archive
of all the libs we build with for each platform (for those who can't get the
lib to build or simply don't care to take the time, but still want to play
@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ great space wishes to perform this feat for us, we would gladly accept.
Scott Powers spowers@ncsa.uiuc.edu \ The N.C.S.A. X Mosaic
Paul Bleisch pbleisch@ncsa.uiuc.edu \ Development Team
Dan Pape dpape@ncsa.uiuc.edu >
Dan Pape dpape@ncsa.uiuc.edu >
Tommy Reilly tpreilly@ncsa.uiuc.edu / Comments? Suggestions? Problems?
Brian Swetland swetland@ncsa.uiuc.edu/ mosaic-x@ncsa.uiuc.edu

8
README.old
View File

@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Binaries
NCSA Mosaic is known to compile on the following platforms:
SGI (IRIX 4.0.x and 5.x)
SGI (IRIX 4.0.x and 5.x)
IBM (AIX 3.2.4)
Sun (SunOS 4.1.3, 5.3, and 5.4 (Solaris))
DECstation 5000-200 (Ultrix 4.x)
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Installation Instructions
-------------------------
Simply examine the toplevel Makefile, change the appropriate
customizable options, and type 'make'.
customizable options, and type 'make'.
The final result is a single independent executable, src/Mosaic.
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ There is one tricky thing:
platform-independent hierarchical scientific data format, and NCSA
DTM, a network-based message-passing protocol useful for exchanging
scientific data between applications. If you compile one of them
in, you should compile both of them in.
in, you should compile both of them in.
If you don't already know what HDF and DTM are and want to compile
Mosaic quickly, forget about them for the time being -- you can
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ depends on user feedback and support.
=============================================================================
Scott Powers spowers@ncsa.uiuc.edu \ The N.C.S.A. X Mosaic
Kristin Buxton kbuxton@uiuc.edu \ Development Team
Dan Pape dpape@ncsa.uiuc.edu >
Dan Pape dpape@ncsa.uiuc.edu >
Tommy Reilly tpreilly@uiuc.edu / Comments? Suggestions? Problems?
Brian Swetland swetland@uiuc.edu / mosaic-x@ncsa.uiuc.edu
=============================================================================

2
README.resources.html
View File

@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Mosaic*CatchPriorAndNext: True
<dd>Whether or not to use PG_UP and PG_DN.
<dt>Mosaic*fullHostname: (NULL)<br>
Mosaic*FullHostname: (NULL)
<dd>The full hostname of your local machine (for use in conjunction with
<dd>The full hostname of your local machine (for use in conjunction with
GetHostByNameIsEvil).
<dt>Mosaic*reverseInlinedBitmapColors: False<br>
Mosaic*ReverseInlinedBitmapColors: False

6
app-defaults.color
View File

@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Mosaic*pulldownmenu*fontList: -*-helvetica-bold-o-normal-*-14-*-iso8859-1
Mosaic*XmList*fontList: -*-helvetica-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-iso8859-1
Mosaic*XmText.fontList: -*-lucidatypewriter-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-iso8859-1
Mosaic*XmTextField.fontList: -*-lucidatypewriter-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-iso8859-1
Mosaic*optionmenu*marginHeight: 0
Mosaic*optionmenu*marginTop: 5
Mosaic*optionmenu*marginBottom: 5
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Mosaic*XmPushButton*highlightThickness: 0
Mosaic*XmScrollBar*highlightThickness: 0
Mosaic*highlightThickness: 0
Mosaic*keyboardFocusPolicy: pointer
Mosaic*TitleFont: -adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1
Mosaic*Font: -adobe-times-medium-r-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1
Mosaic*ItalicFont: -adobe-times-medium-i-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1
@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Mosaic*XmList*TopShadowColor: #e7e7e7e7e7e7
Mosaic*XmText*TopShadowColor: #e7e7e7e7e7e7
Mosaic*XmSelectionBox*TopShadowColor: #e7e7e7e7e7e7
Mosaic*XmMessageBox*TopShadowColor: #e7e7e7e7e7e7
Mosaic*TroughColor: #646464646464
Mosaic*SelectColor: #ffffffff0000
Mosaic*HighlightColor: #bfbfbfbfbfbf

132
docs/resources.html
View File

@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ CGI annotation server.
they're placed). Default is true.
<DT> <b><A NAME="catchPriorAndNext">catchPriorAndNext</A></b>: <i>Boolean</i>
<DT> <b><A NAME="catchPriorAndNext">catchPriorAndNext</A></b>: <i>Boolean</i>
<DD> This resource controls whether use of the keys Prior and Next
(Page Up and Page Down on most keyboards) are explicitly caught
in the <A NAME=18 HREF="help-on-docview-window.html">Document
@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DT> <B>confirmDeleteAnnotation</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If false, deleting annotations will not be confirmed via a
confirmation dialog box. Default is true.
confirmation dialog box. Default is true.
<DT> <b>confirmExit</b>: <i>Boolean</i>
<DD> Whether NCSA Mosaic will pop up a dialog box to confirm
<DD> Whether NCSA Mosaic will pop up a dialog box to confirm
exiting the program
when the 'Exit Program' menu option is chosen. Default is true.
@ -74,9 +74,9 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DD> Default height in pixels for a Document View window. Default is 680.
<DT> <b><A NAME="hotlist-file">defaultHotlistFile</A></b>: <i>string</i>
<DD> Name of file to store the
<A NAME=6 HREF="help-on-hotlist-view.html">default hotlist</A>
(or list of bookmarks).
<DD> Name of file to store the
<A NAME=6 HREF="help-on-hotlist-view.html">default hotlist</A>
(or list of bookmarks).
Default is ".mosaic-hotlist-default"; the value
of the environment variable $HOME will be prepended to this string.
@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DT> <B>delayImageLoads</B>: <I>Boolean</I> </a>
<DD> Delayed image loading is for users with slow network connections. If
true, Mosaic substitutes a small icon for inlined-images, plus an arrow
icon for inlined-images which also act as hyperlinks.
icon for inlined-images which also act as hyperlinks.
<I>Clicking</I> on an icon tells Mosaic to load that inlined-image, while
<I>clicking</I> on the arrow is equivalent to following the associated
hyperlink. Selecting <I>Load Images in Current</I> from Mosaic's
@ -96,23 +96,23 @@ CGI annotation server.
<CODE>Options</CODE> menu. Default is false.
<DT> <b>displayURLsNotTitles</b>: <i>Boolean</i>
<DD> If true, URL's will be displayed everywhere document titles are
<DD> If true, URL's will be displayed everywhere document titles are
usually displayed. Default is false.
<DT> <B>DocsDirectory</B>: <I>string</I>
<DT> <B>DocsDirectory</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Can be used to override the location of the help documents. Default is
NULL.
NULL.
<DT> <B>documentsMenuSpecfile</B>: <I>string</I>
<DT> <B>documentsMenuSpecfile</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Name of file which holds an optional "Documents Menu Specfile," to allow
sites to add their own <CODE>Documents</CODE> menu to Mosaic's menu bar.
For more information, see <A HREF="faq-documents-menu.html"> information
on creating a configurable <CODE>Documents</CODE> menu.</A> Default is
on creating a configurable <CODE>Documents</CODE> menu.</A> Default is
"/usr/local/lib/mosaic/documents.menu"
<DT> <B>editCommand</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Name of the editor to load when using the <I>File-Edit Source</I> option.
This editor is loaded in an xterm, specified by the
This editor is loaded in an xterm, specified by the
<code>xtermCommand</code> resource. Default is vi.
<DT> <B>editCommandUseXterm</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
@ -137,16 +137,16 @@ CGI annotation server.
out it's own full hostname via gethostbyname(), it coredumps,
then you should set this resource to true. Default is false.
<DT> <B>globalExtensionMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DT> <B>globalExtensionMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Can be set to the location of the system-wide <A
HREF="extension-map.html">extension map</A> config file of your choice.
HREF="extension-map.html">extension map</A> config file of your choice.
Default is "/usr/local/lib/mosaic/mime.types"
<DT> <b>globalHistoryFile</b>: <i>string</i>
<DD> Name of file to store the global history of all documents visited
from session to session. Default is ".mosaic-global-history"; the value
of the environment variable $HOME will be prepended to this string.
<DT> <B>globalTypeMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DT> <B>globalTypeMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Can be set to the location of the system-wide <A
HREF="mailcap.html">mailcap</A> (type map config) file of your choice.
Default is "/usr/local/lib/mosaic/mailcap"
@ -158,20 +158,20 @@ CGI annotation server.
HREF="ftp://boole.stanford.edu/pub/">boole.stanford.edu/pub/</A>.)
<DT> <B>hdfMaxImageDimension</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DD>
<DD>
Maximum height and/or width of an <A
HREF="http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu/SDG/Software/Mosaic/Docs/hdf-browsing.html">
HDF</A> inlined image in pixels. Default is 400.
<DT> <B>hdfMaxDisplayedDatasets</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DD>
<DD>
Maximum number of displayed datasets while browsing <A
HREF="http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu/SDG/Software/Mosaic/Docs/hdf-browsing.html">
HDF</A> files. Default is 15. If more than the maximum exist in an HDF
file, Mosaic will display the HDF file in "brief mode."
<DT> <B>hdfMaxDisplayedAttributes</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DD>
<DD>
Maximum number of displayed attributes while browsing <A
HREF="http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu/SDG/Software/Mosaic/Docs/hdf-browsing.html">
HDF</A> files. Default is 10. If more than the max exist in an HDF file,
@ -179,11 +179,11 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DT> <B>hdfPowerUser</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If true, most of the supporting text in an HDF file will be removed.
Default is false.
Default is false.
<DT> <b>homeDocument</b>: <i>string</i>
<DD> Document to access on program startup. Default is
"http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu/SDG/Software/Mosaic/NCSAMosaicHome.html".
<DD> Document to access on program startup. Default is
"http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu/SDG/Software/Mosaic/NCSAMosaicHome.html".
See also
<A NAME=7 HREF="specifying-home.html">information on specifying your
home document</A>.
@ -214,28 +214,28 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DD> Controls the maximum number of cci clients communicating with the browser.
Default is no limit.
<DT> <B>maxWaisResponses</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DT> <B>maxWaisResponses</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DD> Controls maximum number of matches Mosaic gets from a WAIS server.
Default is 200.
Default is 200.
<DT> <b><A NAME="personalAnnotationDirectory">personalAnnotationDirectory</A></b>:
<DT> <b><A NAME="personalAnnotationDirectory">personalAnnotationDirectory</A></b>:
<i>string</i>
<DD> Name of directory in which to store personal annotations (as well
as the log file of all personal annotations currently in existence).
Default is ".mosaic-personal-annotations"; the value
of the environment variable $HOME will be prepended to this string.
(If the directory so named does not exist, it will be created;
however, intermediate directories, if any are named,
however, intermediate directories, if any are named,
will not be created.)
<DT> <B>personalExtensionMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DT> <B>personalExtensionMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Can be set to the location of the personal <A
HREF="extension-map.html">extension map</A> config file of
your choice -- the value of the environment variable HOME is prepended to
this. Default is ".mime.types"
<DT> <B>personalTypeMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DT> <B>personalTypeMap</B>: <I>string</I>
<DD> Can be set to the location of the personal <A
HREF="mailcap.html">mailcap</A> file of your choice -- the value of the
environment variable <CODE>HOME</CODE> is prepended to this. Default is
@ -266,17 +266,17 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DT> <B>reloadPragmaNoCache</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If true, Mosaic will send additional header info to notify a proxy
not to use cache. This only works with caching proxy servers.
not to use cache. This only works with caching proxy servers.
Default is false.
<DT> <B>reloadReloadsImages</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If true, the <I>Reload</I> option will clear out cached image data for
<DT> <B>reloadReloadsImages</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If true, the <I>Reload</I> option will clear out cached image data for
the current document before reloading the document, thus causing the
images to be reloaded also. This is most useful for HTML authors using
Mosaic to view their work. Default is false.
<A NAME="sendmail">
<DT> <B>sendmailCommand</B>: <I>string</I> </A>
<DT> <B>sendmailCommand</B>: <I>string</I> </A>
<DD> Points to the <CODE>sendmail</CODE> binary. The assumption is made that
this program accepts command-line arguments specifying addresses to which
messages should be mailed, and accepts other headers and message text from
@ -287,11 +287,11 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DD> Points to the signature file used when posting articles to newsgroups. This
file will be included whenever you post or followup. Default is no signature.
<DT> <B>simpleInterface</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DT> <B>simpleInterface</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> Allows Mosaic's menu bar and bottom button configuration to be
considerably pared down (default is false).
<DT> <b><A NAME="tmpDirectory">tmpDirectory</A></b>: <i>string</i>
<DT> <b><A NAME="tmpDirectory">tmpDirectory</A></b>: <i>string</i>
<DD> Name of directory in which to store temporary files generated by
Mosaic. This directory should have plenty of space, ideally
at least 10 or 20 megabytes, in case you happen to pull down a
@ -300,10 +300,10 @@ CGI annotation server.
HREF="command-line-flags.html#tmpdir">-tmpdir</A> or setting
the environment variable <code>TMPDIR</code>.
<DT> <B>trackFullURLs</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DT> <B>trackFullURLs</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If set to false, enables prototypical smart display of "where you're
going" during mouse tracking, including format divination. Default is
true.
true.
<DT> <B>trackPointerMotion</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If set to false, the mouse pointer will not be tracked so that URLs
@ -322,12 +322,12 @@ CGI annotation server.
Gopher typing system. When true, Mosaic will use its own mechanism
to determine the file types of Gopher documents. Default is true.
<DT> <B>twirlIncrement</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DD> Indicates how many bytes (minimum) are transferred between updates
<DT> <B>twirlIncrement</B>: <I>integer</I>
<DD> Indicates how many bytes (minimum) are transferred between updates
of the twirling transfer icon for normal (FTP, Gopher, HTTP) transfers.
Default is 4096.
<DT> <b>twirlingTransferIcon</b>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DT> <b>twirlingTransferIcon</b>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> Can be set to false to turn off the twirling NCSA logo during document
transfers. <I>Clicking</I> the icon will still interrupt a transfer.
Default is true.
@ -336,22 +336,22 @@ CGI annotation server.
<DD> Command to use to uncompress compressed files (files with an
extension of '.Z'). Default is "uncompress"
<DT> <B>useDefaultExtensionMap</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DT> <B>useDefaultExtensionMap</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> Can be set to false to keep Mosaic from having any default <A
HREF="extension-map.html">file-extension-to-MIME-type mappings</A>. <I>
We strongly recommend that this resource be left true;</I> simply
overridden as necessary. Default is true.
<DT> <B>useDefaultTypeMap</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> Can be set to false to keep Mosaic from having any default <A
<DT> <B>useDefaultTypeMap</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> Can be set to false to keep Mosaic from having any default <A
HREF="mailcap.html">MIME-type-to-external-viewer mappings</A>. <I>We
strongly recommend that this resource be left true</I>; simply overridden
as necessary. Default is true.
as necessary. Default is true.
<DT> <b>useGlobalHistory</b>: <i>Boolean</i>
<DD> If true, a global history of everywhere you visit is automatically
stored. (This history is used to
shade anchors different colors based on whether you've visited the
<DD> If true, a global history of everywhere you visit is automatically
stored. (This history is used to
shade anchors different colors based on whether you've visited the
corresponding documents or not, if resource trackVisitedAnchors
is set to true) Default is true.
@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ NAME="widget-resources-note">you should specify them</A> in your
<DT> <b>Background</b>: <i>color</i>
<DD> Color for main background. Default is grey.
<DT> <b>Foreground</b>: <i>color</i>
<DD> Color for normal text. Default is black.
<DD> Color for normal text. Default is black.
<DT> <b>anchorColor</b>: <i>color</i>
<DD> Color to shade anchors whose corresponding documents haven't been previously visited. Default is blue3.
<DT> <b>visitedAnchorColor</b>: <i>color</i>
@ -386,8 +386,8 @@ NAME="widget-resources-note">you should specify them</A> in your
<DT> <b>activeAnchorFG</b>: <i>color</i>
<DD> Color to shade anchors that are in the process of being activated. Default is red.
<DT> <b>activeAnchorBG</b>: <i>color</i>
<DD> Color to shade the background of anchors that are in the
process of being activated. Default is grey80 (the same
<DD> Color to shade the background of anchors that are in the
process of being activated. Default is grey80 (the same
color as the application's background).
<DT> <b>anchorUnderlines</b>: <i>integer</i>
<DD> This can be one of {0, 1, 2, 3}, and indicates the number
@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ NAME="widget-resources-note">you should specify them</A> in your
bitmaps. Default is false.
<DT> <B>verticalScrollOnRight</B>: <I>Boolean</I>
<DD> If false, the Document View window will place its scroll bar on the
<DD> If false, the Document View window will place its scroll bar on the
left side. Default is true.
</DL>
@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ bitmaps. Default is false.
Font resources are also resources that belong to the HTML widget, so
the <A NAME=8 HREF="#widget-resources-note">above note</A> applies
here too. Note that fonts can be changed dynamically from the
here too. Note that fonts can be changed dynamically from the
<b>Options</b> menu</A>.
<DL>
@ -437,40 +437,40 @@ here too. Note that fonts can be changed dynamically from the
to any of the font choices in the Options-Font menu. For example.
<LISTING>Mosaic*defaultFontChoice: New Century Large</LISTING>
<DT> <b>font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in normal formatted text.
<DD> Font used in normal formatted text.
Default is "-adobe-times-medium-r-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>italicFont</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in italic formatted text.
<DD> Font used in italic formatted text.
Default is "-adobe-times-medium-i-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>boldFont</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in bold formatted text.
<DD> Font used in bold formatted text.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>fixedFont</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in fixed (typewriter style) formatted text.
<DD> Font used in fixed (typewriter style) formatted text.
Default is "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>header1Font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in level 1 headers.
<DD> Font used in level 1 headers.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>header2Font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in level 2 headers.
<DD> Font used in level 2 headers.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-18-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>header3Font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in level 3 headers.
<DD> Font used in level 3 headers.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>header4Font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in level 4 headers.
<DD> Font used in level 4 headers.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>header5Font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in level 5 headers.
<DD> Font used in level 5 headers.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-12-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>header6Font</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in level 6 headers.
<DD> Font used in level 6 headers.
Default is "-adobe-times-bold-r-normal-*-10-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>addressFont</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in addresses.
<DD> Font used in addresses.
Default is "-adobe-times-medium-i-normal-*-17-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>plainFont</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in plaintext regions or preformatted documents.
<DD> Font used in plaintext regions or preformatted documents.
Default is "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
<DT> <b>listingFont</b>: <i>font</i>
<DD> Font used in listing regions. Default is "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-12-*-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1".
@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ The following resources once did something, but not anymore. <P>
<DT> <b>mailCommand</b>: <i>string</i>
<DD> Replaced in version 2.0 with <A HREF="#sendmail">sendmailCommand</A>
resource.
resource.
<DT> <b><A NAME="warpPointerForIndex">warpPointerForIndex</A></b>:
<i>Boolean</i>
@ -587,14 +587,14 @@ version of Mosaic to a 2.x version:</EM>
<UL>
<LI> The class name has been changed from <i>XMosaic</i> to <i>Mosaic</i>.
Existing Mosaic 1.2 X resources and application defaults files should be
modified accordingly.
modified accordingly.
<LI> Information on <A HREF="faq-broken.html#11">the removal of version 1.2
multimedia X resources.</A>
</UL>
<A HREF="mosaic-docs.html"><IMG SRC="up.xbm"> Back to top level Documentation
Index</A>
Index</A>
<P>
Last Modified: 9 July 1995 <BR>

2
libXmx/Makefile.in
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# @configure_output@
# This file is used by Autoconf to make the real Makefile.
# DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE!
# If you want to change something do it to the Makefile autoconf
# If you want to change something do it to the Makefile autoconf
# creates. You should never have to edit this file.
CC= @CC@

222
libXmx/Xmx.c
View File

@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ void
XmxAddEventHandler (Widget w, EventMask event_mask, XtEventHandler proc,
int client_data)
{
XtAddEventHandler
XtAddEventHandler
(w, event_mask, False, proc, (XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (client_data));
return;
@ -195,19 +195,19 @@ XmxRemoveEventHandler (Widget w, EventMask event_mask, XtEventHandler proc,
/* Adapted from Dan Heller's post in comp.windows.x.motif;
assumes BulletinBoard with one (centered) child. */
static void
XmxCenteringResize
XmxCenteringResize
(CompositeWidget w, XConfigureEvent *event, String args[], int *num_args)
{
WidgetList children;
int width = event->width;
int height = event->height;
Dimension w_width, w_height;
Dimension w_width, w_height;
/* get handle to BulletinBoard's children and marginal spacing */
XtVaGetValues (w,
XmNchildren, &children,
NULL);
XtVaGetValues (children[0],
XmNheight, &w_height,
XmNwidth, &w_width,
@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ XmxCenteringResize
XmNx, width/2 - w_width/2,
XmNy, height/2 - w_height/2,
NULL);
return;
}
@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ void XmxManageRemanage (Widget w)
XtUnmanageChild (w);
XtManageChild (w);
#endif
if (XtIsManaged (w))
if (XtIsShell(w))
XRaiseWindow (XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w));
@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Widget XmxMakePushButton (Widget parent, String name, XtCallbackProc cb,
}
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget ("pushbutton", xmPushButtonWidgetClass,
parent, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
if (xmstr)
@ -308,12 +308,12 @@ Widget XmxMakePushButton (Widget parent, String name, XtCallbackProc cb,
}
/* args work */
Widget XmxMakeNamedPushButton (Widget parent, String name, String wname,
Widget XmxMakeNamedPushButton (Widget parent, String name, String wname,
XtCallbackProc cb,
int cb_data)
{
XmString label;
if (name)
{
label = XmStringCreateLtoR (name, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeNamedPushButton (Widget parent, String name, String wname,
}
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget (wname, xmPushButtonWidgetClass,
parent, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
if (name)
XmStringFree (label);
@ -336,9 +336,9 @@ Widget XmxMakeBlankButton (Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
{
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget ("blankbutton", xmPushButtonWidgetClass,
parent, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
Xmx_n = 0;
return Xmx_w;
}
@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeBlankButton (Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
/* ------------------------------- COMMAND -------------------------------- */
/* args work */
Widget XmxMakeCommand
Widget XmxMakeCommand
(Widget parent, String prompt, XtCallbackProc cb, int cb_data)
{
XmString xmstr = XmxMakeXmstrFromString (prompt);
@ -354,8 +354,8 @@ Widget XmxMakeCommand
XmxSetArg (XmNpromptString, (XtArgVal)xmstr);
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget ("command", xmCommandWidgetClass, parent,
Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtAddCallback
(Xmx_w, XmNcommandEnteredCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback
(Xmx_w, XmNcommandEnteredCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
XmStringFree (xmstr);
@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeScrolledList
along with it... */
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNdefaultActionCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
Xmx_n = 0;
return Xmx_w;
}
@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeToggleButton (Widget parent, String name, XtCallbackProc cb,
("togglebutton", xmToggleButtonWidgetClass, parent, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
/* Used to be XmNarmCallback --- probably not right. */
if (cb)
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNvalueChangedCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNvalueChangedCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
XmStringFree (label);
@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeToggleButton (Widget parent, String name, XtCallbackProc cb,
void XmxSetToggleButton (Widget button, int set_state)
{
assert (set_state == XmxSet || set_state == XmxUnset);
XmToggleButtonSetState
XmToggleButtonSetState
(button, (set_state == XmxSet) ? True : False, False);
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -478,10 +478,10 @@ Widget XmxMakeScale (Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb, int cb_data,
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget ("scale", xmScaleWidgetClass, parent,
Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtAddCallback
(Xmx_w, XmNvalueChangedCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback
(Xmx_w, XmNvalueChangedCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNdragCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNdragCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ void XmxSetOffsets (Widget w, int top, int bottom, int left, int right)
XmxSetArg (XmNleftOffset, (XtArgVal)left);
if (right != XmxNoOffset)
XmxSetArg (XmNrightOffset, (XtArgVal)right);
XmxSetValues (w);
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ void XmxSetOffsets (Widget w, int top, int bottom, int left, int right)
}
/* args sent to w */
void XmxSetConstraints (Widget w,
void XmxSetConstraints (Widget w,
int top, int bottom, int left, int right,
Widget topw, Widget botw, Widget lefw, Widget rigw)
{
@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ void XmxSetConstraints (Widget w,
if (topw)
XmxSetArg (XmNtopWidget, (XtArgVal)topw);
}
if (bottom != XmATTACH_NONE)
{
XmxSetArg (XmNbottomAttachment, (XtArgVal)bottom);
@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ void XmxSetConstraints (Widget w,
if (rigw)
XmxSetArg (XmNrightWidget, (XtArgVal)rigw);
}
XmxSetValues (w);
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeCenteringBboard (Widget parent, XtAppContext app)
{
XtActionsRec rec;
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget
("bboard", xmBulletinBoardWidgetClass, parent, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
/* Does this have to happen more than once? */
@ -714,9 +714,9 @@ Widget XmxMakeCenteringBboard (Widget parent, XtAppContext app)
XtAppAddActions (app, &rec, 1);
/* This does, for sure... */
XtOverrideTranslations
XtOverrideTranslations
(Xmx_w, XtParseTranslationTable ("<Configure>: resize()"));
Xmx_n = 0;
return Xmx_w;
}
@ -830,9 +830,9 @@ Widget XmxMakeQuestionDialog (Widget parent, String question, String title,
Xmx_w = XmCreateQuestionDialog (parent, "question", Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtUnmanageChild (XmMessageBoxGetChild (Xmx_w, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNcancelCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNcancelCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (no_token));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNokCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNokCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (yes_token));
XmStringFree (message);
@ -921,21 +921,21 @@ Widget XmxMakeFileSBDialog (Widget parent, String title, String selection_txt,
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogTitle, (XtArgVal)dialog_title);
/* Can't set width of box with XmNwidth here... why not? */
/* this will cause the dialog to only resize if needed. That
/* this will cause the dialog to only resize if needed. That
way it won't be growing and shrinking all the time... very annoying. - DXP */
XmxSetArg (XmNresizePolicy, (XtArgVal)XmRESIZE_GROW);
/* Create the FileSelectionBox with OK and Cancel buttons. */
Xmx_w = XmCreateFileSelectionDialog (parent, "fsb", Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtUnmanageChild (XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild (Xmx_w, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNokCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNokCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNcancelCallback,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XmNcancelCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxCancelCallback, 0);
/* Set selection label to specified selection_txt. */
Xmx_n = 0;
_selection_label =
_selection_label =
XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild (Xmx_w, XmDIALOG_SELECTION_LABEL);
XmxSetArg (XmNlabelString, (XtArgVal)label);
XtSetValues (_selection_label, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ XmxCallback(_XmxHelpTextCancelCallback)
}
/* args work */
Widget XmxMakeHelpTextDialog
Widget XmxMakeHelpTextDialog
(Widget parent, String str, String title, Widget *text_w)
{
Widget _box, _outer_frame, _form;
@ -1013,17 +1013,17 @@ Widget XmxMakeHelpTextDialog
_sep = XmxMakeHorizontalSeparator (_form);
/* Make an OK button. */
_buttons_form = XmxMakeFormAndOneButton
_buttons_form = XmxMakeFormAndOneButton
(_form, _XmxHelpTextCancelCallback, "OK", 0);
/* Constraints for _form. */
XmxSetConstraints
(XtParent (_scr_text), XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_WIDGET, XmATTACH_FORM,
XmxSetConstraints
(XtParent (_scr_text), XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_WIDGET, XmATTACH_FORM,
XmATTACH_FORM, NULL, _sep, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_sep, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_WIDGET, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM,
NULL, _buttons_form, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_buttons_form, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
@ -1082,7 +1082,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeHorizontalSpacer (Widget parent)
XmString label = XmStringCreateLtoR (" ", XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNlabelString, (XtArgVal)label);
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget ("label", xmLabelGadgetClass, parent,
Xmx_w = XtCreateManagedWidget ("label", xmLabelGadgetClass, parent,
Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XmStringFree (label);
@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeScrolledText (Widget parent)
Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtManageChild (Xmx_w);
/* Remember this returns the Text Widget, NOT the ScrolledWindow Widget,
/* Remember this returns the Text Widget, NOT the ScrolledWindow Widget,
which is what needs to be tied into a form. Use XtParent to get the
actual ScrolledWindow. */
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -1165,7 +1165,7 @@ String XmxTextGetString (Widget text)
/* args do nothing */
void XmxAddCallbackToText (Widget text, XtCallbackProc cb, int cb_data)
{
XtAddCallback (text, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
XtAddCallback (text, XmNactivateCallback, cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (cb_data));
return;
}
@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ void XmxAddCallbackToText (Widget text, XtCallbackProc cb, int cb_data)
#ifdef __sgi
/* args work */
Widget
XmxMakeDrawingVolume
XmxMakeDrawingVolume
(Widget parent, int width, int height,
GLXconfig *glxConfig,
XtCallbackProc redraw_cb, XtCallbackProc resize_cb,
@ -1191,11 +1191,11 @@ XmxMakeDrawingVolume
Xmx_w = GlxCreateMDraw (parent, "drawingvolume", Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtManageChild (Xmx_w);
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, GlxNexposeCallback, redraw_cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, GlxNexposeCallback, redraw_cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (0));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, GlxNresizeCallback, resize_cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, GlxNresizeCallback, resize_cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (0));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, GlxNginitCallback, ginit_cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, GlxNginitCallback, ginit_cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (0));
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ void XmxInstallColormapsWithOverlay (Widget toplevel, Widget glw)
Window overlay, popup, underlay;
Arg args[5];
register int i=0;
i=0;
XtSetArg(args[i], GlxNoverlayWindow, &overlay); i++;
XtSetArg(args[i], GlxNpopupWindow, &popup); i++;
@ -1244,7 +1244,7 @@ void XmxInstallColormapsWithOverlay (Widget toplevel, Widget glw)
windows[i] = XtWindow(glw); i++;
windows[i] = XtWindow(toplevel); i++;
XSetWMColormapWindows(XtDisplay(toplevel), XtWindow(toplevel), windows, i);
return;
}
@ -1271,11 +1271,11 @@ XmxMakeDrawingVolume
("drawingvolume", glibWidgetClass, parent, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XtManageChild (Xmx_w);
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XglNexposeCallback, redraw_cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XglNexposeCallback, redraw_cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (0));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XglNresizeCallback, resize_cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XglNresizeCallback, resize_cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (0));
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XglNgconfigCallback, ginit_cb,
XtAddCallback (Xmx_w, XglNgconfigCallback, ginit_cb,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (0));
Xmx_n = 0;
@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ void XmxApplyPixmapToLabelWidget
/* ------------------------ DIALOG CONTROL BUTTONS ------------------------ */
/* args apply to form */
Widget XmxMakeFormAndOneButton (Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
Widget XmxMakeFormAndOneButton (Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
String name1, int cb_data1)
{
Widget _form, _button1;
@ -1374,19 +1374,19 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndOneButton (Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
_button1 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name1, cb, cb_data1);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button1, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetPositions (_button1, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 1, 2);
XmxSetOffsets (_button1, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 8, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
}
/* args apply to form */
Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtons
Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtons
(Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
String name1, String name2,
int cb_data1, int cb_data2)
@ -1400,17 +1400,17 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtons
_button1 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name1, cb, cb_data1);
_button2 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name2, cb, cb_data2);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button1, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button2, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetPositions (_button1, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 0, 1);
XmxSetPositions (_button2, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 1, 2);
XmxSetOffsets (_button1, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 8, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button2, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
@ -1431,17 +1431,17 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtonsSqueezed
_button1 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name1, cb, cb_data1);
_button2 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name2, cb, cb_data2);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button1, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button2, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetPositions (_button1, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 1, 2);
XmxSetPositions (_button2, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 3, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button1, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 8, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button2, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
@ -1463,13 +1463,13 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtonsSqueezed
_button2 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name2, cb, cb_data2);
_button3 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name3, cb, cb_data3);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button1, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button2, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button3, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetPositions (_button1, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 1, 2);
@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtonsSqueezed
XmxSetOffsets (_button1, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 8, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button2, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button3, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
@ -1500,13 +1500,13 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtons
_button2 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name2, cb, cb_data2);
_button3 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name3, cb, cb_data3);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button1, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button2, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button3, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetPositions (_button1, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 0, 1);
@ -1515,14 +1515,14 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtons
XmxSetOffsets (_button1, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 8, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button2, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button3, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
}
/* args apply to form */
Widget XmxMakeFormAndFourButtons
Widget XmxMakeFormAndFourButtons
(Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
String name1, String name2, String name3, String name4,
int cb_data1, int cb_data2, int cb_data3, int cb_data4)
@ -1538,16 +1538,16 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndFourButtons
_button3 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name3, cb, cb_data3);
_button4 = XmxMakePushButton (_form, name4, cb, cb_data4);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button1, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button2, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button3, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetConstraints
XmxSetConstraints
(_button4, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_FORM, XmATTACH_NONE, XmATTACH_NONE,
NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
XmxSetPositions (_button1, XmxNoPosition, XmxNoPosition, 0, 1);
@ -1558,14 +1558,14 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndFourButtons
XmxSetOffsets (_button2, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button3, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button4, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
}
/* args apply to form */
Widget XmxMakeFormAndFiveButtons
Widget XmxMakeFormAndFiveButtons
(Widget parent, XtCallbackProc cb,
String name1, String name2, String name3, String name4, String name5,
int cb_data1, int cb_data2, int cb_data3, int cb_data4, int cb_data5)
@ -1607,7 +1607,7 @@ Widget XmxMakeFormAndFiveButtons
XmxSetOffsets (_button3, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button4, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 4);
XmxSetOffsets (_button5, XmxNoOffset, XmxNoOffset, 4, 8);
Xmx_n = 0;
Xmx_w = _form;
return Xmx_w;
@ -1621,7 +1621,7 @@ static void _XmxYesOrNoResponse (Widget w, int *answer, XmAnyCallbackStruct *cbs
*answer = 0;
}
int XmxModalYesOrNo (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
int XmxModalYesOrNo (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr, char *nostr)
{
Widget dialog;
@ -1634,7 +1634,7 @@ int XmxModalYesOrNo (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
yes = XmStringCreateLtoR (yesstr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
no = XmStringCreateLtoR (nostr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
title = XmStringCreateLtoR ("Prompt", XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogTitle, (XtArgVal)title);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogStyle, XmDIALOG_FULL_APPLICATION_MODAL);
XmxSetArg (XmNmessageString, (XtArgVal)question);
@ -1644,11 +1644,11 @@ int XmxModalYesOrNo (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
dialog = XmCreateQuestionDialog (parent, "question_dialog", Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
Xmx_n = 0;
XtUnmanageChild (XmMessageBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxYesOrNoResponse, &answer);
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNcancelCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNcancelCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxYesOrNoResponse, &answer);
XtManageChild (dialog);
@ -1680,20 +1680,20 @@ int XmxModalYesOrNo (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
#define XMX_NO_ANSWER "-*-no answer, dammit, but Xmx rules, yo yo yo-*-"
/*SWP -- 7/6/95*/
static void _XmxActivate (Widget w, char **answer,
static void _XmxActivate (Widget w, char **answer,
XmSelectionBoxCallbackStruct *cbs)
{
*answer = XMX_NO_ANSWER;
}
static void _XmxPromptForStringResponse (Widget w, char **answer,
static void _XmxPromptForStringResponse (Widget w, char **answer,
XmSelectionBoxCallbackStruct *cbs)
{
if (!XmStringGetLtoR (cbs->value, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET, answer))
*answer = XMX_NO_ANSWER;
}
static void _XmxPromptForStringCancel (Widget w, char **answer,
static void _XmxPromptForStringCancel (Widget w, char **answer,
XmSelectionBoxCallbackStruct *cbs)
{
*answer = XMX_NO_ANSWER;
@ -1701,7 +1701,7 @@ static void _XmxPromptForStringCancel (Widget w, char **answer,
/*SWP -- 7/4/95*/
void XmxMakeInfoDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
void XmxMakeInfoDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *infostr, char *titlestr, char *yesstr)
{
Widget dialog;
@ -1711,7 +1711,7 @@ void XmxMakeInfoDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
info = XmStringCreateLtoR (infostr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
yes = XmStringCreateLtoR (yesstr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
title = XmStringCreateLtoR (titlestr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogTitle, (XtArgVal)title);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogStyle, XmDIALOG_FULL_APPLICATION_MODAL);
XmxSetArg (XmNmessageString, (XtArgVal)info);
@ -1724,7 +1724,7 @@ void XmxMakeInfoDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
XtUnmanageChild (XmMessageBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtUnmanageChild (XmMessageBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_CANCEL_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxActivate, &answer);
XtManageChild (dialog);
@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ void XmxMakeInfoDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
/*SWP -- 4/15/96*/
void XmxMakeErrorDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
void XmxMakeErrorDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *infostr, char *titlestr, char *yesstr)
{
Widget dialog;
@ -1760,7 +1760,7 @@ void XmxMakeErrorDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
info = XmStringCreateLtoR (infostr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
yes = XmStringCreateLtoR (yesstr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
title = XmStringCreateLtoR (titlestr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogTitle, (XtArgVal)title);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogStyle, XmDIALOG_FULL_APPLICATION_MODAL);
XmxSetArg (XmNmessageString, (XtArgVal)info);
@ -1773,7 +1773,7 @@ void XmxMakeErrorDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
XtUnmanageChild (XmMessageBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtUnmanageChild (XmMessageBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_CANCEL_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxActivate, &answer);
XtManageChild (dialog);
@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ void XmxMakeErrorDialogWait (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
}
char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr, char *nostr)
{
Widget dialog;
@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
yes = XmStringCreateLtoR (yesstr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
no = XmStringCreateLtoR (nostr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
title = XmStringCreateLtoR ("Prompt", XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogTitle, (XtArgVal)title);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogStyle, XmDIALOG_FULL_APPLICATION_MODAL);
XmxSetArg (XmNselectionLabelString, (XtArgVal)question);
@ -1819,11 +1819,11 @@ char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
XmxSetArg (XmNcancelLabelString, (XtArgVal)no);
dialog = XmCreatePromptDialog (parent, "question_dialog", Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
Xmx_n = 0;
XtUnmanageChild (XmSelectionBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxPromptForStringResponse, &answer);
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNcancelCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNcancelCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxPromptForStringCancel, &answer);
XtManageChild (dialog);
@ -1860,38 +1860,38 @@ char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
static char *_passwd = NULL;
static void _XmxPromptForPasswordResponse (Widget w, char **answer,
static void _XmxPromptForPasswordResponse (Widget w, char **answer,
XmSelectionBoxCallbackStruct *cbs)
{
if (!XmStringGetLtoR (cbs->value, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET, answer))
*answer = XMX_NO_ANSWER;
}
static void _XmxPromptForPasswordCancel (Widget w, char **answer,
static void _XmxPromptForPasswordCancel (Widget w, char **answer,
XmSelectionBoxCallbackStruct *cbs)
{
*answer = XMX_NO_ANSWER;
}
static void _XmxPromptForPasswordVerify (Widget text_w, XtPointer unused,
static void _XmxPromptForPasswordVerify (Widget text_w, XtPointer unused,
XmTextVerifyCallbackStruct *cbs)
{
char *new;
int len;
if (cbs->reason != XmCR_MODIFYING_TEXT_VALUE)
if (cbs->reason != XmCR_MODIFYING_TEXT_VALUE)
{
return;
}
if (cbs->text->ptr == NULL)
if (cbs->text->ptr == NULL)
{ /* backspace */
cbs->doit = True;
if (_passwd && *_passwd)
{
int start;
char *tptr;
len = strlen(_passwd);
/* Find the start of the delete */
if (cbs->startPos < len)
@ -1915,7 +1915,7 @@ static void _XmxPromptForPasswordVerify (Widget text_w, XtPointer unused,
strcat(_passwd, tptr);
}
}
else if (cbs->text->length >= 1)
else if (cbs->text->length >= 1)
{
int i;
@ -1962,7 +1962,7 @@ static void _XmxPromptForPasswordVerify (Widget text_w, XtPointer unused,
}
}
char *XmxModalPromptForPassword (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *XmxModalPromptForPassword (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr, char *nostr)
{
Widget dialog;
@ -1977,7 +1977,7 @@ char *XmxModalPromptForPassword (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
yes = XmStringCreateLtoR (yesstr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
no = XmStringCreateLtoR (nostr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
title = XmStringCreateLtoR ("Prompt", XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogTitle, (XtArgVal)title);
XmxSetArg (XmNdialogStyle, XmDIALOG_FULL_APPLICATION_MODAL);
XmxSetArg (XmNselectionLabelString, (XtArgVal)question);
@ -1985,14 +1985,14 @@ char *XmxModalPromptForPassword (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
XmxSetArg (XmNcancelLabelString, (XtArgVal)no);
dialog = XmCreatePromptDialog (parent, "question_dialog", Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
Xmx_n = 0;
XtUnmanageChild (XmSelectionBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_HELP_BUTTON));
XtAddCallback
(XmSelectionBoxGetChild (dialog, XmDIALOG_TEXT),
XmNmodifyVerifyCallback, (XtCallbackProc)_XmxPromptForPasswordVerify, 0);
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNokCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxPromptForPasswordResponse, &answer);
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNcancelCallback,
XtAddCallback (dialog, XmNcancelCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)_XmxPromptForPasswordCancel, &answer);
XtManageChild (dialog);

36
libXmx/Xmx.h
View File

@ -248,14 +248,14 @@ extern Widget XmxMakeRadioBox (Widget);
extern Widget XmxMakeOptionBox (Widget);
extern Widget XmxMakeToggleButton (Widget, String, XtCallbackProc, int);
extern void XmxSetToggleButton (Widget button, int set_state);
extern Widget XmxMakeScale (Widget, XtCallbackProc, int, String,
extern Widget XmxMakeScale (Widget, XtCallbackProc, int, String,
int, int, int, int);
extern void XmxAdjustScale (Widget, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFrame (Widget, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeForm (Widget);
extern void XmxSetPositions (Widget, int, int, int, int);
extern void XmxSetOffsets (Widget, int, int, int, int);
extern void XmxSetConstraints (Widget, int, int, int, int, Widget, Widget,
extern void XmxSetConstraints (Widget, int, int, int, int, Widget, Widget,
Widget, Widget);
extern Widget XmxMakeVerticalRowColumn (Widget);
extern Widget XmxMakeHorizontalRowColumn (Widget);
@ -272,13 +272,13 @@ extern Widget XmxMakeNamedLabel (Widget, String, String);
extern Widget XmxMakeBlankLabel (Widget);
extern Widget XmxMakeErrorDialog (Widget, String, String);
extern Widget XmxMakeInfoDialog (Widget, String, String);
extern Widget XmxMakeQuestionDialog (Widget, String, String, XtCallbackProc,
extern Widget XmxMakeQuestionDialog (Widget, String, String, XtCallbackProc,
int, int);
extern XmString XmxMakeXmstrFromFile (String);
extern XmString XmxMakeXmstrFromString (String);
extern Widget XmxMakeBboardDialog (Widget, String);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormDialog (Widget, String);
extern Widget XmxMakeFileSBDialog (Widget, String, String, XtCallbackProc,
extern Widget XmxMakeFileSBDialog (Widget, String, String, XtCallbackProc,
int);
extern Widget XmxMakeHelpDialog (Widget, XmString, String);
extern Widget XmxMakeHelpTextDialog (Widget, String, String, Widget *);
@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ extern void XmxAddCallbackToText (Widget, XtCallbackProc, int);
#if 0
#ifdef __sgi
extern Widget XmxMakeDrawingVolume
extern Widget XmxMakeDrawingVolume
(Widget, int, int, GLXconfig *, XtCallbackProc, XtCallbackProc,
XtCallbackProc);
extern void XmxInstallColormaps (Widget, Widget);
@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ extern void XmxWinset (Widget);
#endif
#ifdef _IBMR2
extern Widget XmxMakeDrawingVolume
extern Widget XmxMakeDrawingVolume
(Widget, int, int, XtCallbackProc, XtCallbackProc,
XtCallbackProc);
extern void XmxInstallColormaps (Widget, Widget);
@ -316,22 +316,22 @@ extern void XmxWinset (Widget);
#endif /* if 0 */
extern void XmxApplyBitmapToLabelWidget (Widget, String, unsigned int,
extern void XmxApplyBitmapToLabelWidget (Widget, String, unsigned int,
unsigned int);
extern Pixmap XmxCreatePixmapFromBitmap (Widget, String, unsigned int,
unsigned int);
extern void XmxApplyPixmapToLabelWidget (Widget, Pixmap);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndOneButton (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
String, int, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtonsSqueezed (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndTwoButtonsSqueezed (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
String, int, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
String, String, int, int, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtonsSqueezed (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndThreeButtonsSqueezed (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
String, String, int, int, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndFourButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndFourButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
String, String, String, int, int, int, int);
extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndFiveButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
String, String, String, String,
@ -340,11 +340,11 @@ extern Widget XmxMakeFormAndFiveButtons (Widget, XtCallbackProc, String,
extern int XmxModalYesOrNo (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr,
char *nostr);
extern char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr,
extern char *XmxModalPromptForString (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr,
char *nostr);
extern char *XmxModalPromptForPassword (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr,
extern char *XmxModalPromptForPassword (Widget parent, XtAppContext app,
char *questionstr, char *yesstr,
char *nostr);
/* Xmx2.c */
@ -355,9 +355,9 @@ extern void XmxRSetOptionMenuHistory (XmxMenuRecord *, int);
extern void XmxRSetValues (XmxMenuRecord *, int);
extern Widget XmxRGetWidget (XmxMenuRecord *, int);
extern XmxMenuRecord *XmxRMakeOptionMenu (Widget, String, XtCallbackProc,
extern XmxMenuRecord *XmxRMakeOptionMenu (Widget, String, XtCallbackProc,
XmxOptionMenuStruct *);
extern XmxMenuRecord *XmxRMakeToggleMenu (Widget, int, XtCallbackProc,
extern XmxMenuRecord *XmxRMakeToggleMenu (Widget, int, XtCallbackProc,
XmxToggleMenuStruct *);
extern XmxMenuRecord *XmxRMakeMenubar (Widget, XmxMenubarStruct *);

24
libXmx/Xmx2.c
View File

@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
/* ----------------------- _XmxMenuAddEntryToRecord ----------------------- */
/* Create a new MenuEntry and add it to the head of a MenuRecord list. */
private void
private void
_XmxMenuAddEntryToRecord (XmxMenuRecord *rec, Widget w, int token)
{
XmxMenuEntry *_ent;
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ XmxRSetSensitive (XmxMenuRecord *rec, int token, int state)
/* XtSetSensitive propagates down Widget hierarchy. */
if (_entry)
XtSetSensitive (_entry->w, (state == XmxSensitive) ? True : False);
return;
}
@ -153,9 +153,9 @@ XmxRSetToggleState (XmxMenuRecord *rec, int token, int state)
assert (state == XmxSet || state == XmxUnset);
_entry = _XmxMenuGetEntryFromRecord (rec, XmxExtractToken (token));
if (_entry)
XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState
XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState
(_entry->w, (state == XmxSet) ? True : False, False);
return;
}
@ -344,8 +344,8 @@ XmxRMakeToggleMenu (Widget parent, int behavior, XtCallbackProc cb,
/* Possible deficiency: will not be able to grey out a submenu
(cascade button). */
private void
_XmxRCreateMenubar (Widget menu, XmxMenubarStruct *menulist,
private void
_XmxRCreateMenubar (Widget menu, XmxMenubarStruct *menulist,
XmxMenuRecord *rec)
{
int _i;
@ -396,16 +396,16 @@ _XmxRCreateMenubar (Widget menu, XmxMenubarStruct *menulist,
XtAddCallback
(_buttons[_i - _separators], XmNvalueChangedCallback,
menulist[_i].func,
menulist[_i].func,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (menulist[_i].data));
/* Add thie button to the menu record. */
_XmxMenuAddEntryToRecord
_XmxMenuAddEntryToRecord
(rec, _buttons[_i - _separators], menulist[_i].data);
}
else /* regular button */
{
XmString xmstr =
XmString xmstr =
XmStringCreateLtoR
(menulist[_i].namestr, XmSTRING_DEFAULT_CHARSET);
XmxSetArg (XmNlabelString, (XtArgVal)xmstr);
@ -413,13 +413,13 @@ _XmxRCreateMenubar (Widget menu, XmxMenubarStruct *menulist,
("pushbutton", xmPushButtonGadgetClass,
menu, Xmx_wargs, Xmx_n);
XmStringFree (xmstr);
XtAddCallback
XtAddCallback
(_buttons[_i - _separators], XmNactivateCallback,
menulist[_i].func,
menulist[_i].func,
(XtPointer)_XmxMakeClientData (menulist[_i].data));
/* Add thie button to the menu record. */
_XmxMenuAddEntryToRecord
_XmxMenuAddEntryToRecord
(rec, _buttons[_i - _separators], menulist[_i].data);
}
}

30
libdtm/Makefile
View File

@ -49,23 +49,23 @@ dtm_ ::
@echo Either set up the ARCH environment or specify a machine type
@echo " ex: make sun"
solaris :
solaris :
make internal "CC=$(CC)" "CFLAGS = -DSUN -DSOLARIS" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = /bin/true libdtm.a"
solarisx86 :
solarisx86 :
make internal "CC=$(CC)" "CFLAGS = -DSUN -DSOLARIS" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = /bin/true libdtm.a"
alpha :
alpha :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DOSF1 -target $(TARGET_ARCH:-%=%)" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
linux :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DLINUX" \
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ linux :
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
sun4 : sun
sun :
sun :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DSUN -target $(TARGET_ARCH:-%=%)" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ sun :
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ_SPEC) convert$(ARCH).o mdd$(ARCH).o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm$(ARCH).a"
next :
next :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DNEXT " \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
@ -105,19 +105,19 @@ indy: $(OBJ) convert.o
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
cray :
cray :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DCRAY" "CFT = cft77" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) craycvt.o crayrtns.o" \
"ARCHIVE = bld q" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
make libdtmf77.a "CFLAGS = -DCRAY" "CFT = cft77" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) craycvt.o crayrtns.o sdsF.o" \
"ARCHIVE = bld q"
convex :
"ARCHIVE = bld q"
convex :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DCONVEX -fi" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o convert.o" "ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
ibm :
ibm :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DRS6000" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o convert.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
@ -125,11 +125,11 @@ hp :
make internal "CFLAGS = -Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o convert.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
dec :
dec :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DDEC" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o deccvt.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ar ts libdtm.a"
vax :
vax :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DVAX" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o vaxcvt.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
@ -160,12 +160,12 @@ clean::
install::
-mv $(DIR)/lib/libdtm.a $(DIR)/lib/libdtm.bak
cp *.a $(DIR)/lib
cp *.a $(DIR)/lib
-ranlib $(DIR)/lib/libdtm.a
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/dtm.h $(DIR)/include/sds.h
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/ris.h $(DIR)/include/db.h
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/mdd.h $(DIR)/include/sdl.h
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/debug.h $(DIR)/include/arch.h
cp dtm.h debug.h sds.h ris.h db.h mdd.h sdl.h arch.h $(DIR)/include
cp dtm.h debug.h sds.h ris.h db.h mdd.h sdl.h arch.h $(DIR)/include
include $(DEPENDS)
include $(DEPENDS)

30
libdtm/Makefile.orig
View File

@ -49,23 +49,23 @@ dtm_ ::
@echo Either set up the ARCH environment or specify a machine type
@echo " ex: make sun"
solaris :
solaris :
make internal "CC=$(CC)" "CFLAGS = -DSUN -DSOLARIS" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = /bin/true libdtm.a"
solarisx86 :
solarisx86 :
make internal "CC=$(CC)" "CFLAGS = -DSUN -DSOLARIS" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = /bin/true libdtm.a"
alpha :
alpha :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DOSF1 -target $(TARGET_ARCH:-%=%)" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
linux :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DLINUX" \
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ linux :
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
sun4 : sun
sun :
sun :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DSUN -target $(TARGET_ARCH:-%=%)" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ sun :
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ_SPEC) convert$(ARCH).o mdd$(ARCH).o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm$(ARCH).a"
next :
next :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DNEXT " \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) convert.o mdd.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
@ -105,19 +105,19 @@ indy: $(OBJ) convert.o
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
cray :
cray :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DCRAY" "CFT = cft77" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) craycvt.o crayrtns.o" \
"ARCHIVE = bld q" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
make libdtmf77.a "CFLAGS = -DCRAY" "CFT = cft77" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) craycvt.o crayrtns.o sdsF.o" \
"ARCHIVE = bld q"
convex :
"ARCHIVE = bld q"
convex :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DCONVEX -fi" \
"OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o convert.o" "ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
ibm :
ibm :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DRS6000" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o convert.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ranlib libdtm.a"
@ -125,11 +125,11 @@ hp :
make internal "CFLAGS = -Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o convert.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
dec :
dec :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DDEC" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o deccvt.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = ar ts libdtm.a"
vax :
vax :
make internal "CFLAGS = -DVAX" "OBJECTS = $(OBJ) mdd.o vaxcvt.o" \
"ARCHIVE = ar rv" \
"RANLIB_CMD = "
@ -160,12 +160,12 @@ clean::
install::
-mv $(DIR)/lib/libdtm.a $(DIR)/lib/libdtm.bak
cp *.a $(DIR)/lib
cp *.a $(DIR)/lib
-ranlib $(DIR)/lib/libdtm.a
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/dtm.h $(DIR)/include/sds.h
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/ris.h $(DIR)/include/db.h
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/mdd.h $(DIR)/include/sdl.h
-rm -f $(DIR)/include/debug.h $(DIR)/include/arch.h
cp dtm.h debug.h sds.h ris.h db.h mdd.h sdl.h arch.h $(DIR)/include
cp dtm.h debug.h sds.h ris.h db.h mdd.h sdl.h arch.h $(DIR)/include
include $(DEPENDS)
include $(DEPENDS)

56
libdtm/arch.h
View File

@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*********************************************************************
**
** $Header: /X11/mosaic/cvsroot/xmosaic3/libdtm/arch.h,v 1.5 1996/06/06 19:47:12 spowers Exp $
** $Header: /X11/mosaic/cvsroot/xmosaic3/libdtm/arch.h,v 1.5 1996/06/06 19:47:12 spowers Exp $
**
**********************************************************************/
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.7 92/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.6 1992/04/14 22:59:57 jefft
* included sys/limits.h instead of sys/limit.h
*
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
* Revision 1.4 92/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1992/03/10 16:52:43 jefft
* modified convex define to __convex__
*
@ -70,8 +70,8 @@
/*
The intent of this file is to provide a standard set of
architecturally descriptive preprocessor definitions by
examining the preprocessor identifiers that are defined
architecturally descriptive preprocessor definitions by
examining the preprocessor identifiers that are defined
in the native compiler running in the default mode.
Please feel free to add to or correct this file.
@ -87,21 +87,21 @@
SUN - generally any machine by Sun Microsystems
SGI - Silicon Graphics
CRAY - Cray Research
CONVEX - Convex
CONVEX - Convex
CM - Connection Machine
IBM
APPLE
HP
IBM
APPLE
HP
DEC
COMMODORE
General OS
DOS
General OS
DOS
UNIX
MACOS
AMIGA
VMS
AMIGA
VMS
OS2
General Processor
General Processor
SPARC
MIPS
68000
@ -110,8 +110,8 @@
80386
VAX
PA - HP Percision Architecture
RS6000
Specific Interesting Qualities
RS6000
Specific Interesting Qualities
BIG_ENDIAN
LITTLE_ENDIAN
WORD_SIZE - values include 16, 32, 64 (bits)
@ -121,12 +121,12 @@
( possible interesting definitions )
mc68k unix unixpc (hp 68k ?)
mc68000
mc68000
_I386 i386 AIX _AIX (PS2 running AIX)
alliant (68000 unix)
vax mc68k32 PORTAR (altos? 30068)
vax mc68k32 PORTAR (altos? 30068)
apollo aegis unix (??) (apollo)
i80386 (compac?) BSD
i80386 (compac?) BSD
convex unix (32 bit)
__convex_c1__
__convex_c2__
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@
# else
/* assume */
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_68000
# endif
#elif defined( NEXT )
# define _ARCH_NEXT
@ -209,7 +209,7 @@
# define _ARCH_CRAY
# define _ARCH_UNIX
# define _ARCH_SYSV /* A rough approximation */
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN /* ?? */
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN /* ?? */
# define _ARCH_WORD_SIZE 64
#elif defined(vax)
# define _ARCH_DEC
@ -230,7 +230,7 @@
#define _ARCH_WORD_SIZE 32
#define _ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN
#define _ARCH_PROTO
#elif defined( _IBMR2 )
#elif defined( _IBMR2 )
#define _ARCH_IBM
#define _ARCH_RS6000
#elif defined( AMIGA )
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@
# define _ARCH_COMMODORE
# define _ARCH_AMIGA
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_WORD_SIZE 32
#elif defined ( MS_DOS ) || defined(__TURBOC__)
# define _ARCH_MSDOS
@ -256,14 +256,14 @@
#elif defined ( THINK_C ) || defined( applec )
# define _ARCH_APPLE
# define _ARCH_MACOS
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
# define _ARCH_WORD_SIZE 32
# define _ARCH_PROTO
#elif defined( alliant )
/* ?? */
# define _ARCH_UNIX
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_68000
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
# define _ARCH_WORD_SIZE 32
#elif defined( __convex__ ) || defined( __convex_c1__ ) || defined( __convex_c2__ )
@ -278,13 +278,13 @@
*/
#if !defined( _ARCH_UNIX ) && !defined( _ARCH_MSDOS ) && !defined( _ARCH_VMS ) \
&& !defined( _ARCH_MACOS ) && !defined( _ARCH_AMIGA ) && !defined( _ARCH_OS2)
# if defined( unix )
# if defined( unix )
# define _ARCH_UNIX
# endif
#endif
#if !defined( _ARCH_BSD ) && !defined( _ARCH_SYSV ) && defined( _ARCH_UNIX )
# if defined( USG )
# if defined( USG )
# define _ARCH_SYSV
# endif
#endif
@ -294,7 +294,7 @@
|| defined( mc68020 ) || defined( mc68010 )
# define _ARCH_68000
# if !defined( _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN )
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
# define _ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
# endif
# endif
#endif

18
libdtm/callback.c
View File

@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ static void DTMsigioHandler( sig, code, scp, addr )
char *addr;
#endif
{
/*
/*
Unfortunately, not one of the parameters listed above
provides even the slightest help in determinine WHICH
port is now ready for input, and any system calls
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ static void DTMsigioHandler( sig, code, scp, addr )
if ( !DTMpt[i]->callback ) continue;
port = i;
dtm_map_port_external(&port);
#if 0
#if 0
if ((ready = DTMavailRead( port ))== DTMERROR) continue;
if ( ready == DTM_PORT_READY ) {
DBGMSG( "DTMsigioHandler calling user routine\n" );
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ int dtm_sigio( fd )
#endif
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
#ifdef __hpux
if (flags = ioctl( fd, FIOSSAIOSTAT, &sigio_on ) == -1 ) {
#else
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ int dtm_sigio( fd )
#endif
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
return DTM_OK;
}
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ int DTMreadReady( int port, void (*pfn)() )
int DTMreadReady( port, pfn )
int32 port;
void (*pfn)();
#endif
#endif
{
DTMPORT * pp;
@ -136,14 +136,14 @@ int DTMreadReady( port, pfn )
if ( pp->porttype != INPORTTYPE ) {
DTMerrno = DTMBADPORT;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
DBGMSG1( "DTMreadReady port has sockfd %d\n", pp->sockfd );
#ifndef _ARCH_MSDOS
if ( (int)signal( SIGIO, DTMsigioHandler) == -1 ) {
DBGMSG( "DTMreadReady signal failed\n" );
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
#endif
pp->callback = pfn;
{
@ -151,12 +151,12 @@ int DTMreadReady( port, pfn )
if( dtm_sigio( pp->sockfd )== DTMERROR) {
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
FOR_EACH_IN_PORT( inp, pp ) {
if (dtm_sigio( inp->fd )== DTMERROR) {
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
}
}
return DTM_OK;

2
libdtm/convert.c
View File

@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.3 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.2 1991/06/11 15:21:13 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*

4
libdtm/craycvt.c
View File

@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.4 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1991/06/11 15:21:41 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:29:13 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
#endif

2
libdtm/crayinit.f
View File

@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ c Plugging DTM in...
c
c Revision 1.3 91/06/13 21:23:57 jefft
c added type of function to prevent returning of a float
c
c
c Revision 1.2 1991/06/11 15:21:54 sreedhar
c disclaimer added
c

4
libdtm/crayrtns.f
View File

@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ c Plugging DTM in...
c
c Revision 1.4 91/06/11 15:21:47 sreedhar
c disclaimer added
c
c
c Revision 1.3 1991/05/16 04:40:13 jefft
c Fixed bugs in TRIPLET conversion
c
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ c Fixed bug in Cray floating point conversion routines.
c
c Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:30:17 jefft
c Initial revision
c
c

8
libdtm/debug.h
View File

@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.8 92/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.7 1991/11/15 19:42:34 jplevyak
* Removed dependancy on dtmint.h
*
@ -52,10 +52,10 @@
*
* Revision 1.4 91/09/26 20:13:12 jplevyak
* Changed to allow setting of debug flags at run time.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 91/08/15 19:10:25 sreedhar
* Changes for logical portname version
*
*
* Revision 1.2 1991/06/11 15:22:30 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
*/
#ifndef DEBUG_INC
#define DEBUG_INC
#define DEBUG_INC
#define DBGFLOW(s) if (uDTMdbg & DTM_DBG_MSG) fprintf(stderr, s)

10
libdtm/deccvt.c
View File

@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.4 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1992/04/03 18:25:50 jplevyak
* Fixed indice computation problem.
*
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:40:06 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
#endif
@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ static int dtm_short(mode, buf, size)
{
int nShorts, i;
DBGFLOW("# dtm_short called.\n");
nShorts = (mode == DTMLOCAL) ? (size / 2) : size;
if (buf)
for ( i = 0; i < nShorts ; i++ ) {
swap(*buf, *(buf+1));
buf += 2;
buf += 2;
}
return ((mode == DTMLOCAL) ? (size / 2) : (size * 2));
}

282
libdtm/dtm.c
View File

@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.46 92/05/05 22:27:50 jplevyak
* Corrected X interface code.
*
*
* Revision 1.45 1992/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.41 92/03/18 22:25:44 jplevyak
* Fix DTMEOF bug with absolute addressed.
*
*
* Revision 1.40 1992/03/16 20:38:36 creiman
* Added #include "arch.h"
*
@ -119,7 +119,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.29 92/01/25 14:44:04 jplevyak
* Fixed minor bug with DTM_ASYNC and another in AvailWrite
*
*
* Revision 1.28 1992/01/14 19:40:09 creiman
* #ifndef macintosh for accept_read_connections call to dtm_sigio
*
@ -170,7 +170,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.13 91/10/14 16:46:18 jplevyak
* Added loop for detecting dropped connections during beginRead.
*
*
* Revision 1.12 1991/10/11 20:21:50 jplevyak
* Fixed bug with multiple senders one receiver.
* Added function DTMcheckRoute.
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@
* Revision 1.10 91/09/26 20:22:43 jplevyak
* First stage of reorganization. Use external/internal port mapping.
* Use repackaged dtm_get_nlist and select_one. Fix bugs with availWrite.
*
*
* Revision 1.9 1991/09/13 17:34:10 sreedhar
* changes for DTMSYNC, DTMNOSYNC quality of service
*
@ -204,7 +204,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:12:20 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/
/*
@ -216,33 +216,33 @@
3. Sender awaits "ack from seq start" from the receiver.
Receipt of ack by sender guarantees the sender that
receiver will definitely accept at least the first user message
receiver will definitely accept at least the first user message
sent by the sender. Sender can then send as many user messages
as it wants to ( they would be accepted by receiver ).
4. Sender sends the user's header message and user data messages.
4. Sender sends the user's header message and user data messages.
3. Receiver will keep accepting user messages on current
3. Receiver will keep accepting user messages on current
connection unless a new connection request is received, which
would be accepted after bumping the current connection.
4. Sender would send "Messages over" message after it sends all user
messages. Receiver would accept same.
Graphic picture
Graphic picture
Sender Receiver
Connect request
-------------->
Connect request
-------------->
Sequence starts |
--------------> |
|
Ack for seq start |
<---------------- |
|
User header |
|
User header |
--------------> |
| --> a sequence of
| BEGINWRITE,
@ -263,13 +263,13 @@
...............
A "sequence starts" message can be sent in availWrite or
beginWrite.
A "sequence starts" message can be sent in availWrite or
beginWrite.
When no "Ack for header" is received or a write fails.
Note that the "ack for header", "message over" and "sequence starts"
messages are called called "ack" in DTM terminology ( send_ack,
messages are called called "ack" in DTM terminology ( send_ack,
recv_ack calls used for all these ).
*/
@ -438,12 +438,12 @@ static int make_out_connections( pp )
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
if( pcur->connfd == DTM_NO_CONNECTION) {
if( dtm_connect( &pcur->sockaddr, &pcur->connfd )
if( dtm_connect( &pcur->sockaddr, &pcur->connfd )
== DTMERROR ) {
DBGFLOW( "make_out_connections: dtm_connect fails \n" );
return DTMERROR;
}
}
}
}
return DTM_OK;
}
@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ static int clear_write_flags(DTMPORT *pp )
#else
static int clear_write_flags( pp )
DTMPORT *pp;
#endif
#endif
{
Outport * pcur;
@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ static int clear_write_flags( pp )
/*
verify_out_connections()
Ensure that their is a connection on each out port.
*/
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
static int verify_out_connections(DTMPORT *pp )
#else
@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ static int verify_out_connections( pp )
if( pcur->connfd == DTM_NO_CONNECTION) {
DTMerrno = DTMPORTINIT;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
}
return DTM_OK;
}
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ static int check_header_write_ack( pp )
if ( pcur->connfd == DTM_NO_CONNECTION ) continue;
if( !( pcur->availwrite ) ) {
int32 tmp;
if( (pp->qservice == DTM_SYNC) || ((pp->qservice == DTM_ASYNC) &&
if( (pp->qservice == DTM_SYNC) || ((pp->qservice == DTM_ASYNC) &&
(dtm_select( pcur->connfd, &tmp, 0 ) == TRUE && tmp >= 4))) {
do {
int temp;
@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ static int check_header_write_ack( pp )
*/
}
} while ( dtm_select( pcur->connfd, &tmp, 0 ) == TRUE &&
tmp >= 4);
tmp >= 4);
pcur->availwrite = TRUE;
}
}
@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ static int check_header_write_ack( pp )
static void make_write_iov(IOV_BUF *iov,int fStartSeq,int fEndSeq,char *hdr,
int hdrsize,VOIDPTR data,int datasize )
#else
static void make_write_iov( iov, fStartSeq, fEndSeq, hdr, hdrsize,
static void make_write_iov( iov, fStartSeq, fEndSeq, hdr, hdrsize,
data, datasize )
IOV_BUF *iov;
int fStartSeq;
@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ static void make_write_iov( iov, fStartSeq, fEndSeq, hdr, hdrsize,
if ( fStartSeq ) {
DBGMSG( "make_write_iov: making start seq\n" );
iov->rts_data = DTM_RTS;
iov->rts_data = DTM_RTS;
STDINT( iov->rts_data );
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_base = (char *)&iov->rts_data ;
#define SEQ_START_LEN 4
@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ static void make_write_iov( iov, fStartSeq, fEndSeq, hdr, hdrsize,
if ( hdrsize != 0 ) {
DBGMSG( "make_write_iov: making header\n" );
iov->hdr_size = hdrsize ;
STDINT( iov->hdr_size );
STDINT( iov->hdr_size );
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_base = (char *)&iov->hdr_size ;
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_len = 4 ;
i += 1 ;
@ -612,8 +612,8 @@ static void make_write_iov( iov, fStartSeq, fEndSeq, hdr, hdrsize,
DBGMSG( "make_write_iov: making endseq\n" );
iov->end_data = DTM_EOT ;
STDINT( iov->end_data );
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_base = (char *)&iov->end_data ;
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_len = 4 ;
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_base = (char *)&iov->end_data ;
iov->iovec[ i ].iov_len = 4 ;
i += 1 ;
iov->iovsize += 4;
}
@ -646,27 +646,27 @@ static int writev_buffer( pp, iov_buf, fStartSeq )
if ( fStartSeq ) {
if (pcur->availwrite || pcur->seqstart ) {
DBGMSG1( "writev: dropping start seq = %x\n",
DBGMSG1( "writev: dropping start seq = %x\n",
(pcur->availwrite?1:0) | (pcur->seqstart?10:0));
/* we have already sent the sequence start, skip it */
iov++;
iovsize -= SEQ_START_LEN;
iovlen -= 1;
}
pcur->seqstart = TRUE;
}
pcur->seqstart = TRUE;
}
DBGMSG1( "writev_buffer: iovlen = %d\n", iovlen );
DBGMSG1( "writev_buffer: iovsize = %d\n", iovsize );
DBGMSG1( "writev_buffer: ptr iov = %X\n", iov );
DBGMSG1( "writev_buffer: first ptr word = %X\n", iov[0].iov_base );
DBGMSG1( "writev_buffer: first word = %d\n",
DBGMSG1( "writev_buffer: first word = %d\n",
*(int *)((iov[0]).iov_base));
status = dtm_writev_buffer( pcur->connfd, iov, iovlen, iovsize,
NULL, 0);
DBGINT( "writev_buffer - status = %d\n", status);
DBGINT( "writev_buffer - status = %d\n", status);
if( status < 0 ) {
if( status < 0 ) {
DBGINT( "dtm_writev_buffer - errno = %d\n", errno );
if( DTMerrno == DTMEOF ) {
CHECK_ERR( destroy_out_port( pp, &pcur ));
@ -702,16 +702,16 @@ static int32 select_one( connfd )
FD_SET( connfd, &readmask );
#ifdef __hpux
ret = select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)&readmask, (int *)0, (int *)0,
ret = select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)&readmask, (int *)0, (int *)0,
#else
ret = select( FD_SETSIZE, &readmask, (fd_set *)0, (fd_set *)0,
ret = select( FD_SETSIZE, &readmask, (fd_set *)0, (fd_set *)0,
#endif
&timeout );
&timeout );
if ( ret > 0 ) {
int32 count;
ioctl( connfd, FIONREAD, &count );
DBGMSG1( "select_one: got count = %d\n", count );
ret = count;
ret = count;
}
return ret;
}
@ -735,11 +735,11 @@ static int select_one_connection( connfd )
FD_SET( connfd, &readmask );
#ifdef __hpux
return select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)&readmask, (int *)0, (int *)0,
return select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)&readmask, (int *)0, (int *)0,
#else
return select( FD_SETSIZE, &readmask, (fd_set *)0, (fd_set *)0,
return select( FD_SETSIZE, &readmask, (fd_set *)0, (fd_set *)0,
#endif
&timeout );
&timeout );
}
/*
@ -749,15 +749,15 @@ static int select_one_connection( connfd )
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
static Inport * new_in_port(DTMPORT *pp,int fd )
#else
static Inport * new_in_port( pp, fd )
static Inport * new_in_port( pp, fd )
DTMPORT * pp;
int fd;
#endif
#endif
{
Inport * inp;
if ( (inp = (Inport *) malloc( sizeof(Inport) )) == NULL ) {
DTMerrno = DTMMEM;
DTMerrno = DTMMEM;
return (Inport *) DTMERROR;
}
memset(inp,0,sizeof(Inport));
@ -775,14 +775,14 @@ static Inport * new_in_port( pp, fd )
#ifdef PUT_NEW_IN_PORTS_AT_END
{
Inport * endp;
endp = pp->in;
if ( endp == NULL )
endp = pp->in;
if ( endp == NULL )
pp->in = inp;
else {
while ( endp->next != NULL ) endp = endp->next;
endp->next = inp;
}
}
}
}
#else
inp->next = pp->in;
pp->in = inp;
@ -794,8 +794,8 @@ static Inport * new_in_port( pp, fd )
void dtm_handle_in( caddr_t client_data, int * fd, void * id)
#else
void dtm_handle_in( client_data, fd, id )
caddr_t client_data;
int * fd;
caddr_t client_data;
int * fd;
void * id;
#endif
{
@ -812,10 +812,10 @@ void dtm_handle_in( client_data, fd, id )
dtm_set_Xcallback
This function may seem a little strange, after all why have a variable
(pp->XaddInput) which has only one valid value (XtAddInput).
The problem is that we don't want to include the X libraries
unless we have to. By using this variable which is only set
if the function that will cause this function to get called
(pp->XaddInput) which has only one valid value (XtAddInput).
The problem is that we don't want to include the X libraries
unless we have to. By using this variable which is only set
if the function that will cause this function to get called
is included... which causes the inclusion of the X libraries, we
avoid the undefined external error.
*/
@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ void dtm_set_Xcallback( pp, inp )
/* you didn't see this */
int p; for ( p = 0; p < DTMptCount ; p++ ) if ( pp == DTMpt[p] ) break;
if ( pp->porttype == INPORTTYPE && pp->XaddInput ) {
inp->XinputId = pp->XaddInput( inp->fd, XtInputReadMask,
inp->XinputId = pp->XaddInput( inp->fd, XtInputReadMask,
dtm_handle_in, (caddr_t) p);
}
}
@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ int dtm_accept_read_connections(DTMPORT *pp,int fWait )
#else
int dtm_accept_read_connections( pp, fWait )
DTMPORT * pp;
int fWait;
int fWait;
#endif
{
struct timeval timeout ;
@ -878,16 +878,16 @@ int dtm_accept_read_connections( pp, fWait )
/* No connection yet, await one and accept */
DBGINT( "dtm_accept_read_connection: pp -> sockfd = %d\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_accept_read_connection: pp -> sockfd = %d\n",
pp -> sockfd );
if( (fd = dtm_accept( pp->sockfd, &pp->sockaddr, fWait ? &timeout : 0))
if( (fd = dtm_accept( pp->sockfd, &pp->sockaddr, fWait ? &timeout : 0))
== DTMERROR ) {
if ( !fWait ) return DTM_OK;
DTMerrno = DTMTIMEOUT ;
return DTMERROR;
}
DBGINT( "dtm_accept_read_connection: got fd = %d\n", fd );
CHECK_ERR( inp = new_in_port( pp, fd ));
CHECK_ERR( inp = new_in_port( pp, fd ));
#ifndef _ARCH_MACOS
if ( pp->callback ) dtm_sigio( fd );
if ( pp->Xcallback ) dtm_set_Xcallback( pp, inp );
@ -904,13 +904,13 @@ int dtm_accept_read_connections( pp, fWait )
/*
DTMselectRead()
Function to test
a) for existence of a new connection or a new
Function to test
a) for existence of a new connection or a new
message header to be read on a set of DTM ports OR
b) for whether data is available to be read on a
b) for whether data is available to be read on a
set of sockets.
Return values :
Return values :
DTM_PORT_READY if at least a DTM port or
socket has something to be
read.
@ -920,7 +920,7 @@ int dtm_accept_read_connections( pp, fWait )
error.
Each port has status field. Possible values
for status field are -
for status field are -
DTM_PORT_READY something available to be read.
DTM_PORT_NOT_READY nothing available to be read.
@ -963,14 +963,14 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
/* Set up DTM ports to be selected on */
for( p1 = dtmset, index = 0 ; index < dtmnum ; index++, p1++ ) {
reg DTMPORT *pp ;
int port_internal;
reg DTMPORT *pp ;
int port_internal;
reg Inport *inp;
/* Select status is error if port entry is
not initialised.
/* Select status is error if port entry is
not initialised.
*/
if( (port_internal = dtm_map_port_internal( p1->port ))
if( (port_internal = dtm_map_port_internal( p1->port ))
== DTMERROR ) {
p1->status = DTMERROR ;
continue ;
@ -981,11 +981,11 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
/* look for new connection request */
FD_SET( pp -> sockfd, fchk );
FD_SET( pp -> sockfd, fchk );
/* look for data in existing connection (if it exists) */
FOR_EACH_IN_PORT( inp, pp ) {
FD_SET( inp->fd, fchk );
FD_SET( inp->fd, fchk );
}
p1->status = DTM_PORT_NOT_READY ;
}
@ -994,21 +994,21 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
for( p2 = sockset, index = 0 ; index < socknum ; index++, p2++ ) {
FD_SET( p2 -> sockfd, fchk );
p2 -> status = DTM_PORT_NOT_READY ;
}
p2 -> status = DTM_PORT_NOT_READY ;
}
#ifdef __hpux
nf = select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)fchk, (int *)0, (int *)0,
nf = select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)fchk, (int *)0, (int *)0,
#else
nf = select( FD_SETSIZE, fchk, (fd_set *)0, (fd_set *)0,
nf = select( FD_SETSIZE, fchk, (fd_set *)0, (fd_set *)0,
#endif
period < 0 ? NULL : &timeout );
/* Select returns error */
/* Select returns error */
if( nf < 0 ) {
DBGINT( "DTMselectRead: select error %d \n", errno );
DTMerrno = DTMSELECT ;
return DTMERROR ;
if( nf < 0 ) {
DBGINT( "DTMselectRead: select error %d \n", errno );
DTMerrno = DTMSELECT ;
return DTMERROR ;
}
/* None of the DTM ports or sockets have anything to be read */
@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
if( nf == 0 ) {
DBGFLOW( "DTMselectRead: Nothing to read\n" );
return DTM_PORT_NOT_READY ;
}
}
/* Check whether any DTM port has something to be read */
@ -1027,14 +1027,14 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
if ((port_internal= dtm_map_port_internal( p1->port )) == DTMERROR)
continue;
pp = DTMpt[ port_internal ];
if (pp->porttype == INPORTTYPE) {
fNewConnections = fNewConnections ||
(select_one_connection( pp->sockfd ) > 0);
p1->status = DTM_PORT_NOT_READY;
} else {
if (select_one_connection( pp->sockfd ) > 0)
if (select_one_connection( pp->sockfd ) > 0)
fReady = p1->status = DTM_PORT_READY;
else p1->status = DTM_PORT_NOT_READY;
continue;
@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
continue;
}
p1->status = DTM_PORT_READY;
}
}
inp = inp->next;
}
if ( p1->status == DTM_PORT_READY ) fReady = DTM_PORT_READY;
@ -1058,14 +1058,14 @@ int DTMselectRead( dtmset, dtmnum, sockset, socknum, period )
/* Check whether any socket has something to be read */
for( p2 = sockset, index = 0 ; index < socknum ; index++, p2++ ) {
p2 -> status = FD_ISSET( p2 -> sockfd, fchk ) ?
p2 -> status = FD_ISSET( p2 -> sockfd, fchk ) ?
DTM_PORT_READY : DTM_PORT_NOT_READY ;
if ( p2->status == DTM_PORT_READY ) fReady = DTM_PORT_READY;
}
DBGFLOW( "DTMselectRead done loop\n" );
} while (!fReady && (fNewConnections || fFalsePositive));
} while (!fReady && (fNewConnections || fFalsePositive));
return fReady ;
}
@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@ static Inport * inc_in_port(DTMPORT *pp,Inport *inp )
static Inport * inc_in_port( pp, inp )
DTMPORT * pp;
Inport * inp;
#endif
#endif
{
if ( inp == NULL || inp->next == NULL )
return pp->in;
@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ static void inc_nextToRead(DTMPORT *pp )
static void inc_nextToRead( pp )
DTMPORT * pp;
#endif
{
{
pp->nextToRead = inc_in_port( pp, pp->nextToRead );
}
@ -1106,7 +1106,7 @@ int dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp )
if ( pp->Xcallback ) pp->XremoveInput( inp->XinputId );
close( inp->fd );
if ( pp->nextToRead == inp )
inc_nextToRead( pp );
if ( pp->nextToRead == inp )
@ -1136,7 +1136,7 @@ int dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp )
return DTM_OK;
}
/*
send_cts()
@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@ static int send_cts(DTMPORT *pp,int fWait )
static int send_cts( pp, fWait )
DTMPORT * pp;
int fWait;
#endif
#endif
{
Inport * inp = pp->nextToRead;
Inport * endp;
@ -1157,7 +1157,7 @@ static int send_cts( pp, fWait )
DBGMSG( "send_cts: <[\n" );
/*
If we have no ports return OK
If we have no ports return OK
*/
if ( inp == NULL ) inp = pp->in;
if ( inp == NULL ) return DTM_OK;
@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@ static int send_cts( pp, fWait )
if ( inp == endp ) {
if ( !fWait ) return DTM_OK;
else break;
}
}
}
pp->nextToRead = inp;
@ -1186,7 +1186,7 @@ static int send_cts( pp, fWait )
if ( !inp->fCTSsent && ((fWait && (iSent == 1 )) ||
(dtm_select( inp->fd, &tmp, 0 ) == TRUE && tmp >= 4))) {
if ( dtm_send_ack( inp->fd, DTM_CTS ) == DTMERROR) {
CHECK_ERR( dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp ));
CHECK_ERR( dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp ));
/*
Never hurts to start at the top.
*/
@ -1202,9 +1202,9 @@ static int send_cts( pp, fWait )
iSent = 0;
continue;
}
inp->fCTSsent = TRUE;
inp->fCTSsent = TRUE;
inp->blocklen = DTM_NEW_DATASET;
}
}
inp = inc_in_port( pp, inp );
}
DBGMSG( "send_cts: ]>\n" );
@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ static int accept_one_header(DTMPORT *pp,void *header,int size )
#else
static int accept_one_header( pp, header, size )
DTMPORT * pp;
void * header;
void * header;
int size;
#endif
{
@ -1227,23 +1227,23 @@ static int accept_one_header( pp, header, size )
if ( inp == NULL || !inp->fCTSsent || inp->fGotHeader ) {
DTMerrno = DTMCALL;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
DBGMSG1( "Accepting RTS on %d\n", inp->fd );
if (dtm_recv_ack( inp->fd, &ack ) == DTMERROR ) {
dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp );
dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp );
return DTMERROR;
}
if( ack != DTM_RTS ) {
DTMerrno = DTMBADACK;
DBGMSG1( "Something other than RTS received %d\n", ack );
dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp );
dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp );
return DTMERROR;
}
#if 0
/* There are no header ack */
if ( dtm_send_ack( inp->fd, DTM_CTS ) == DTMERROR) {
dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp );
dtm_destroy_in_port( inp, pp );
return DTMERROR;
}
#endif
@ -1262,7 +1262,7 @@ static int accept_one_header( pp, header, size )
/*
DTMcheckRoute()
Check whether new routing information has come in.
Returns:
Returns:
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
int DTMcheckRoute(int port )
@ -1289,16 +1289,16 @@ int DTMcheckRoute( port )
Function to test for existence of a new connection or
a new message header to be read on a given DTM port.
Return values : TRUE if either new connection
request or something new
Return values : TRUE if either new connection
request or something new
to be read is available on
given port.
DTMERROR on select error.
DTMERROR on select error.
FALSE otherwise.
Notes :
DTMavailRead is basically call to DTMselectRead for
DTMavailRead is basically call to DTMselectRead for
given port with 0 timeout.
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ int DTMavailRead( p )
DTMerrno = DTMNOERR;
/* Note: the port here is an external port since that
is what selectRead expects
is what selectRead expects
*/
dtmnum = 1 ;
dtmset.port = p ;
@ -1331,7 +1331,7 @@ int DTMavailRead( p )
DBGMSG1( "DTMavailRead send_cts returned error %d\n", DTMerrno );
if ( DTMerrno == DTMEOF ) fAnyReady = FALSE ;
else return DTMERROR;
}
}
}
DBGMSG( "DTMavailRead done\n" );
return fAnyReady;
@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@ int DTMgetConnectionCount(port, n_connections)
message is read.
Return values : >= 0 on success.
DTMERROR on some error.
DTMERROR on some error.
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
int DTMbeginRead(int p,VOIDPTR header,int size )
@ -1406,8 +1406,8 @@ int DTMbeginRead( p, header, size )
CHECK_ERR( p = dtm_map_port_internal( p ));
pp = DTMpt[p];
while ( TRUE ) {
while ( TRUE ) {
CHECK_ERR( dtm_accept_read_connections( pp, DTM_WAIT));
if ( send_cts( pp, DTM_WAIT ) == DTMERROR) {
if ( DTMerrno == DTMEOF ) continue;
@ -1415,8 +1415,8 @@ int DTMbeginRead( p, header, size )
}
if ( pp->nextToRead == NULL ) continue;
DBGFLOW( "DTMbeginRead before accept_one_header.\n" );
if (( count = accept_one_header( pp, header, size )) == DTMERROR ) {
if ( DTMerrno == DTMEOF ) continue;
if (( count = accept_one_header( pp, header, size )) == DTMERROR ) {
if ( DTMerrno == DTMEOF ) continue;
return DTMERROR;
}
break;
@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ int DTMbeginRead( p, header, size )
/*
DTMreadDataset()
Function to read user messages.
Function to read user messages.
Return values : number of bytes read, on success
DTMERROR on error
@ -1466,7 +1466,7 @@ int DTMreadDataset(p, ds, size, type)
/* fill buffer from network */
/*
Assume that the caller has checked for EOT
Assume that the caller has checked for EOT
*/
CHECK_ERR( size = dtm_read_buffer( inp->fd, &inp->blocklen, ds, size));
@ -1512,22 +1512,22 @@ int DTMendRead( p )
dtm_discard, DISCARDSIZE) > 0 );
inp->fCTSsent = FALSE;
inp->fGotHeader = FALSE;
return DTM_OK ;
return DTM_OK ;
}
/*
Function to combine reading of header/data.
Return values : number of bytes read, on success
DTMERROR on error
DTMERROR on error
Notes : This function is really there for completeness
sake ( it complements DTMwriteMsg ). It is not
very clear how a user can use it effectively
( since he has to know data size beforehand,
in which case he need not have a header ).
Hence, implementation of this function is to
Hence, implementation of this function is to
just call beginRead, readDataset and endRead
in that order.
*/
@ -1565,7 +1565,7 @@ int DTMreadMsg( p, hdr, hdrsize, data, datasize, datatype )
Return values : TRUE if subsequent write will
succeed.
FALSE subsequent write will wait/fail.
FALSE subsequent write will wait/fail.
DTMERROR if port is not initialised or
server ( UDP/TCP ) port not
yet acquired etc.
@ -1603,12 +1603,12 @@ int DTMavailWrite( port )
err_count = 0 ;
rstatus = DTM_PORT_READY ;
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
/* Connect to all new active sockets */
if( pcur->connfd == DTM_NO_CONNECTION ) {
if( dtm_quick_connect( &pcur->sockaddr, &pcur->connfd )
if( dtm_quick_connect( &pcur->sockaddr, &pcur->connfd )
== DTMERROR ) {
++err_count ;
continue ;
@ -1628,14 +1628,14 @@ int DTMavailWrite( port )
/* send RTS to new sockets */
if( dtm_send_ack( pcur->connfd, DTM_RTS ) == DTMERROR ) {
if( DTMerrno == DTMEOF )
if( DTMerrno == DTMEOF )
CHECK_ERR( destroy_out_port( pp, &pcur ));
++err_count ;
continue ;
}
}
pcur->seqstart = TRUE ;
}
nf = select_one( pcur->connfd );
if( nf < 0 ) {
@ -1648,10 +1648,10 @@ int DTMavailWrite( port )
/* No ack yet */
if( nf == 0 ) {
if( pp->qservice == DTM_SYNC )
if( pp->qservice == DTM_SYNC )
rstatus = DTM_PORT_NOT_READY ;
continue ;
}
}
/* Receive ack */
@ -1661,7 +1661,7 @@ int DTMavailWrite( port )
CHECK_ERR( destroy_out_port( pp, &pcur ));
++err_count ;
continue ;
}
}
/* port is available for write */
@ -1674,7 +1674,7 @@ int DTMavailWrite( port )
At some future point we may want to send the status
of err_count to the server.
*/
pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite = ( err_count == 0 )
pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite = ( err_count == 0 )
&& ( rstatus == DTM_PORT_READY );
return ( err_count != 0 ) ? DTM_PORT_NOT_READY : rstatus ;
}
@ -1688,7 +1688,7 @@ int DTMavailWrite( port )
int DTMbeginWrite(int port,VOIDPTR header,int size )
#else
int DTMbeginWrite( port, header, size )
int port ;
int port ;
VOIDPTR header;
int size ;
#endif
@ -1702,8 +1702,8 @@ int DTMbeginWrite( port, header, size )
if ( pp->fDiscard ) {
CHECK_ERR( dtm_check_server( pp, DTM_DONT_WAIT ));
if ( pp->fDiscard ) return DTM_OK;
}
if ( !pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite )
}
if ( !pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite )
CHECK_ERR( dtm_check_server( pp, DTM_WAIT ));
CHECK_ERR( make_out_connections( pp ));
make_write_iov( &iov_buf, START_SEQ, NO_END_SEQ, header, size, NULL, 0 );
@ -1734,7 +1734,7 @@ int DTMwriteDataset(p, ds, size, type)
IOV_BUF iov_buf;
CHECK_ERR( p = dtm_map_port_internal( p ));
pp = DTMpt[p];
pp = DTMpt[p];
if ( pp->fDiscard ) return DTM_OK;
CHECK_ERR( verify_out_connections( pp ));
size = (*DTMconvertRtns[(int)type]) ( DTMSTD, ds, size );
@ -1760,12 +1760,12 @@ int DTMendWrite( port )
reg Outport * pcur ;
CHECK_ERR( port = dtm_map_port_internal( port ));
pp = DTMpt[port];
pp = DTMpt[port];
/*
Check for endWrite before begin
*/
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
if( pcur->connfd == DTM_NO_CONNECTION ) continue;
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
if( pcur->connfd == DTM_NO_CONNECTION ) continue;
if ((pp->qservice == DTM_SYNC && !pcur->availwrite) ||
!pcur->seqstart ) {
DTMerrno = DTMCALL;
@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ int DTMendWrite( port )
}
if ( pp->fDiscard ) return DTM_OK;
CHECK_ERR( verify_out_connections( pp ));
make_write_iov( &iov_buf, NO_START_SEQ, END_SEQ, NULL, 0, NULL, 0 );
make_write_iov( &iov_buf, NO_START_SEQ, END_SEQ, NULL, 0, NULL, 0 );
CHECK_ERR( writev_buffer( pp, &iov_buf, NO_START_SEQ ));
CHECK_ERR( clear_write_flags( pp ));
return DTM_OK;
@ -1820,8 +1820,8 @@ int DTMwriteMsg( p, hdr, hdrsize, data, datasize, datatype )
if ( pp->fDiscard ) {
CHECK_ERR( dtm_check_server( pp, DTM_DONT_WAIT ));
if ( pp->fDiscard ) return DTM_OK;
}
if ( !pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite )
}
if ( !pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite )
CHECK_ERR( dtm_check_server( pp, DTM_WAIT ));
CHECK_ERR( make_out_connections( pp ));
CHECK_ERR( verify_out_connections( pp ));

38
libdtm/dtm.h
View File

@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*************************************************************************
**
** dtm.h -
** dtm.h -
**
*************************************************************************/
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.32 92/05/06 16:40:17 jefft
* Modified prototype on DTMaddInput
*
*
* Revision 1.31 1992/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.29 92/03/20 21:14:40 jplevyak
* Add DTMgetPortAddr and remove DTMgetPortName
*
*
* Revision 1.28 1992/03/13 18:20:31 jefft
* dtm.h depended on TRUE being defined before it was included. This word
* TRUE was changed to 1 and FALSE to 0
@ -63,23 +63,23 @@
*
* Revision 1.25 92/02/18 14:02:36 jplevyak
* Added prototype for DTMaddInPortSocket.
*
*
* Revision 1.24 92/01/30 19:28:24 jplevyak
* add prototypes
*
*
* Revision 1.23 1992/01/02 16:31:56 dweber
* Reorganized the DTM class and MSG class
*
* Revision 1.22 91/12/13 22:34:48 jefft
* Removed DTMtitle and DTMtype constants. Added dtm_(sg)et_address macros.
* Added MSG(sg)etString macros.
*
*
* Revision 1.21 91/12/13 15:37:55 dweber
* Fixed DTMHL bugs and re-ordered some macros for clarification
*
*
* Revision 1.20 91/12/12 22:55:27 jefft
* Add numbers to the comments beside the DTM errors
*
*
* Revision 1.19 1991/12/10 22:15:56 jefft
* fixed DTMgetAddress macro (it was calling dtm_set_char).
*
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@
* Revision 1.15 91/10/11 20:23:31 jplevyak
* Added prototype for DTMcheckRoute,
* Changed DTMSYNC, DTMNOSYNC to DTM_SYNC, DTM_ASYNC.
*
*
* Revision 1.14 1991/10/10 14:23:43 jplevyak
* All prototypes are now included and tested.
*
@ -105,10 +105,10 @@
*
* Revision 1.12 91/09/18 15:27:54 jplevyak
* Added extern definition for DTMinit()
*
*
* Revision 1.11 91/09/13 17:36:05 sreedhar
* DTMSYNC, DTMNOSYNC added
*
*
* Revision 1.10 1991/09/13 15:31:45 jefft
* fixed DTMHL macro, it should not have taken an arguement.
*
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:31:19 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/
@ -153,7 +153,7 @@
#define DTM_PROTOTYPES
#define DTM_PROTO(x) x
#else
#define DTM_PROTO(x) ()
#define DTM_PROTO(x) ()
#endif
/* DTM constants */
@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ typedef enum {
NOTE: the strings that describe the errors in DTMerr
are located in fatal.c. Any changes to this list
must be accompanied by a corresponding change there.
*/
*/
#define DTMERROR -1
#define DTM_OK DTMNOERR
@ -282,21 +282,21 @@ extern int DTMreadDataset DTM_PROTO(( int p, VOIDPTR ds, int size, DTMTYPE type)
extern int DTMwriteDataset DTM_PROTO(( int p, VOIDPTR ds, int size, DTMTYPE type));
extern int DTMendRead DTM_PROTO(( int port ));
extern int DTMendWrite DTM_PROTO(( int port ));
extern int DTMreadMsg DTM_PROTO(( int p, char *hdr, int hdrsize,
extern int DTMreadMsg DTM_PROTO(( int p, char *hdr, int hdrsize,
VOIDPTR data, int datasize, int datatype ));
extern int DTMdestroyPort DTM_PROTO(( int port));
extern char *DTMerrmsg();
extern int DTMgetPortAddr DTM_PROTO(( int port, char * addr, int length ));
extern int DTMgetReturnPortName DTM_PROTO(( int port, char *** addrs,
int * n_addrs));
extern int DTMselectRead DTM_PROTO(( Dtm_set *dtmset, int dtmnum,
extern int DTMselectRead DTM_PROTO(( Dtm_set *dtmset, int dtmnum,
Sock_set *sockset, int socknum, int period ));
extern void DTMsetGroup DTM_PROTO(( char * header, DTMCMD cmd, char * parent,
extern void DTMsetGroup DTM_PROTO(( char * header, DTMCMD cmd, char * parent,
char * self ));
extern int DTMgetGroup DTM_PROTO(( char * header, DTMCMD cmd, char * parent,
extern int DTMgetGroup DTM_PROTO(( char * header, DTMCMD cmd, char * parent,
char * self ));
extern int DTMsendRoute DTM_PROTO(( int fd, char * sendto_addr, int addcount,
char **add_addresses, int delcount,
char **add_addresses, int delcount,
char **del_addresses ));
extern int DTMcheckRoute DTM_PROTO(( int port ));
/* Not implemented Yet */

10
libdtm/dtmf77.c
View File

@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.7 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.6 1992/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:31:46 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
#endif
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ int DTMGPA(p, s, len)
int *p, *len;
_fcd s;
#endif
{
{
char portaddr[128];
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ int DTMGPA(p, s, len)
return DTMERROR;
if (strlen(portaddr) > *len) {
strncpy(_fcdtocp(s), portaddr, *len);
strncpy(_fcdtocp(s), portaddr, *len);
return DTMERROR;
}
@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ int DTMBW(p, header, size)
len = _fcdlen(header);
strncpy(buffer, _fcdtocp(header), len);
buffer[len] = '\0';
return DTMbeginWrite(*p, buffer, len+1);
}

90
libdtm/dtminit.c
View File

@ -59,7 +59,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.33 92/05/05 22:27:50 jplevyak
* Corrected X interface code.
*
*
* Revision 1.32 1992/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.29 92/03/20 21:14:40 jplevyak
* Remove comments about DTMgetPortName
*
*
* Revision 1.28 1992/03/16 20:38:36 creiman
* Added #include "arch.h"
*
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.20 91/11/22 21:31:00 jplevyak
* Added initialization for fDiscard (fGotList and fLastWasSuccessfull...)
*
*
* Revision 1.19 1991/10/29 22:05:53 sreedhar
* <sys/malloc.h> for CONVEX
*
@ -120,17 +120,17 @@
* Major reorganization. Dynamically allocate port table. Encode a
* key in the external ports to detect stale ports. Rename and
* comment functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.13 91/09/18 15:28:11 jplevyak
* Added some external definitions for shared functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.12 91/09/16 11:25:37 jplevyak
* Fix bug, use of uninitialized register variable in function
* DTMdestroyPort
*
*
* Revision 1.11 91/09/13 20:09:31 sreedhar
* supporting :9900, absence of env variable
*
*
* Revision 1.10 1991/09/13 18:57:13 sreedhar
* removed DTMinit() fn., added qservice in some places
*
@ -151,13 +151,13 @@
*
* Revision 1.3 91/01/09 14:10:04 jefft
* Now ignoring SIGPIPE signals.
*
*
* Revision 1.2 90/11/21 10:53:08 jefft
* Modified DTMgetPortAddr to return IP address instead of hostname.
*
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:21:54 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/
#include "arch.h"
@ -185,11 +185,11 @@
/*
CONTENTS
STATIC
STATIC
init_port() - initialize DTM port.
grow_ports() - enlarge the DTM port table
initialize() - initialize DTM library
initialize() - initialize DTM library
get_init_port() - find a new port and initialize it
set_out_port_address() - set a physical out port adress
free_port() - free the internal port structure
@ -205,7 +205,7 @@
DTMmakeInPort() - make a DTM input port
DTMmakeOutPort() - make a DTM output port
DTMdestroyPort() - close and free a DTM port
DTMgetPortAddr() - returns the main port address
DTMgetPortAddr() - returns the main port address
END CONTENTS */
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ static int init_port( port, porttype, qservice )
/* Output port data init */
pp->out = NULL ;
pp->out = NULL ;
pp->fLastWasSuccessfulAvailWrite = FALSE;
pp->fGotList = FALSE;
pp->fDiscard = FALSE;
@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ static int init_port( port, porttype, qservice )
*/
static int grow_ports( VOID )
{
if ( ( DTMpt = (DTMPORT **) realloc( (void *) DTMpt, (DTMptCount +
if ( ( DTMpt = (DTMPORT **) realloc( (void *) DTMpt, (DTMptCount +
DTM_PORTS_GROW) * sizeof(DTMPORT))) == NULL ) {
DTMerrno = DTMMEM;
DTMERR("initialize: insufficient memory for port table.");
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ static int grow_ports( VOID )
Initailized DTM by allocating memory for dtm_discard
and DTMpt ( the port table ).
*/
static int initialize( VOID )
static int initialize( VOID )
{
/* get the debug option flag */
if ( getenv( "DTMDEBUG" ) ) uDTMdbg = -1;
@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ static int get_init_port( portname, porttype, qservice )
/* check for library initialization */
if( !DTM_INITIALIZED ) CHECK_ERR( initialize());
/* find first open DTM port */
while ( tries-- ) {
for (port=0; port < DTMptCount; port+=1) {
@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ static int get_init_port( portname, porttype, qservice )
CHECK_ERR(init_port( port, porttype, qservice ));
strncpy( DTMpt[port]->portname, portname, (PNAMELEN - 1) );
DTMpt[ port ]->portname[ PNAMELEN - 1 ] = '\0' ;
DTMpt[ port ]->key = DTMportSequenceNumber++;
DTMpt[ port ]->key = DTMportSequenceNumber++;
return port;
}
}
@ -394,18 +394,18 @@ static int set_out_port_address( port, addr )
Port aPort ;
Outport *outp ;
DBGINT( "set_out_port_address: Physical TCP portname - %x ",
DBGINT( "set_out_port_address: Physical TCP portname - %x ",
ntohl( addr.sin_addr.s_addr ));
DBGINT( "%d\n", ntohs( addr.sin_port ));
aPort.portid = addr.sin_port ;
aPort.nethostid = addr.sin_addr.s_addr ;
aPort.nethostid = addr.sin_addr.s_addr ;
CHECK_ERR( outp = dtm_new_out_port( &aPort ));
DTMpt[port]->out = outp ;
DTMpt[port]->out = outp ;
return DTM_OK;
}
}
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
static int free_port(int port )
@ -414,15 +414,15 @@ static int free_port( port )
int port;
#endif
{
Outport * outport = DTMpt[ port ]->out;
Outport * outport = DTMpt[ port ]->out;
Outport * tempPort;
int returnValue = DTM_OK;
int returnValue = DTM_OK;
while ( outport != NULL ) {
tempPort = outport->next;
#ifdef FREE_RETURNS_INT
if ( free( outport ) != 0 ) {
DTMerrno = DTMCORPT;
DTMerrno = DTMCORPT;
returnValue = DTMERROR;
break;
}
@ -430,10 +430,10 @@ static int free_port( port )
free( outport );
#endif
outport = tempPort;
}
}
#ifdef FREE_RETURNS_INT
if ( free( DTMpt[ port ] ) != 0 ) {
DTMerrno = DTMCORPT;
DTMerrno = DTMCORPT;
returnValue = DTMERROR;
}
#else
@ -455,14 +455,14 @@ static int register_port(int port )
#else
static int register_port( port )
int port;
#endif
#endif
{
int fd ;
S_ADDR addr ;
char *naddr ;
CHECK_ERR( naddr = dtm_get_naddr( &addr, &fd ));
if(dtm_nsend_sockaddr(fd, naddr, dtm_get_refname(), DTMpt[port]->portname,
if(dtm_nsend_sockaddr(fd, naddr, dtm_get_refname(), DTMpt[port]->portname,
&DTMpt[ port ]->sockaddr ) < 0 ) {
DTMdestroyPort( DTMpt[port]->sockfd ) ;
DTMerrno = DTMTIMEOUT;
@ -495,15 +495,15 @@ int dtm_map_port_internal( port )
if ( ( thePort ) >= DTMptCount ) {
DTMerrno = DTMBADPORT;
return DTMERROR;
return DTMERROR;
}
if ( DTMpt[ thePort ] == NULL ) {
DTMerrno = DTMBADPORT;
return DTMERROR;
return DTMERROR;
}
if ( ( port >> DTM_PORT_KEY_SHIFT ) != DTMpt[ thePort ]->key ) {
DTMerrno = DTMBADPORT;
return DTMERROR;
return DTMERROR;
}
return thePort;
}
@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ void dtm_map_port_external( port )
int32 *port;
#endif
{
*port = *port | (DTMpt[ *port ]->key << DTM_PORT_KEY_SHIFT);
*port = *port | (DTMpt[ *port ]->key << DTM_PORT_KEY_SHIFT);
}
@ -544,11 +544,11 @@ int DTMmakeInPort(portname, qservice )
CHECK_ERR(port = get_init_port(portname, INPORTTYPE, qservice ));
DBGMSG2("DTMmakeInPort port %d addr %X\n", port, DTMpt[port] );
CHECK_ERR(dtm_init_sockaddr( &DTMpt[ port ]->sockaddr,
CHECK_ERR(dtm_init_sockaddr( &DTMpt[ port ]->sockaddr,
DTMpt[ port ]->portname, &fLogicalName ));
DTMpt[port]->fLogical = fLogicalName;
if ((DTMpt[port]->sockfd = dtm_socket_init( &DTMpt[port]->sockaddr,
if ((DTMpt[port]->sockfd = dtm_socket_init( &DTMpt[port]->sockaddr,
INPORTTYPE, fLogicalName )) == DTMERROR ) {
free_port(port);
return DTMERROR ;
@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ int DTMmakeInPort(portname, qservice )
/*
DTMmakeOutPort()
DTMmakeOutPort()
Create and initialze a new port.
portname may be a logical or a physical port.
qservice is reserved for future use.
@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ int DTMmakeOutPort(char *portname,int qservice )
int DTMmakeOutPort(portname, qservice )
char *portname;
int qservice ;
#endif
#endif
{
int port;
int fLogicalName = TRUE;
@ -585,10 +585,10 @@ int DTMmakeOutPort(portname, qservice )
DBGFLOW("DTMmakeOutPort called.\n");
CHECK_ERR( (port = get_init_port( portname, OUTPORTTYPE, qservice)));
CHECK_ERR((dtm_init_sockaddr(&addr, DTMpt[port]->portname,&fLogicalName)));
CHECK_ERR((dtm_init_sockaddr(&addr, DTMpt[port]->portname,&fLogicalName)));
DTMpt[port]->fLogical = fLogicalName;
if( !fLogicalName ) CHECK_ERR( set_out_port_address( port, addr ));
if( !fLogicalName ) CHECK_ERR( set_out_port_address( port, addr ));
if( (DTMpt[port] -> sockfd = dtm_socket_init( &DTMpt[port] -> sockaddr,
OUTPORTTYPE, fLogicalName )) == DTMERROR ) {
@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ int DTMdestroyPort(int port)
#else
int DTMdestroyPort(port)
int port;
#endif
#endif
{
reg DTMPORT *pp ;
@ -634,7 +634,7 @@ int DTMdestroyPort(port)
if( pp -> porttype == INPORTTYPE ) {
register Inport *pcur ;
FOR_EACH_IN_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
FOR_EACH_IN_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
if( pcur->fd != DTM_NO_CONNECTION ) {
if ( pp->Xcallback ) pp->XremoveInput( pcur->XinputId );
close( pcur->fd ) ;
@ -643,11 +643,11 @@ int DTMdestroyPort(port)
} else {
register Outport *pcur ;
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) {
if( pcur->connfd != DTM_NO_CONNECTION ) close( pcur->connfd ) ;
}
}
/* free space allocated for port */
free_port( port );
@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ int DTMgetPortAddr(port, addr, length)
sprintf(pnum, ":%d", ntohs( DTMpt[port]->sockaddr.sin_port ) );
if ( strlen( pnum ) + strlen( addr ) + 1 > length ) {
DTMerrno = DTMBUFOVR;
return DTMERROR;
return DTMERROR;
}
strcat(addr, pnum);
@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ static char * dtm_addr_to_a( addr )
uint32 hnum = addr.sin_addr.s_addr;
unsigned char * p_hnum = (unsigned char *) &hnum;
sprintf(addr_buf, "%d.%d.%d.%d:%d",
sprintf(addr_buf, "%d.%d.%d.%d:%d",
p_hnum[0], p_hnum[1], p_hnum[2], p_hnum[3], ntohs( addr.sin_port ));
return addr_buf;
}

82
libdtm/dtmint.h
View File

@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.28 92/05/05 22:27:50 jplevyak
* Corrected X interface code.
*
*
* Revision 1.27 1992/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
@ -62,13 +62,13 @@
*
* Revision 1.20 92/02/27 23:59:56 jplevyak
* Fixup prototype problems.
*
*
* Revision 1.19 1992/01/30 19:28:50 jplevyak
* Add support for c++ type external definitions.
*
* Revision 1.18 92/01/24 18:45:50 jefft
* Removed prototypes for dtm_set_<type> and dtm_get_<type>, added them to dtm.h
*
*
* Revision 1.17 1991/12/16 19:44:04 jefft
* Fixed bug with defining of NULL macro
*
@ -97,13 +97,13 @@
* Major reorganization. Made this file compatible with dtm.h. Moved
* redundant out. Added several configuration parameters, added
* prototypes for internally global functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.9 91/09/18 15:28:50 jplevyak
* Added some external definitions for shared functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.8 91/09/13 17:37:37 sreedhar
* MAX132 instead of MAXBUFSIZE
*
*
* Revision 1.7 1991/08/15 19:10:53 sreedhar
* Changes for logical portname version
*
@ -121,10 +121,10 @@
*
* Revision 1.2 90/11/21 12:35:44 jefft
* Removed trailing comma from DTM error enum type.
*
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:32:03 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@
#endif
/* Added to shut up the SGI compiler which quotes ANSI regulations at
you.
you.
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
struct sockaddr;
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ struct iovec;
#define INIT(x)
#endif
#define reg register
#define reg register
/*
@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ struct iovec;
*/
#define MAX132 132 /* max space of 132 */
#define SEP " " /* blank as separator */
#define COLON ":" /* colon as separator */
#define COLON ":" /* colon as separator */
#ifndef NULL
# if defined( _STDC_ ) || defined( __STDC__ )
@ -272,33 +272,33 @@ struct iovec;
#endif
#define FOR_EACH_OUT_PORT( pcur, pp ) \
for ( pcur = pp->out; pcur != NULL ; pcur = pcur->next )
for ( pcur = pp->out; pcur != NULL ; pcur = pcur->next )
#define FOR_EACH_IN_PORT( inp, pp ) \
for ( inp = pp->in; inp != NULL ; inp = inp->next )
/*
PORT STRUCTURES
/*
PORT STRUCTURES
*/
typedef struct sockaddr_in S_ADDR;
typedef struct Port
typedef struct Port
{
uint32 nethostid ;
uint16 portid ;
} Port ;
typedef struct Outport
typedef struct Outport
{
S_ADDR sockaddr ; /* Socket family, netid/hostid, portid */
int32 connfd ; /* connection fd */
int availwrite ; /* port availability for write */
int seqstart ; /* "Sequence start" message sent or not */
struct Outport * next; /* link to next outport */
int32 connfd ; /* connection fd */
int availwrite ; /* port availability for write */
int seqstart ; /* "Sequence start" message sent or not */
struct Outport * next; /* link to next outport */
} Outport ;
#define DTM_NEW_DATASET -1
#define DTM_NEW_DATASET -1
typedef struct Inport {
int32 fd; /* connection fds */
int32 blocklen; /* records no. of bytes read */
@ -315,27 +315,27 @@ typedef struct Inport {
to restore the assertion
#endif
#endif
XtInputId XinputId;
XtInputId XinputId;
#else
int XinputId;
#endif
struct Inport * next;
} Inport;
typedef struct
typedef struct
{
S_ADDR sockaddr ;
S_ADDR sockaddr ;
/* Socket family, netid/hostid, portid */
int32 sockfd ; /* Main socket of port
int32 sockfd ; /* Main socket of port
Outport - UDP socket
Inport - TCP socket
*/
#ifdef _XtIntrinsic_h
XtInputId XinputId;
XtInputId XinputId;
#else
int XinputId;
#endif
int fLogical;
char portname[ PNAMELEN ] ; /* Logical portname */
@ -375,11 +375,11 @@ typedef struct
GLOBAL VARIABLES
*/
#define DTM_INITIALIZED (DTMpt != NULL)
#define DTM_INITIALIZED (DTMpt != NULL)
#define DTM_PORTS_INITIAL 20
#define DTM_PORTS_GROW 20
global DTMPORT **DTMpt INIT( NULL );
global int32 DTMptCount INIT( 0 );
global int32 DTMptCount INIT( 0 );
global int32 DTMportSequenceNumber INIT( 1 );
#ifdef _ARCH_MSDOS
@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ extern int dtm_nsend_sockaddr DTM_PROTO(( int fd, char * sendto_addr,
char * refname, char * portname, S_ADDR * sockaddr ));
extern Outport * dtm_new_out_port DTM_PROTO(( Port * port ));
#define DTM_PORT_MASK 0xFFFF
#define DTM_PORT_KEY_SHIFT 16
#define DTM_PORT_KEY_SHIFT 16
extern int dtm_map_port_internal DTM_PROTO(( int32 port ));
extern void dtm_map_port_external DTM_PROTO(( int32 * port ));
#define DTM_WAIT TRUE
@ -433,26 +433,26 @@ extern int dtm_destroy_in_port DTM_PROTO(( Inport * inp, DTMPORT * pp ));
extern int dtm_writev_buffer DTM_PROTO(( int fd, struct iovec *iov,
int32 iovlen, int32 iovsize,
struct sockaddr * addr, int addrlen ));
extern int dtm_read_buffer DTM_PROTO(( int d, int32 * blocklen,
extern int dtm_read_buffer DTM_PROTO(( int d, int32 * blocklen,
void * buffer, int length ));
extern int dtm_recv_header DTM_PROTO((int fd , void * header,
extern int dtm_recv_header DTM_PROTO((int fd , void * header,
int length));
extern int dtm_read_header DTM_PROTO((int fd , void * header,
int length));
extern int dtm_parse_ipaddr DTM_PROTO(( char * source,
extern int dtm_parse_ipaddr DTM_PROTO(( char * source,
unsigned long * dest ));
extern int dtm_quick_select DTM_PROTO(( int socket, int32 * count ));
extern int dtm_select DTM_PROTO(( int fd, int32 * count,
extern int dtm_select DTM_PROTO(( int fd, int32 * count,
int32 time ));
extern int dtm_accept DTM_PROTO(( int fd, S_ADDR * sn,
extern int dtm_accept DTM_PROTO(( int fd, S_ADDR * sn,
struct timeval * timeout ));
extern int dtm_connect DTM_PROTO(( S_ADDR * sn, int * sockret ));
extern int dtm_quick_connect DTM_PROTO(( S_ADDR * sn, int * sockret ));
extern int dmt_end_connect DTM_PROTO(( int32 socket ));
extern int dmt_end_connect DTM_PROTO(( int32 socket ));
extern unsigned long dtm_get_ipaddr DTM_PROTO(( char * ipaddrstr ));
extern int dtm_socket_init DTM_PROTO(( S_ADDR * sockaddr, int porttype,
extern int dtm_socket_init DTM_PROTO(( S_ADDR * sockaddr, int porttype,
int fLogicalName ));
extern int dtm_init_sockaddr DTM_PROTO(( S_ADDR * sockaddr,
extern int dtm_init_sockaddr DTM_PROTO(( S_ADDR * sockaddr,
char * portname,
int * pfLogicalName ));
extern int dtm_ninit DTM_PROTO(( void ));
@ -463,13 +463,13 @@ extern char * dtm_find_tag DTM_PROTO(( char *, char *));
extern int dtm_accept_read_connections DTM_PROTO(( DTMPORT *pp,int fWait ));
extern void dtm_set_Xcallback DTM_PROTO(( DTMPORT *pp, Inport * inp ));
#ifdef _XtIntrinsic_h
extern void dtm_handle_in DTM_PROTO(( caddr_t client_data,
extern void dtm_handle_in DTM_PROTO(( caddr_t client_data,
int * fd, XtInputId * in ));
#else
extern void dtm_handle_in DTM_PROTO(( caddr_t client_data,
extern void dtm_handle_in DTM_PROTO(( caddr_t client_data,
int * fd, void * in ));
#endif
#ifdef __cplusplus
};
#endif

8
libdtm/dtmmisc.c
View File

@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.8 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.7 1992/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.5 91/09/26 20:24:21 jplevyak
* Added debug.h as include file.
*
*
* Revision 1.4 1991/06/11 15:19:36 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:32:18 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
#endif
*/
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ int DTMgetGroup(h, cmd, parent, self)
}
else
*parent = '\0';
h = strchr(h, ' ')+1;
/* get self name */

30
libdtm/dtmnserv.c
View File

@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.19 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
#endif
*/
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
#endif
#if !defined _ARCH_MACOS & !defined NEXT
# ifdef CONVEX
# ifdef CONVEX
# include <sys/malloc.h>
# else
# include <malloc.h>
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ static void del_nlist DTM_PROTO(( DTMPORT *pp, int count ));
static void add_nlist DTM_PROTO(( DTMPORT *pp, int count ));
/*
/*
Function to initialise self's reference name from environment
variable passed by nameserver.
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ static void add_nlist DTM_PROTO(( DTMPORT *pp, int count ));
Notes : Environment variable - DTM_REFNAME
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
static int init_refname(char *refname,int len )
#else
@ -163,11 +163,11 @@ void dtm_display_buf( outp, portname )
DBGINT( "dtm_display_buf: Logical port %s\n", portname );
while ( outp != NULL );
{
DBGINT( "dtm_display_buf: Nethostid = %x\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_display_buf: Nethostid = %x\n",
ntohl( outp -> sockaddr.sin_addr.s_addr) );
DBGINT( "dtm_display_buf: Portid = %d\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_display_buf: Portid = %d\n",
ntohs( outp -> sockaddr.sin_port) );
outp = outp->next;
outp = outp->next;
}
}
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Outport * dtm_new_out_port(Port *port )
Outport * dtm_new_out_port( port )
Port * port;
#endif
{
{
Outport * p;
if ( (p = (Outport *) malloc( sizeof( Outport ))) == NULL ) {
@ -226,8 +226,8 @@ static void del_nlist( pp, count )
outpLast = NULL;
for ( outp = pp->out ; outp != NULL ; outp = outpNext ) {
outpNext = outp->next;
if ((outp->sockaddr.sin_port == port.portid ) &&
(outp-> sockaddr.sin_addr.s_addr == port.nethostid)) {
if ((outp->sockaddr.sin_port == port.portid ) &&
(outp-> sockaddr.sin_addr.s_addr == port.nethostid)) {
if ( outpLast==NULL ) pp->out = outp->next;
else outpLast->next = outp->next;
free( outp );
@ -276,9 +276,9 @@ int dtm_check_server( pp, fWait )
int addcount;
/* If it is not a logical port is is not listed with the server */
if ( !pp->fLogical ) return DTM_OK;
/* Check for new or first routing list */
fWait = fWait && (pp->out == NULL);
@ -301,11 +301,11 @@ int dtm_check_server( pp, fWait )
/* Ack the route message */
#if 0
CHECK_ERR( dtm_nsend_ackroute( portname ));
CHECK_ERR( dtm_nsend_ackroute( portname ));
#endif
/* Process the routing message */
{
char * msg_type = strtok( mbuf, SEP );
if (!strcmp( msg_type, MROUTEID)) {
@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ int dtm_check_server( pp, fWait )
return addcount;
} else if ( !strcmp( msg_type, MDISCARD ) ) {
pp->fDiscard = atoi( strtok( NULL, SEP));
}
}
}
}
return 0;

18
libdtm/dtmnserv.h
View File

@ -34,17 +34,17 @@
*
* Revision 1.5 92/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
*/
/*
Purpose : Header file for name server interaction
Purpose : Header file for name server interaction
Notes :
Message format:
Message format:
Portid - nethostid:portid
Portid - nethostid:portid
Header - opcode
DTM to nameserver
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
Send message length.
Mreg - Header refname portname Portid
Mackroute - Header refname portname
Mackroute - Header refname portname
Nameserver to DTM
@ -65,11 +65,11 @@
Nethostid is in dotted decimal notation of internet.
*/
#define MREGID "REGISTER"
#define MREGID "REGISTER"
#define MREG "%s %s %s %s:%d"
#define MROUTEID "ROUTE"
#define MROUTEID "ROUTE"
#define MROUTE "%s %d %d" /* %s:%d %s:%d .... */
#define MACKROUTEID "ROUTE_ACK"
#define MACKROUTE "%s %s %s"
#define MACKROUTEID "ROUTE_ACK"
#define MACKROUTE "%s %s %s"
#define MDISCARDID "DISCARD"
#define MDISCARD "%s %d"

12
libdtm/fatal.c
View File

@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.8 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.7 1992/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
@ -64,10 +64,10 @@
* Added several new errors, changed the DTMerrmsg function to detect
* and return 'unknown error:' errors. Generally encorporated the
* good features of sherr (from the libtest directory).
*
*
* Revision 1.3 91/06/25 20:13:28 creiman
* Removed varargs and dtm_fatal.
*
*
* Revision 1.2 1991/06/11 15:19:57 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ char *DTMerrmsg(quiet)
int quiet;
#endif
{
char * strUnknown = "unknown error: %d";
char * strUnknown = "unknown error: %d";
char strOut[60];
char * strErr;
if ( DTMerrno < (sizeof(err_msg)/sizeof(char *)))
if ( DTMerrno < (sizeof(err_msg)/sizeof(char *)))
strErr = err_msg[(int)DTMerrno];
else {
sprintf( strOut, strUnknown, DTMerrno);
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ char *DTMerrmsg(quiet)
}
if (!quiet)
fprintf(stderr, "\nDTMerrno = %d: %s\n", DTMerrno,
fprintf(stderr, "\nDTMerrno = %d: %s\n", DTMerrno,
strErr);
return strErr;
}

6
libdtm/mdd.c
View File

@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
/************************************************************************
**
** mdd.c - Multi-Dimensional Data set routines
**
**
*************************************************************************/
/*********************************************************************
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.5 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.4 1992/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ int MDDgetMinMax(h, min, max)
h = strchr(h, ' ') + 1;
*max = (float)atof(h);
return 0;
}

2
libdtm/mdd.h
View File

@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.4 92/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1992/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.

24
libdtm/ninit.c
View File

@ -47,14 +47,14 @@
*
* Revision 1.7 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
#endif
*/
/*
Purpose : Functions to initialise name server address, fd and to
to return it.
to return it.
*/
#include <stdlib.h>
@ -74,10 +74,10 @@
static struct sockaddr_in nsaddr ; /* name server's address */
static int nssockfd = -1 ; /* name server's socket */
static char nameserver[ MAX132 ] ;
/*
static char nameserver[ MAX132 ] ;
/*
name server address -
dotted decimal: port number
dotted decimal: port number
*/
/*
@ -87,10 +87,10 @@ static char nameserver[ MAX132 ] ;
Return values : DTMERROR on error.
DTM_OK on success.
Notes :
Environment variable format :
Environment variable format :
DTM_NAMESERVER=nethostid:portid
e.g. DTM_NAMESERVER=141.142.221.66:9900
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ int dtm_ninit()
DTMERR( "dtm_ninit: Env not setup" );
return DTMERROR ;
}
/* Initialise name server's address, used in send() */
strncpy( nameserver, p, MAX132 );
strncpy( nameserver, p, MAX132 );
DBGINT( "dtm_ninit: Nameserver is %s\n", nameserver );
@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ int dtm_ninit()
*portstr++ = '\0';
nsaddr.sin_addr.s_addr = inet_addr( p ) ;
nsaddr.sin_addr.s_addr = inet_addr( p ) ;
nsaddr.sin_port = (unsigned short)atol( portstr ) ;
DBGMSG1("dtm_ninit: Nethostid = %x\n", ntohl( nsaddr.sin_addr.s_addr) );
DBGMSG1("dtm_ninit: Portid = %d\n", ntohs( nsaddr.sin_port) );
DBGMSG1("dtm_ninit: Portid = %d\n", ntohs( nsaddr.sin_port) );
}
/* Acquire socket to be used for sending to name server */

34
libdtm/nmsg.c
View File

@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.15 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
#endif
*/
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ static int dtm_send_control( fd, msg, msize, sendto_addr )
sendaddr[ MAX132 - 1 ] = '\0' ;
sockaddr.sin_family = AF_INET ;
CHECK_ERR( dtm_init_sockaddr( &sockaddr, sendaddr, &fLogical));
CHECK_ERR( dtm_init_sockaddr( &sockaddr, sendaddr, &fLogical));
/* Prepare iovec and send message length */
@ -138,10 +138,10 @@ static int dtm_send_control( fd, msg, msize, sendto_addr )
{
DBGFLOW( "dtm_send_control: message length send error\n" );
return status ;
}
}
/* Prepare iovec and send message */
iov[ 0 ].iov_base = msg ;
iov[ 0 ].iov_len = msize ;
@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ int DTMsendDiscard( fd, sendto_addr, set_or_clear )
sprintf( mbuf, MDISCARD, MROUTEID, set_or_clear );
DBGFLOW( "DTMsendDiscard: Message:- " );
DBGFLOW( "DTMsendDiscard: Message:- " );
DBGFLOW( mbuf ); DBGFLOW( "\n" );
return dtm_send_control( fd, mbuf, (strlen( mbuf ) + 1), sendto_addr );
return dtm_send_control( fd, mbuf, (strlen( mbuf ) + 1), sendto_addr );
}
/*
@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ int DTMsendDiscard( fd, sendto_addr, set_or_clear )
int DTMsendRoute(int fd,char *sendto_addr,int addcount,char **add_addresses,
int delcount, char **del_addresses )
#else
int DTMsendRoute( fd, sendto_addr, addcount, add_addresses,
delcount, del_addresses )
int DTMsendRoute( fd, sendto_addr, addcount, add_addresses,
delcount, del_addresses )
int fd; /* output socket */
char *sendto_addr; /* destination address addr:port number */
int addcount; /* number of addresses to connect to */
@ -212,18 +212,18 @@ int DTMsendRoute( fd, sendto_addr, addcount, add_addresses,
sprintf( mbuf, MROUTE, MROUTEID, delcount, addcount ) ;
while( delcount-- ) {
strncat( mbuf, " ", (MAX132-1));
strncat( mbuf, del_addresses[ delcount ], (MAX132 - 1));
strncat( mbuf, del_addresses[ delcount ], (MAX132 - 1));
}
while( addcount-- ) {
strncat( mbuf, " ", (MAX132-1));
strncat( mbuf, add_addresses[ addcount ], (MAX132 - 1));
strncat( mbuf, add_addresses[ addcount ], (MAX132 - 1));
}
mbuf[ MAX132 - 1 ] = '\0' ;
mbuf[ MAX132 - 1 ] = '\0' ;
DBGFLOW( "DTMsendRoute: Message:- " );
DBGFLOW( "DTMsendRoute: Message:- " );
DBGFLOW( mbuf ); DBGFLOW( "\n" );
return dtm_send_control( fd, mbuf, (strlen( mbuf ) + 1), sendto_addr );
return dtm_send_control( fd, mbuf, (strlen( mbuf ) + 1), sendto_addr );
}
/*
@ -254,10 +254,10 @@ int dtm_nsend_ackroute( portname )
sprintf( mbuf, MACKROUTE, MACKROUTEID, refname, portname );
mbuf[ MAX132 - 1 ] = '\0' ;
DBGFLOW( "dtm_nsend_ackroute: Message:- " );
DBGFLOW( "dtm_nsend_ackroute: Message:- " );
DBGFLOW( mbuf ); DBGFLOW( "\n" );
return dtm_send_control( fd, mbuf, (strlen( mbuf ) + 1), sendto_addr );
return dtm_send_control( fd, mbuf, (strlen( mbuf ) + 1), sendto_addr );
}
/*
@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ int DTMrecvRegistration(fd, buffer, len)
messages and sending routing messages.
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
int DTMmakeNameServerPort(char *portid)
#else
@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ int DTMmakeNameServerPort(portid)
#endif
{
struct sockaddr_in saddr;
saddr.sin_family = AF_INET;
saddr.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0);

8
libdtm/ris.c
View File

@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.9 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.8 1992/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
@ -57,13 +57,13 @@
*
* Revision 1.6 92/01/24 19:12:55 dweber
* *** empty log message ***
*
*
* Revision 1.5 91/11/04 12:57:55 dweber
* Deleted (via comments) superfluous functions. Later to be removed.
*
*
* Revision 1.4 91/09/26 20:26:11 jplevyak
* Use dtminit.h for access to internally global functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1991/06/11 15:21:05 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*

16
libdtm/ris.h
View File

@ -34,29 +34,29 @@
*
* Revision 1.11 92/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.10 1992/02/21 13:48:04 dweber
* Fixed prototyping problem in RISgetType.
*
* Revision 1.9 92/02/18 16:22:04 dweber
* Added functions for setting/getting associated palette names.
* (RISsetPaletteName and RISgetPaletteName)
*
*
* Revision 1.8 92/01/24 19:12:55 dweber
* *** empty log message ***
*
*
* Revision 1.7 91/11/18 11:48:57 dweber
* Returned the RISsize definition and changed PALsize to PALelements for same reason
*
*
* Revision 1.6 91/11/04 15:06:08 dweber
* Added PAL size commands
*
*
* Revision 1.5 91/11/04 12:58:36 dweber
* Added RIS types and removed 8/24 bit distinction from class level.
*
*
* Revision 1.4 91/09/10 15:07:32 jefft
* cleaned-up message class macros.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1991/06/11 15:23:04 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:38:04 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/

70
libdtm/rwrtns.c
View File

@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.19 92/05/14 19:27:48 jefft
* modified dtm_recv_reliable
*
*
* Revision 1.18 1992/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
* Revision 1.15 92/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
*
*
* Revision 1.14 1992/03/02 18:29:41 jplevyak
* Fixed bug in EAGAIN handling.
*
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.7 91/08/20 15:56:06 sreedhar
* Removed unused functions - dtm_write_buffer, dtm_send, dtm_recv
*
*
* Revision 1.6 1991/08/15 18:56:52 sreedhar
* Changes for logical portname version
*
@ -159,8 +159,8 @@
CONTENTS
dtm_read_buffer() - attempts to fill the next dtm buffer.
dtm_recv_header() - Function to read header and return size.
dtm_read_buffer() - attempts to fill the next dtm buffer.
dtm_recv_header() - Function to read header and return size.
dtm_recv_ack() - receive message ackowledgement
tm_send_ack() - send message acknowledgement
dtm_writev_buffer() - sends the buffers to receiving process.
@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ static int ready_bytes( d, length )
fd_set mask;
struct timeval timeout ;
/* set the select timeout value */
timeout.tv_sec = 2;
timeout.tv_usec = 0;
@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ static int ready_bytes( d, length )
}
}
/*
Reliably read from a port in the face of signals and other
@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ int dtm_recv_reliable( d, buffer, length )
}
/*
* dtm_read_buffer() - attempts to fill the next dtm buffer. The
* dtm_read_buffer() - attempts to fill the next dtm buffer. The
* blocklen variable must be set to DTM_NEW_DATASET after each dataset
* to force recv_buffer to move the next dataset.
*/
@ -307,8 +307,8 @@ int dtm_read_buffer(d, blocklen, buffer, length)
DBGMSG1("dtm_recv_buffer: attempting to read %d bytes.\n", length);
DBGMSG1("dtm_recv_buffer: initial blocklen = %d\n", *blocklen);
/* if block length is DTM_NEW_DATASET this is a new dataset
* get initial block count
/* if block length is DTM_NEW_DATASET this is a new dataset
* get initial block count
*/
if (*blocklen == DTM_NEW_DATASET) {
CHECK_ERR(dtm_recv_reliable(d, (char *)blocklen, 4));
@ -320,8 +320,8 @@ int dtm_read_buffer(d, blocklen, buffer, length)
while (TRUE) {
/* if block length is 0, because last call to fill_buffer hit
* the EOS or because this dataset is zero length, return 0
* to indicate the end of dataset.
* the EOS or because this dataset is zero length, return 0
* to indicate the end of dataset.
*/
if (*blocklen == 0)
return 0;
@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ int dtm_read_buffer(d, blocklen, buffer, length)
/* decrement block length, if 0 get next block length */
*blocklen -= (length - count);
if (*blocklen == 0)
if (*blocklen == 0)
*blocklen = DTM_NEW_DATASET;
/* if block length is 0 now, the EOS will be returned on */
@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ int dtm_read_buffer(d, blocklen, buffer, length)
DBGINT("blocklen = %d\n", *blocklen);
/* if block length is 0 now, the correct count will be */
/* returned now, and EOS on the next call to fill_buffer */
/* returned now, and EOS on the next call to fill_buffer */
if (*blocklen == 0)
return count;
@ -411,9 +411,9 @@ int dtm_read_header( fd, buf, buflen )
/*
dtm_recv_header()
Function to read header and return size.
Function to read header and return size.
Notes : If buffer is too small, dump remainder of header
Notes : If buffer is too small, dump remainder of header
and return error.
Actually, this is function to read length of data and
then to receive that much data - the data is called header
@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ int dtm_recv_header( d, header, length )
DBGMSG1("dtm_recv_header: buf length = %d.\n", length);
/* get header length */
if( (readcnt = recvfrom(d, (char *)&headerlen, 4, 0, ( struct sockaddr *)&from,
( int *)&fromlen)) != 4) {
/* somehow hit EOF, return DTMEOF instead */
@ -460,19 +460,19 @@ int dtm_recv_header( d, header, length )
return DTMERROR;
}
}
}
}
LOCALINT(headerlen);
DBGMSG("dtm_recv_header: got length.\n");
/* read the header */
/* read the header */
readcnt = (length > headerlen) ? headerlen : length ;
header = (void *) (((char *) header) + readcnt);
while(readcnt) {
if( (tmp = recvfrom(d, ((char *)header) - readcnt, readcnt, 0,
( struct sockaddr *)&from, ( int *)&fromlen)) > 0)
if( (tmp = recvfrom(d, ((char *)header) - readcnt, readcnt, 0,
( struct sockaddr *)&from, ( int *)&fromlen)) > 0)
readcnt -= tmp;
else {
DTMerrno = DTMREAD;
@ -480,24 +480,24 @@ int dtm_recv_header( d, header, length )
}
}
/* check for header greater than buffer size provided */
/* check for header greater than buffer size provided */
if( length >= headerlen )
if( length >= headerlen )
return headerlen;
else {
/* discard remaining header */
readcnt = headerlen - length;
while (readcnt) {
if ((tmp = recvfrom(d, dtm_discard, readcnt, 0,
(struct sockaddr *)&from, (int *)&fromlen)) > 0)
if ((tmp = recvfrom(d, dtm_discard, readcnt, 0,
(struct sockaddr *)&from, (int *)&fromlen)) > 0)
readcnt -= tmp;
else {
DTMerrno = DTMREAD;
return DTMERROR;
}
}
DTMerrno = DTMHEADER;
return DTMERROR;
}
@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ int dtm_recv_header( d, header, length )
Notes : Berkeley implementation returns 0 from recv
if socket connection breaks while waiting in
recv system call. System V returns -1 and
recv system call. System V returns -1 and
ECONNRESET in errno for same error.
For historical reasons, DTMEOF is returned when
@ -532,16 +532,16 @@ int dtm_recv_ack( d, ack )
if( (tmp = recv( d, (char *)ack, 4, 0 )) != 4 ) {
DBGINT( "Recv_ack errno = %d\n", errno ) ;
if( tmp == 0 )
if( tmp == 0 )
/* Courtesy Berkeley */
DTMerrno = DTMEOF ;
else {
if( errno == ECONNRESET )
if( errno == ECONNRESET )
/* Courtesy system V */
DTMerrno = DTMEOF;
else
else
DTMerrno = DTMREAD;
}
return DTMERROR;
@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ int dtm_writev_failed( fd, msgbuf, tmp )
for ( i = 0; i < msgbuf->msg_iovlen; i++ ) {
done -= iov[i].iov_len;
if ( done > 0 ) continue;
if ( dtm_send_some( fd, iov[i].iov_base + done + iov[i].iov_len,
if ( dtm_send_some( fd, iov[i].iov_base + done + iov[i].iov_len,
(- done )) == DTMERROR )
return DTMERROR;
done = 0;
@ -664,17 +664,17 @@ int dtm_writev_buffer( fd, iov, iovlen, iovsize, addr, addrlen )
int todo;
DBGINT("# dtm_writev_buffer called, fd %d.\n", fd );
msgbuf.msg_name = (caddr_t)addr ;
msgbuf.msg_name = (caddr_t)addr ;
msgbuf.msg_namelen = addrlen ;
msgbuf.msg_iov = iov ;
msgbuf.msg_iovlen = iovlen ;
msgbuf.msg_accrights = 0 ;
if( (tmp = sendmsg( fd, &msgbuf, 0 )) != iovsize )
if( (tmp = sendmsg( fd, &msgbuf, 0 )) != iovsize )
return dtm_writev_failed( fd, &msgbuf, tmp );
DBGINT( "dtm_writev_buffer tmp = %d\n", tmp );
return DTM_OK ;
}

12
libdtm/sdl.c
View File

@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
/************************************************************************
**
** sdl.c - Surface Description Language
**
**
*************************************************************************/
/*
@ -43,20 +43,20 @@
*
* Revision 1.9 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.8 1992/04/06 15:58:56 jplevyak
* Fixed levels of indirection on some arguments for non-prototype
* machines.
*
* Revision 1.7 92/04/03 12:39:33 dweber
* Fixed SDLbounds bug.
*
*
* Revision 1.6 92/04/03 12:33:10 dweber
* Added bounding box functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.5 91/09/10 15:09:00 jefft
* I removed all functionality from this file, HA!
*
*
* Revision 1.4 1991/07/18 16:29:15 jefft
* corrected the spelling of "primitive"
*
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:38:33 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/

12
libdtm/sdl.h
View File

@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
/**************************************************************************
**
** Surface Description Language include file - contains constants used
** with the SDL header type.
** with the SDL header type.
**
**
**
@ -46,13 +46,13 @@
*
* Revision 1.13 92/04/30 20:27:05 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.12 1992/04/03 12:39:42 dweber
* Fixed SDLbounds bug.
*
* Revision 1.11 92/04/03 12:33:23 dweber
* Added bounding box functions.
*
*
* Revision 1.10 1992/02/25 20:36:35 dweber
* Fixed another prototyping clash, SDLgetPrimitive.
*
@ -64,10 +64,10 @@
*
* Revision 1.7 91/11/01 10:10:28 dweber
* Added SDLtristrip
*
*
* Revision 1.6 91/09/10 15:07:55 jefft
* cleaned-up message class macros.
*
*
* Revision 1.5 1991/07/25 22:22:27 jefft
* Added transformation triplet enum types
*
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:38:51 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/
#ifndef SDL_INC

16
libdtm/sds.c
View File

@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
/************************************************************************
**
** sds.c - Scientific Data Set utility routines.
**
**
*************************************************************************/
/*
#ifdef RCSLOG
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.12 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.11 1992/03/16 20:39:10 creiman
* Changed declaration of SDSgetMinMax to match prototype. (Changed doubles
* to floats)
@ -67,22 +67,22 @@
*
* Revision 1.7 91/12/18 02:42:41 dweber
* Oops. Guess I forgot to change getRanks name.
*
*
* Revision 1.6 1991/12/18 02:41:53 dweber
* Added SDSgetRank
*
* Revision 1.5 91/12/09 12:12:27 dweber
* Deleted the function SDSconvert
*
*
* Revision 1.4 91/09/26 20:20:52 jplevyak
* Minor header file reorganization.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 91/09/13 18:01:21 jplevyak
* Fixed minor bug w/extra argument in call.
*
*
* Revision 1.2 91/06/11 15:20:50 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
*
* Revision 1.1 1990/11/08 16:39:09 jefft
* Initial revision
*
@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ int SDSgetMinMax(h, min, max)
h = strchr(h, ' ') + 1;
*max = (float)atof(h);
return 0;
}

8
libdtm/sds.h
View File

@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.8 92/04/30 20:27:37 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.7 1992/03/16 21:03:18 creiman
* Changed SDSsetMinMax prototype to use floats. NOT related to the change in
* sds.c for SDSgetMinMax. This is getting confusing...
@ -55,10 +55,10 @@
*
* Revision 1.4 92/01/24 19:13:51 dweber
* Added header lenght macros
*
*
* Revision 1.3 91/09/10 15:07:10 jefft
* cleaned-up message class macros.
*
*
* Revision 1.2 1991/06/11 15:22:52 sreedhar
* disclaimer added
*
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ extern "C" {
#endif
extern void SDSsetDimensions DTM_PROTO(( char* h, int rank, int *dims ));
extern int SDSgetDimensions DTM_PROTO(( char* h, int * rank, int* dims,
extern int SDSgetDimensions DTM_PROTO(( char* h, int * rank, int* dims,
int len ));
extern int SDSgetRank DTM_PROTO(( char* h, int * rank ));
extern int SDSnumElements DTM_PROTO(( int rank, int *dims ));

2
libdtm/sdsF.c
View File

@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.5 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
#endif

92
libdtm/socket.c
View File

@ -52,14 +52,14 @@
*
* Revision 1.28 92/04/30 20:25:27 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3.
*
*
* Revision 1.27 1992/04/06 15:58:49 jplevyak
* Fixed minor problems for machines little Endian machines.
*
* Revision 1.26 92/03/10 22:07:10 jplevyak
* Added changed for PC/MAC from Quincey Koziol (koziol@ncsa.uiuc.edu)
* with modification.
*
*
* Revision 1.25 1992/02/28 03:40:24 jplevyak
* int/long confict fix (no diff on workstations)
* ,
@ -100,13 +100,13 @@
*
* Revision 1.14 91/09/26 20:21:55 jplevyak
* Cosmetics
*
*
* Revision 1.13 91/09/18 15:33:08 jplevyak
* Added additional parameter to dtm_socket_init
*
*
* Revision 1.12 91/09/13 20:28:52 sreedhar
* accept :9900 change
*
*
* Revision 1.11 1991/09/13 20:13:35 sreedhar
* take current host as default
*
@ -131,14 +131,14 @@
*
* Revision 1.3 90/11/21 12:43:15 jefft
* Fixed portibility problem with dtm_get_ipaddr.
*
*
* Revision 1.2 90/11/21 10:54:18 jefft
* Added new routine, dtm_get_ipaddr. It returns an ascii string of the
* current hosts IP address.
*
*
* Revision 1.1 90/11/08 16:39:40 jefft
* Initial revision
*
*
*/
/*
@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ static int buf_size = DTM_BUFF_SIZE;
/*
dtm_parse_ipaddr()
Check whetherer given address string is in dotted
decimal notation and if so, to return the address in network byte
decimal notation and if so, to return the address in network byte
order.
Return values : TRUE, if in dotted decimal notation.
@ -282,9 +282,9 @@ int dtm_select( s, count, time )
FD_SET( s, &filedes );
#ifdef __hpux
if( (*count = select( 32, (int *)&filedes, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL,
if( (*count = select( 32, (int *)&filedes, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL,
#else
if( (*count = select( 32, &filedes, (fd_set *)NULL, (fd_set *)NULL,
if( (*count = select( 32, &filedes, (fd_set *)NULL, (fd_set *)NULL,
#endif
&timeout ) )) {
ioctl( s, FIONREAD, count );
@ -312,8 +312,8 @@ int dtm_accept( s, sn, timeout )
DBGFLOW( "dtm_accept called.\n");
DBGMSG1( "dtm_accept: sockfd = %d\n", s );
/*
Await connect for specified time period only.
/*
Await connect for specified time period only.
if timeout == NULL, it means just goahead and accept,
else wait for specified period and accept only if
@ -321,12 +321,12 @@ int dtm_accept( s, sn, timeout )
*/
if ( timeout ) {
fd_set readmask ;
fd_set readmask ;
fd_set *fchk = &readmask ;
int nf ;
FD_ZERO( fchk );
FD_SET( s, fchk );
FD_SET( s, fchk );
#ifdef __hpux
nf = select( FD_SETSIZE, (int *)fchk, (int *)0, (int *)0, timeout );
@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ int dtm_accept( s, sn, timeout )
DBGINT( "dtm_accept: select errno %d\n", errno );
DTMerrno = DTMSELECT ;
return DTMERROR ;
}
}
if ( nf == 0 ) {
/* No connect request in specified time */
@ -376,9 +376,9 @@ int dtm_connect(sn, s)
int refusedcount = 0;
DBGFLOW("dtm_connect called.\n");
DBGINT( "dtm_connect: s_addr = %x\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_connect: s_addr = %x\n",
ntohl( sn -> sin_addr.s_addr ) );
DBGINT( "dtm_connect: sin_port = %d\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_connect: sin_port = %d\n",
ntohs( sn -> sin_port ));
while (TRUE) {
@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ int dtm_connect(sn, s)
/* connect complete, set working socket to original socket */
*s = d;
setsockopt(*s, IPPROTO_TCP, TCP_NODELAY, (char *)&d, sizeof d);
setsockopt(*s, SOL_SOCKET, SO_SNDBUF, (char *)&buf_size,
setsockopt(*s, SOL_SOCKET, SO_SNDBUF, (char *)&buf_size,
sizeof(int));
return DTM_OK;
}
@ -492,11 +492,11 @@ int dtm_end_connect(s)
/*
Return values :
Return values :
On success,
Direct - host address in network byte order.
Indirect - *ipaddr has host address in dotted
decimal notation.
Indirect - *ipaddr has host address in dotted
decimal notation.
On error, 0.
Notes:
@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ unsigned long dtm_get_ipaddr( ipaddrstr )
}
DBGINT( "dtm_get_ipaddr: dotted decimal address = '%s'\n", ipaddrstr );
return inet_addr( ipaddrstr ) ;
return inet_addr( ipaddrstr ) ;
}
/*
@ -576,17 +576,17 @@ int dtm_socket_init( sockaddr, porttype, fLogicalName )
int sockaddrsize = sizeof (struct sockaddr_in);
char buf[128];
DBGMSG1( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> s_addr = %x\n",
DBGMSG1( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> s_addr = %x\n",
ntohl( sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr) );
DBGMSG1( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> sin_port = %d\n",
DBGMSG1( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> sin_port = %d\n",
ntohs( sockaddr -> sin_port) );
sockaddr -> sin_family = AF_INET ;
sockaddr -> sin_family = AF_INET ;
if ( fLogicalName ) {
/*
Logical name had been supplied for makeport.
/*
Logical name had been supplied for makeport.
Assign port from system ( sin_port = 0 ), and accept
from all network interfaces for multi-homed host
from all network interfaces for multi-homed host
( INADDR_ANY ).
*/
sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr = htonl( INADDR_ANY );
@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ int dtm_socket_init( sockaddr, porttype, fLogicalName )
}
if( (sockfd = socket( sockaddr -> sin_family, type, protocol )) < 0 ) {
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK ;
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK ;
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: socket create error %d", errno );
return DTMERROR ;
}
@ -623,27 +623,27 @@ int dtm_socket_init( sockaddr, porttype, fLogicalName )
DBGFLOW( "dtm_socket_init: Before bind\n" );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockfd = %d\n", sockfd );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> family = %d\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> family = %d\n",
sockaddr -> sin_family );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> s_addr = %x\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> s_addr = %x\n",
ntohl( sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr) );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> sin_port = %d\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: sockaddr -> sin_port = %d\n",
ntohs( sockaddr -> sin_port) );
if( bind( sockfd, (struct sockaddr *)sockaddr,
if( bind( sockfd, (struct sockaddr *)sockaddr,
sizeof( struct sockaddr_in ) ) < 0 ) {
DTMerrno = DTMSOCK ;
DBGMSG1( "dtm_socket_init: could not bind to sockaddr, errno = %d\n",
DBGMSG1( "dtm_socket_init: could not bind to sockaddr, errno = %d\n",
errno );
return DTMERROR;
}
/* Listen at socket for TCP port, buffer for 5 pending connections */
if( porttype == INPORTTYPE )
if( porttype == INPORTTYPE )
listen( sockfd, 5 );
/*
/*
Get the actual assigned (port) address ( netid/hostid/portid )
- netid/hostid from dtm_get_ipaddr(),portid from getsockname().
@ -667,9 +667,9 @@ int dtm_socket_init( sockaddr, porttype, fLogicalName )
}
DBGFLOW( "dtm_socket_init: Verify nethostid/portid\n" );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: Nethostid = %x\n",
ntohl( sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr ) );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: Portid = %d \n",
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: Nethostid = %x\n",
ntohl( sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr ) );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: Portid = %d \n",
ntohs( sockaddr -> sin_port ) );
DBGINT( "dtm_socket_init: exit sockfd = %d\n", sockfd );
@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ int dtm_init_sockaddr( sockaddr, portname, pfLogicalName )
DBGFLOW( "dtm_init_sockaddr called\n" );
if( lportname[0] == ':' ) {
host = NULL ;
host = NULL ;
port = lportname + 1;
} else {
if( (port = strchr( lportname, ':' )) == NULL ) {
@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ int dtm_init_sockaddr( sockaddr, portname, pfLogicalName )
sockaddr -> sin_port = htons( 0 );
sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0);
*pfLogicalName = TRUE;
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: sin_port = %d\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: sin_port = %d\n",
ntohs( sockaddr->sin_port ));
return DTM_OK;
}
@ -737,15 +737,15 @@ int dtm_init_sockaddr( sockaddr, portname, pfLogicalName )
}
*pfLogicalName = FALSE;
/*
Physical format - hostname is either in dotted decimal
/*
Physical format - hostname is either in dotted decimal
notation ( call ipaddr() ) or direct or missing.
*/
if( host == NULL ) {
gethostname( hostname, sizeof hostname );
host = hostname ;
}
}
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: host %s\n", host );
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: port %s\n", port );
@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ int dtm_init_sockaddr( sockaddr, portname, pfLogicalName )
/* Fill in port id */
sockaddr -> sin_port = htons((unsigned short)atol( port ));
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: nethostid = %x\n",
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: nethostid = %x\n",
ntohl( sockaddr -> sin_addr.s_addr ));
DBGINT( "dtm_init_sockaddr: portid = %d\n", ntohs( sockaddr -> sin_port) );

6
libdtm/srv.h
View File

@ -17,11 +17,11 @@
#define SRV_FUNC_LOCK_REQUEST 7
/**************************************************************
*
*
* for a connect message:
* SRVclass SRVid SRV_FUNC_CONNECT SRVInPort SRVVString SRVnumber
* for a disconnect message:
* SRVclass SRVid SRV_FUNC_DISCONNECT SRVInPort
* SRVclass SRVid SRV_FUNC_DISCONNECT SRVInPort
* for a lock:
* SRVclass SRVid SRV_FUNC_LOCK SRVLock
* for a lock:
@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
* for a user leaving:
* SRVclass SRVid SRV_FUNC_REMOVE_USER SRVInPort
*/
/* SRVsetClass(char *header,char *title) */
/* SRVcompareClass(char *header,char *title, int maxTitleLength) */

2
libdtm/text.h
View File

@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
/* TXTsetReplaceAll(char *header) */
/* Boolean TXTshouldReplaceAll(char *header,int garbage) */
#define TXTsetReplaceAll(h) dtm_set_int(h,TXTra,1)
#define TXTshouldReplaceAll(h,i) (dtm_get_int(h,TXTra,&(i)) == -1)?0:1
#define TXTshouldReplaceAll(h,i) (dtm_get_int(h,TXTra,&(i)) == -1)?0:1
/* TXTsetDimension(char *header,int numBytes) */
/* TXTgetDimension(char *header,int &numBytes) */

4
libdtm/uio.h
View File

@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*********************************************************************
**
* $Header: /X11/mosaic/cvsroot/xmosaic3/libdtm/uio.h,v 1.3 1995/01/12 02:33:40 spowers Exp $
* $Header: /X11/mosaic/cvsroot/xmosaic3/libdtm/uio.h,v 1.3 1995/01/12 02:33:40 spowers Exp $
**
**********************************************************************/
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.2 92/04/30 20:27:37 jplevyak
* Changed Version to 2.3
*
*
* Revision 1.1 1992/03/06 22:51:22 jplevyak
* Initial revision
*

4
libdtm/vaxcvt.c
View File

@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ int size;
}
else if (c1 & 0x60) { /* denormalized value */
register int shft;
shft = (c1 & 0x40) ? 1 : 2; /* shift needed to normalize */
/* shift mantissa */
/* note last bit of exp set to 1 implicitly */
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ int size;
}
else if (c1 & 0x0c) { /* denormalized value */
register int shft;
shft = (c1 & 0x08) ? 1 : 2; /* shift needed to normalize */
/* shift mantissa */
/* note last bit of exp set to 1 implicitly */

12
libdtm/x.c
View File

@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
*
* Revision 1.4 92/05/05 22:27:50 jplevyak
* Corrected X interface code.
*
*
* Revision 1.3 1992/05/04 22:05:55 jplevyak
* Declare DTMaddInput external
*
@ -121,12 +121,12 @@ void dtm_handle_new_out( client_data, fd, id )
automatically handled.
*/
#ifdef DTM_PROTOTYPES
int DTMaddInput( int p_ext, caddr_t condition,
int DTMaddInput( int p_ext, caddr_t condition,
XtInputCallbackProc proc, caddr_t client_data )
#else
int DTMaddInput( p_ext, condition, proc, client_data )
int p_ext;
caddr_t condition;
caddr_t condition;
XtInputCallbackProc proc;
caddr_t client_data;
#endif
@ -148,14 +148,14 @@ int DTMaddInput( p_ext, condition, proc, client_data )
/*
Set up callback for new connections
*/
XtAddInput( pp->sockfd, XtInputReadMask, dtm_handle_new_in,
XtAddInput( pp->sockfd, XtInputReadMask, dtm_handle_new_in,
(caddr_t) p );
FOR_EACH_IN_PORT( inp, pp ) {
inp->XinputId = XtAddInput( inp->fd, XtInputReadMask,
inp->XinputId = XtAddInput( inp->fd, XtInputReadMask,
dtm_handle_in, (caddr_t) p );
}
} else {
XtAddInput( pp->sockfd, XtInputReadMask, dtm_handle_new_out,
XtAddInput( pp->sockfd, XtInputReadMask, dtm_handle_new_out,
(caddr_t) p );
}
return DTM_OK;

12
libhtmlw/DrawingArea.c
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
/*
/*
* A minimalistic constraint widget
*
* Sun Sep 12 20:03:49 GMT 1993 Gustaf Neumann
* Sun Sep 12 20:03:49 GMT 1993 Gustaf Neumann
*/
#include "../config.h"
#ifndef MOTIF
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ DrawingAreaClassRec drawingAreaClassRec = {
{ /* constraint_class fields */
/* subresourses */ NULL,
/* subresource_count */ 0,
/* constraint_size */ 0,
/* constraint_size */ 0,
/* initialize */ NULL, /*ConstraintInitialize,*/
/* destroy */ NULL,
/* set_values */ NULL, /*ConstraintSetValues,*/
@ -157,9 +157,9 @@ static Boolean ConstraintSetValues(current, request, new, args, num_args)
Cardinal *num_args;
{
/*
register DrawingAreaConstraints cfc =
register DrawingAreaConstraints cfc =
(DrawingAreaConstraints) current->core.constraints;
register DrawingAreaConstraints nfc =
register DrawingAreaConstraints nfc =
(DrawingAreaConstraints) new->core.constraints;
*/
return( FALSE );
@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ static XtGeometryResult PreferredGeometry( widget, request, reply )
{
/*
DrawingAreaWidget w = (DrawingAreaWidget)widget;
*/
*/
return XtGeometryNo;
}

2
libhtmlw/DrawingArea.h
View File

@ -31,5 +31,5 @@ typedef struct _DrawingAreaClassRec *DrawingAreaWidgetClass;
typedef struct _DrawingAreaRec *DrawingAreaWidget;
extern WidgetClass drawingAreaWidgetClass;
#endif /* _XawDrawingArea_h */

316
libhtmlw/HTML-PSformat.c
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
* Purpose: to parse Hypertext widget contents into appropriate PostScript
*
* Author: Ameet A. Raval & Frans van Hoesel & Andrew Ford
* (aar@gfdl.gov & hoesel@chem.rug.nl).
* (aar@gfdl.gov & hoesel@chem.rug.nl).
* send bugreports to hoesel@chem.rug.nl
*
* Institution: for Ameet A. Raval:
@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
* Montpelier, Bristol, BS6 5HR, GB
* E-mail: andrew@icarus.demon.co.uk
*
* Date: 1 aug 1993
* Date: 1 aug 1993
* Modification: 8 nov 1993
* o added support for bold/italics courier
* o removed unused or no longer needed stuff
@ -49,8 +49,8 @@
* WE MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE FOR
* ANY PURPOSE. IT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
* WARRANTY. WE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY THE
* USERS OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*
* USERS OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*
* pieces of code are taken from xvps by kind
* permission of John Bradley.
*
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ extern int SwapElements();
PSprintf("%s\n", txt[i]) ; \
} \
}
/* STREQ tests whether two strings are equal. */
#define STREQ(a, b) (strcmp((a), (b)) == 0)
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ PAGE_DIMENS_T;
PAGE_DIMENS_T page_dimens;
PAGE_DIMENS_T a4_page_dimens = {
297 * MM,
210 * MM,
210 * MM,
20 * MM,
20 * MM,
20 * MM,
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ extern Colormap installed_cmap;
* screen
*
*/
static float
static float
GetDpi(HTMLWidget hw)
{
Screen *s = XtScreen(hw);
@ -228,17 +228,17 @@ GetDpi(HTMLWidget hw)
* in this call, otherwise it returns EOF (just as printf does)
*
*/
static int
static int
PSprintf(char *format, ...)
{
int len;
char *s;
va_list args;
if (PS_size - PS_len < 1024)
if (PS_size - PS_len < 1024)
{
PS_size += 1024;
if ((s = (char *) realloc(PS_string, PS_size)) == NULL)
if ((s = (char *) realloc(PS_string, PS_size)) == NULL)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ PSprintf(char *format, ...)
/* this is a hack to make it work on systems were vsprintf(s,...)
* returns s, instead of the len.
*/
if (len != EOF && len != 0)
if (len != EOF && len != 0)
PS_len += strlen(PS_string+PS_len);
va_end(args);
return(len);
@ -270,13 +270,13 @@ PSprintf(char *format, ...)
* PSprintf).
*
*/
static int
static int
PShex(unsigned char val, int flush)
{
static unsigned char hexline[80];
static char digit[] = "0123456789abcdef";
if (!flush)
if (!flush)
{
hexline[PS_hexi++] = (char) digit[((unsigned) val >>
(unsigned) 4) & (unsigned) 0x0f];
@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ PShex(unsigned char val, int flush)
/* Changed from ">78" to ">77" on advice of
debra@info.win.tue.nl (Paul De Bra). */
if ((flush && PS_hexi) || (PS_hexi>77))
if ((flush && PS_hexi) || (PS_hexi>77))
{
hexline[PS_hexi] = '\0';
PS_hexi=0;
@ -306,13 +306,13 @@ PShex(unsigned char val, int flush)
*
*/
static void
PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
{
PS_fontstyle fn;
int style, size;
int fs;
static PS_fontstyle fontstyle[17] =
static PS_fontstyle fontstyle[17] =
{
RF, IF, BF, FF, BF, BF, BF, BF, BF,
BF, IF, FF, FF, FB, FI, FB, FI
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
/* fontsizes as set in gui.c and in HTML.c (listing font is only
* defined in HTML.c)
*/
static int fontsizes[4][3][17] =
static int fontsizes[4][3][17] =
{
/* times font sizes */
{
@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
}
};
/* next is for each fontfamily the ascent value as given by the
/* next is for each fontfamily the ascent value as given by the
* medium sized bold x-font (the regular font has the same
* ascent value for both the medium and the large size Century
* font).
@ -446,12 +446,12 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
/* check size, by looking at the size of the regular font */
size = 1;
if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent > medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent > medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
{
/* large font */
size = 2;
}
else if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent < medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
else if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent < medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
{
/* small font */
size = 0;
@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
fs = fontsizes[fontfamily][size][style];
PS_fontascent = fontascent[fontfamily][size][style];
if (fn != PS_oldfn || fs != PS_oldfs)
if (fn != PS_oldfn || fs != PS_oldfs)
{
PSprintf( "%2s %d SF\n", fnchar[fn], fs);
PS_oldfn=fn, PS_oldfs=fs;
@ -475,26 +475,26 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
* Any accumulated footnotes are output and the outstanding footnote count
* reset to zero. Footnotes are preceded by a footnote rule and each footnote
* is consists of a raised mark and the footnote text (i.e. the url). The mark
* is in a smaller font than the text. The ideas are filched from LaTeX.
* is in a smaller font than the text. The ideas are filched from LaTeX.
*/
static void
PSshowpage(void)
{
PSprintf("restore\n");
if (n_saved_ftns > 0)
if (n_saved_ftns > 0)
{
int i;
PSprintf("gsave 0.2 setlinewidth newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke\n",
PSprintf("gsave 0.2 setlinewidth newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke\n",
page_dimens.left_margin,
(page_dimens.bot_margin + (footnote_ptsize * n_saved_ftns) + 4),
(page_dimens.text_width * 0.4));
for (i = 0; n_saved_ftns; n_saved_ftns--, i++)
for (i = 0; n_saved_ftns; n_saved_ftns--, i++)
{
PSprintf("newpath %.2f %.2f M RF %.2f SF (%d) S 3 -2 R RF %d SF (%s) S\n",
PSprintf("newpath %.2f %.2f M RF %.2f SF (%d) S 3 -2 R RF %d SF (%s) S\n",
page_dimens.left_margin,
page_dimens.bot_margin + 5 + (n_saved_ftns - 1) * footnote_ptsize,
(0.7 * footnote_ptsize), cur_ftn_no - n_saved_ftns,
(0.7 * footnote_ptsize), cur_ftn_no - n_saved_ftns,
footnote_ptsize, footnotes[i]);
}
PSprintf("grestore\n");
@ -512,10 +512,10 @@ PSshowpage(void)
*
*/
static void
PSnewpage(void)
PSnewpage(void)
{
PS_curr_page++;
/* the PostScript reference Manual states that the Page: Tag
should have a label and a ordinal; otherwise programs like
psutils fail -gustaf */
@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ PSnewpage(void)
* PSinit_latin1 - handle ISO encoding
*
* print out initializing PostScript text for ISO Latin1 font encoding
* This code is copied from the Idraw program (from Stanford's InterViews
* This code is copied from the Idraw program (from Stanford's InterViews
* package), courtesy of Steinar Kjaernsr|d, steinar@ifi.uio.no
*
*/
@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ PSinit_latin1(void)
*
*/
static void
PSinit(void)
PSinit(void)
{
PS_size = PS_len = PS_offset = PS_hexi = PS_page_offset = 0;
PS_start_y = 0;
@ -637,8 +637,8 @@ PSinit(void)
* title title of document
* date date modified/printed
*/
static void
PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
static void
PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
{
static char *notitle="Untitled";
int set_to_null=0;
@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
time_t clock = time(NULL);
#if !defined(VMS) || defined (__DECC)
strftime(time_buf, sizeof(time_buf),
strftime(time_buf, sizeof(time_buf),
"Printed %a %b %e %T %Y", localtime(&clock));
#else
sprintf(time_buf,"Printed %s",asctime(localtime(&clock)));
@ -732,16 +732,16 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
PSprintf("/title (%s) D\n", title);
PSprintf("/date (%s) D\n", time_str);
PSconst_out(txt);
/* Output the newpage definition. */
PSprintf("/NP {");
if (HTML_Print_Headers)
if (HTML_Print_Headers)
{
PSprintf("gsave 0.4 setlinewidth\n");
PSprintf(" newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke",
PSprintf(" newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke",
page_dimens.left_margin,
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height),
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height),
page_dimens.text_width);
PSprintf(" newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke\n",
page_dimens.left_margin, page_dimens.bot_margin,
@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height + 6), title);
PSprintf(" nstr cvs dup stringwidth pop pgno stringwidth pop add\n");
PSprintf(" %.2f E sub %.2f M pgno S S\n",
(page_dimens.left_margin + page_dimens.text_width),
(page_dimens.left_margin + page_dimens.text_width),
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height + 6));
PSprintf(" BF 10 SF %.2f %.2f M (%s) S\n",
page_dimens.left_margin, page_dimens.bot_margin - 12, url);
@ -760,11 +760,11 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
page_dimens.bot_margin - 12);
}
PSprintf(" %.2f %.2f translate %.5f %.5f scale } D\n",
page_dimens.left_margin,
page_dimens.left_margin,
page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height,
Points_Pixel, Points_Pixel);
PSinit_latin1();
PSprintf("%%%%EndProlog\n");
if (set_to_null) {
@ -802,9 +802,9 @@ PStrailer(void)
*
*/
static void
PSmoveto(int x, int y)
PSmoveto(int x, int y)
{
if (y > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
if (y > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
{
PS_start_y = y;
PSshowpage();
@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ PSmoveto(int x, int y)
static void
PSmove_offset(int offset)
{
if (offset != PS_offset)
if (offset != PS_offset)
{
PSprintf("0 %d R\n", PS_offset - offset );
PS_offset = offset;
@ -836,12 +836,12 @@ PSmove_offset(int offset)
* Return an indication of whether or not the current element has a footnote.
*
* an element has a footnote if it is text or an image and its anchorHRef is not null.
* If the element is a textual element with an anchorHRef, that has been split across
* If the element is a textual element with an anchorHRef, that has been split across
* lines then it should be followed by a linefeed element and a text element with the
* same anchorHRef. In this case say that the element doesn't have a footnote so as
* to avoid duplicate footnotes.
*/
static int
static int
has_footnote(struct ele_rec *el)
{
int rc = 0;
@ -904,10 +904,10 @@ has_footnote(struct ele_rec *el)
static void
PSfootnote(char *href, double height)
{
PSprintf("gsave 0 %.2f R RF %d SF (%d) S grestore\n",
PSprintf("gsave 0 %.2f R RF %d SF (%d) S grestore\n",
height, footnote_ptsize, cur_ftn_no++);
if (n_saved_ftns == ftn_array_size)
if (n_saved_ftns == ftn_array_size)
{
ftn_array_size += 16;
if (!footnotes) {
@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ PSfootnote(char *href, double height)
footnotes = (char **)realloc((void *)footnotes,
(ftn_array_size * sizeof(char *)));
}
if (footnotes == NULL)
if (footnotes == NULL)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -948,9 +948,9 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
unsigned char ch;
int underline = eptr->underline_number;
int ascent;
PSfont(hw, eptr->font, fontfamily); /* set font */
if (PS_fontascent == 0)
if (PS_fontascent == 0)
ascent = eptr->font->ascent;
else
ascent = PS_fontascent;
@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
every character stored as an octal escape (worst case scenario). */
s2 = (String) malloc(strlen(s) * 4 + 1);
if (s2 == NULL)
if (s2 == NULL)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -982,14 +982,14 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
*stmp++ = B_SLASH;
*stmp++ = ch;
}
else if (ch > (unsigned char) MAX_ASCII)
else if (ch > (unsigned char) MAX_ASCII)
{
/* convert to octal */
*stmp++ = B_SLASH;
*stmp++ = ((ch >> 6) & 007) + '0';
*stmp++ = ((ch >> 3) & 007) + '0';
*stmp++ = (ch & 007) + '0';
}
}
else
{
*stmp++ = ch;
@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
}
*(stmp) = '\0';
PSprintf("(%s)%c\n", s2, (underline)?'U':'S');
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
{
PSfootnote(eptr->anchorHRef, 0.7 * ascent);
}
@ -1012,10 +1012,10 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
* of two. The size of the higher level bullets is just somewhat smaller
*
*/
static void
static void
PSbullet(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
{
int width = ( eptr->font->max_bounds.lbearing
int width = ( eptr->font->max_bounds.lbearing
+ eptr->font->max_bounds.rbearing);
int offset = eptr->y_offset + eptr->font->ascent;
int level = eptr->indent_level;
@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ PSwidget(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
* does the run-length encoding. This is done to reduce the file size and
* therefore the time to send the file to the printer. You get longer
* processing time instead.
*
*
* rle is encoded as such:
* <count> <value> # 'run' of count+1 equal pixels
* <count | 0x80> <count+1 data bytes> # count+1 non-equal pixels
@ -1131,18 +1131,18 @@ PSwidget(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
*
* returns length of the rleline vector
*
*/
*/
static int
PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
unsigned char *rleline,
int wide)
int wide)
{
int i, j, blocklen, isrun, rlen;
unsigned char block[256], pix;
blocklen = isrun = rlen = 0;
for (i = 0; i < wide; i++)
for (i = 0; i < wide; i++)
{
/* there are 5 possible states:
* 0: block empty.
@ -1154,23 +1154,23 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
pix = scanline[i];
if (!blocklen)
if (!blocklen)
{
/* case 0: empty */
block[blocklen++] = pix;
isrun = 1;
}
else if (isrun)
else if (isrun)
{
if (pix == block[blocklen-1])
{
{
/* case 1: isrun, prev==cur */
block[blocklen++] = pix;
}
else
else
{
/* case 2: isrun, prev!=cur */
if (blocklen>1)
if (blocklen>1)
{
/* we have a run block to flush */
rleline[rlen++] = blocklen-1;
@ -1188,12 +1188,12 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
}
}
else
{
{
/* not a run */
if (pix == block[blocklen-1])
if (pix == block[blocklen-1])
{
/* case 3: non-run, prev==cur */
if (blocklen>1)
if (blocklen>1)
{
/* have a non-run block to flush */
rleline[rlen++] = (blocklen-1) | 0x80;
@ -1202,7 +1202,7 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
/* start new run block with pix */
block[0] = pix;
blocklen = isrun = 1;
}
}
else
{
/* blocklen<=1 turn into a run */
@ -1210,17 +1210,17 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
block[blocklen++] = pix;
}
}
else
else
{
/* case 4: non-run, prev!=cur */
block[blocklen++] = pix;
}
}
/* max block length. flush */
if (blocklen == 128)
{
if (isrun)
if (isrun)
{
rleline[rlen++] = blocklen-1;
rleline[rlen++] = block[0];
@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
/*
* PScolor_image - created postscript colorimage operator
* PScolor_image - created postscript colorimage operator
*
* spits out code that checks if the PostScript device in question
* knows about the 'colorimage' operator. If it doesn't, it defines
@ -1265,8 +1265,8 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
*
*/
static void
PScolor_image(void)
static void
PScolor_image(void)
{
static char *txt[] = {
@ -1316,21 +1316,21 @@ PScolor_image(void)
PSconst_out(txt);
}
/*
* PScolormap - write colormap
*
* spits out code for the colormap of the following image
* if !color, it spits out a mono-ized graymap
*
*
*/
static void
PScolormap(int color,
int nc,
int *rmap,
int *gmap,
int *bmap)
PScolormap(int color,
int nc,
int *rmap,
int *gmap,
int *bmap)
{
int i;
@ -1340,12 +1340,12 @@ PScolormap(int color,
/* load up the colormap */
PSprintf("currentfile cmap readhexstring\n");
for (i=0; i<nc; i++)
for (i=0; i<nc; i++)
{
if (color)
if (color)
PSprintf("%02x%02x%02x ", rmap[i]>>8,
gmap[i]>>8, bmap[i]>>8);
else
else
PSprintf("%02x ", MONO(rmap[i], gmap[i], bmap[i]));
if ((i%10) == 9)
PSprintf("\n");
@ -1357,10 +1357,10 @@ PScolormap(int color,
/*
* PSrle_cmapimage - define rlecmapimage operator
*
*
*/
static void
PSrle_cmapimage(int color)
PSrle_cmapimage(int color)
{
static char *txt[] = {
@ -1413,11 +1413,11 @@ PSrle_cmapimage(int color)
};
PSconst_out(txt);
if (color)
if (color)
{
PSconst_out(txt_color);
}
else
}
else
{
PSconst_out(txt_gray);
}
@ -1439,14 +1439,14 @@ PSwrite_bw(unsigned char *pic, int w, int h, int flipbw)
int i, j;
int err=0;
unsigned char outbyte, bitnum, bit;
outbyte = bitnum = 0;
for (i=0; i<h && err != EOF; i++) {
for (j=0; j<w && err != EOF; j++) {
bit = *(pic++);
outbyte = (outbyte<<1) | ((bit)&0x01);
bitnum++;
if (bitnum==8) {
if (flipbw)
outbyte = ~outbyte & 0xff;
@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ PSwrite_bw(unsigned char *pic, int w, int h, int flipbw)
}
}
err=PShex('\0', True); /* Flush the hex buffer if needed */
return err;
}
@ -1475,15 +1475,15 @@ PSwrite_bw(unsigned char *pic, int w, int h, int flipbw)
* rectangle is shown.
* If anchor is set, a black border is shown around the image.
* Positioning is not exactly that of Xmosaic's screen, but close enough.
*
*
*/
static void
static void
PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
{
ImageInfo *img = eptr->pic_data;
unsigned char *imgp = img->image_data;
int anchor = (eptr->anchorHRef != NULL);
int anchor = (eptr->anchorHRef != NULL);
int ncolors = img->num_colors;
int i, j;
int w = img->width;
@ -1504,7 +1504,7 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
PSmove_offset(eptr->y_offset);
if (anchor)
if (anchor)
{
/* draw an outline by drawing a slightly larger black square
* below the actual image
@ -1515,8 +1515,8 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
PSprintf("grestore\n");
extra = 4;
}
if (imgp == NULL)
if (imgp == NULL)
{
/* image was not available... do something instead
* draw an empty square for example
@ -1534,20 +1534,20 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
return;
}
/* this is a hack to see if the image is Black & White,
/* this is a hack to see if the image is Black & White,
* Greyscale or 8 bit color
* assume it's bw if it has only one or two colors, both some grey's
* assume it's greyscale if all the colors (>2) are grey
* Images with only one color do occur too.
*/
if ( ( (ncolors == 2)
if ( ( (ncolors == 2)
&& ( (Isgray(img,0) && Isgray(img,1))
|| (Is_bg(img,0) && Is_fg(img,1))
|| (Is_bg(img,0) && Is_fg(img,1))
|| (Is_fg(img,0) && Is_bg(img,1)) ))
|| ( (ncolors == 1)
&& (Isgray(img,0)
|| Is_bg(img,0)
|| Is_bg(img,0)
|| Is_fg(img,0))))
{
colortype = F_BWDITHER;
@ -1569,13 +1569,13 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
}
}
}
/* build a temporary dictionary */
PSprintf("20 dict begin\n\n");
/* define string to hold a scanline's worth of data */
PSprintf("/pix %d string def\n\n", slen);
/* position and scaling */
PSprintf("gsave currentpoint %d sub translate", h);
if (anchor)
@ -1583,45 +1583,45 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
else
PSprintf(" 0 2 translate");
PSprintf(" %d %d scale\n", w, h);
if (colortype == F_BWDITHER)
if (colortype == F_BWDITHER)
{
/* 1-bit dither code uses 'image' */
int flipbw = 0;
/* set if color#0 is 'white' */
if ((ncolors == 2 &&
MONO(img->reds[0], img->greens[0],img->blues[0]) >
MONO(img->reds[1], img->greens[1], img->blues[1])) ||
(ncolors == 1 &&
(ncolors == 1 &&
MONO(img->reds[0], img->greens[0],img->blues[0]) >
MONO(127, 127, 127) ))
{
flipbw=1;
flipbw=1;
}
/* dimensions of data */
PSprintf("%d %d %d\n", w, h, bits);
/* mapping matrix */
PSprintf("[%d 0 0 %d 0 %d]\n\n", w, -h, h);
PSprintf("{currentfile pix readhexstring pop}\n");
PSprintf("image\n");
/* write the actual image data */
err = PSwrite_bw(imgp, w, h, flipbw);
}
}
else
{
/* all other formats */
unsigned char *rleline = (unsigned char *) NULL;
int rlen;
/* if we're using color, make sure 'colorimage' is defined */
if (colorps)
PScolor_image();
PScolormap(colorps, ncolors, img->reds, img->greens, img->blues);
PSrle_cmapimage(colorps);
@ -1630,9 +1630,9 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
/* mapping matrix */
PSprintf("[%d 0 0 %d 0 %d]\n", w, -h, h);
PSprintf("rlecmapimage\n");
rleline = (unsigned char *) malloc(w * 2);
if (!rleline)
if (!rleline)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -1643,7 +1643,7 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
return;
}
for (i=0; i<h && err != EOF; i++)
for (i=0; i<h && err != EOF; i++)
{
rlen = PSrle_encode(imgp, rleline, w);
imgp += w;
@ -1653,14 +1653,14 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
}
free(rleline);
}
/* stop using temporary dictionary */
PSprintf("end\n");
PSprintf("grestore\n");
/* move currentpoint just right of image */
PSprintf("%d 0 R\n", w + extra);
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
PSprintf("%d 0 R\n", w + extra);
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
{
PSmove_offset(0);
PSfootnote(eptr->anchorHRef, 2.0);
@ -1699,11 +1699,11 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
* 2: new century schoolbook
* 3: lucida
*/
String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
struct ele_rec *elist,
struct ele_rec *startp,
struct ele_rec *endp,
int start_pos,
int start_pos,
int end_pos,
int space_width,
int lmargin,
@ -1720,11 +1720,11 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
struct ele_rec *end;
struct ele_rec *last;
struct ele_rec *tmpptr;
unsigned long fg_pixel, bg_pixel;
unsigned long fg_pixel, bg_pixel;
int footnotes_this_page = 0;
int footnotes_this_line;
int reserved_space;
if (startp == NULL)
return(NULL);
@ -1733,17 +1733,17 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
* Get the foreground and background colors so we can check later
* for black&white documents
*/
XtVaGetValues (hw->html.view,
XtVaGetValues (hw->html.view,
#ifdef MOTIF
XtNforeground, &fg_pixel,
#endif
XtNbackground, &bg_pixel,
XtNbackground, &bg_pixel,
NULL);
#ifndef MOTIF
XtVaGetValues ((Widget)hw,
XtVaGetValues ((Widget)hw,
XtNforeground, &fg_pixel,
NULL);
#endif
#endif
fg_color.pixel = fg_pixel;
bg_color.pixel = bg_pixel;
XQueryColor(XtDisplay(hw->html.view),
@ -1758,12 +1758,12 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
DefaultColormap(XtDisplay(hw->html.view),
DefaultScreen(XtDisplay(hw->html.view)))),
&bg_color);
/* this piece of code is needed if the user selects a portion
* of the document with the mouse.
* I think it will never be used, but I left it in anyway. F.
*/
if (SwapElements(startp, endp, start_pos, end_pos))
if (SwapElements(startp, endp, start_pos, end_pos))
{
start = endp;
end = startp;
@ -1776,7 +1776,7 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
start = startp;
end = endp;
}
/* Setup page size according to user preference. */
if (HTML_Print_Paper_Size_A4)
@ -1785,10 +1785,10 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
page_dimens = us_letter_page_dimens;
page_dimens.text_height = ( page_dimens.page_height
- page_dimens.top_margin
- page_dimens.top_margin
- page_dimens.bot_margin);
page_dimens.text_width = ( page_dimens.page_width
- page_dimens.left_margin
- page_dimens.left_margin
- page_dimens.right_margin);
/* Calculate the number of Postscript points per pixel of current
@ -1808,10 +1808,10 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
* wide), but I guess that the hw->html.doc_width includes some
* left and right margins, so it seems to work in practice.
*/
if (pagewidth > page_dimens.text_width)
if (pagewidth > page_dimens.text_width)
Points_Pixel = Points_Pixel * page_dimens.text_width / pagewidth;
Pixels_Page = (int) (page_dimens.text_height / Points_Pixel);
Pixels_Page = (int) (page_dimens.text_height / Points_Pixel);
PSinit();
PSheader(hw->html.title, fontfamily, url, time_str);
PSnewpage();
@ -1819,14 +1819,14 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
last = start;
eptr = start;
while ((eptr != NULL) && (eptr != end))
while ((eptr != NULL) && (eptr != end))
{
/* Skip the special internal text added for multi-page
* documents.
*/
if (eptr->internal == True)
if (eptr->internal == True)
{
if (eptr->type == E_LINEFEED)
if (eptr->type == E_LINEFEED)
{
PS_page_offset += eptr->line_height;
}
@ -1835,14 +1835,14 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
}
/* check if this is a newline */
if (line != eptr->line_number)
if (line != eptr->line_number)
{
/* calculate max height */
height = 0;
footnotes_this_line = 0;
line = eptr->line_number;
tmpptr = eptr;
while (tmpptr != NULL && tmpptr->line_number == line)
while (tmpptr != NULL && tmpptr->line_number == line)
{
if (tmpptr->line_height > height)
height = tmpptr->line_height;
@ -1856,18 +1856,18 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
xpos = 0;
/* check if line fits completly on page */
reserved_space = 0;
if (footnotes_this_page || footnotes_this_line)
if (footnotes_this_page || footnotes_this_line)
{
reserved_space = ( ( footnote_space
+ ( footnote_ptsize
* ( footnotes_this_page
* ( footnotes_this_page
+ footnotes_this_line)))
/ Points_Pixel);
}
if (ypos + height + reserved_space > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
if (ypos + height + reserved_space > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
{
PS_start_y = ypos;
PSshowpage();
@ -1877,24 +1877,24 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
footnotes_this_page += footnotes_this_line;
PSmoveto( xpos, ypos);
}
switch (eptr->type)
switch (eptr->type)
{
case E_TEXT:
PStext(hw, eptr, fontfamily,
(String)((eptr == start) ? (eptr->edata + start_pos) : eptr->edata));
break;
case E_BULLET:
case E_BULLET:
PSbullet(hw, eptr, fontfamily);
break;
case E_IMAGE:
case E_IMAGE:
PSimage(hw, eptr, fontfamily);
break;
case E_LINEFEED:
case E_LINEFEED:
break;
case E_HRULE:
@ -1913,7 +1913,7 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
last = eptr;
eptr = eptr->next;
}
PSshowpage();
PStrailer();

316
libhtmlw/HTML-PSformat.c.org
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
* Purpose: to parse Hypertext widget contents into appropriate PostScript
*
* Author: Ameet A. Raval & Frans van Hoesel & Andrew Ford
* (aar@gfdl.gov & hoesel@chem.rug.nl).
* (aar@gfdl.gov & hoesel@chem.rug.nl).
* send bugreports to hoesel@chem.rug.nl
*
* Institution: for Ameet A. Raval:
@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
* Montpelier, Bristol, BS6 5HR, GB
* E-mail: andrew@icarus.demon.co.uk
*
* Date: 1 aug 1993
* Date: 1 aug 1993
* Modification: 8 nov 1993
* o added support for bold/italics courier
* o removed unused or no longer needed stuff
@ -49,8 +49,8 @@
* WE MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE FOR
* ANY PURPOSE. IT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
* WARRANTY. WE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY THE
* USERS OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*
* USERS OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*
* pieces of code are taken from xvps by kind
* permission of John Bradley.
*
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ extern int SwapElements();
PSprintf("%s\n", txt[i]) ; \
} \
}
/* STREQ tests whether two strings are equal. */
#define STREQ(a, b) (strcmp((a), (b)) == 0)
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ PAGE_DIMENS_T;
PAGE_DIMENS_T page_dimens;
PAGE_DIMENS_T a4_page_dimens = {
297 * MM,
210 * MM,
210 * MM,
20 * MM,
20 * MM,
20 * MM,
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ extern Colormap installed_cmap;
* screen
*
*/
static float
static float
GetDpi(HTMLWidget hw)
{
Screen *s = XtScreen(hw);
@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ GetDpi(HTMLWidget hw)
* in this call, otherwise it returns EOF (just as printf does)
*
*/
static int
static int
PSprintf(format, va_alist)
char* format;
va_dcl
@ -237,10 +237,10 @@ PSprintf(format, va_alist)
char *s;
va_list args;
if (PS_size - PS_len < 1024)
if (PS_size - PS_len < 1024)
{
PS_size += 1024;
if ((s = (char *) realloc(PS_string, PS_size)) == NULL)
if ((s = (char *) realloc(PS_string, PS_size)) == NULL)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ PSprintf(format, va_alist)
/* this is a hack to make it work on systems were vsprintf(s,...)
* returns s, instead of the len.
*/
if (len != EOF && len != 0)
if (len != EOF && len != 0)
PS_len += strlen(PS_string+PS_len);
va_end(args);
return(len);
@ -272,13 +272,13 @@ PSprintf(format, va_alist)
* PSprintf).
*
*/
static int
static int
PShex(unsigned char val, int flush)
{
static unsigned char hexline[80];
static char digit[] = "0123456789abcdef";
if (!flush)
if (!flush)
{
hexline[PS_hexi++] = (char) digit[((unsigned) val >>
(unsigned) 4) & (unsigned) 0x0f];
@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ PShex(unsigned char val, int flush)
/* Changed from ">78" to ">77" on advice of
debra@info.win.tue.nl (Paul De Bra). */
if ((flush && PS_hexi) || (PS_hexi>77))
if ((flush && PS_hexi) || (PS_hexi>77))
{
hexline[PS_hexi] = '\0';
PS_hexi=0;
@ -308,13 +308,13 @@ PShex(unsigned char val, int flush)
*
*/
static void
PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
{
PS_fontstyle fn;
int style, size;
int fs;
static PS_fontstyle fontstyle[17] =
static PS_fontstyle fontstyle[17] =
{
RF, IF, BF, FF, BF, BF, BF, BF, BF,
BF, IF, FF, FF, FB, FI, FB, FI
@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
/* fontsizes as set in gui.c and in HTML.c (listing font is only
* defined in HTML.c)
*/
static int fontsizes[4][3][17] =
static int fontsizes[4][3][17] =
{
/* times font sizes */
{
@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
}
};
/* next is for each fontfamily the ascent value as given by the
/* next is for each fontfamily the ascent value as given by the
* medium sized bold x-font (the regular font has the same
* ascent value for both the medium and the large size Century
* font).
@ -448,12 +448,12 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
/* check size, by looking at the size of the regular font */
size = 1;
if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent > medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent > medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
{
/* large font */
size = 2;
}
else if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent < medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
else if (hw->html.bold_font->ascent < medium_fontascent[fontfamily])
{
/* small font */
size = 0;
@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
fs = fontsizes[fontfamily][size][style];
PS_fontascent = fontascent[fontfamily][size][style];
if (fn != PS_oldfn || fs != PS_oldfs)
if (fn != PS_oldfn || fs != PS_oldfs)
{
PSprintf( "%2s %d SF\n", fnchar[fn], fs);
PS_oldfn=fn, PS_oldfs=fs;
@ -477,26 +477,26 @@ PSfont(HTMLWidget hw, XFontStruct *font, int fontfamily)
* Any accumulated footnotes are output and the outstanding footnote count
* reset to zero. Footnotes are preceded by a footnote rule and each footnote
* is consists of a raised mark and the footnote text (i.e. the url). The mark
* is in a smaller font than the text. The ideas are filched from LaTeX.
* is in a smaller font than the text. The ideas are filched from LaTeX.
*/
static void
PSshowpage(void)
{
PSprintf("restore\n");
if (n_saved_ftns > 0)
if (n_saved_ftns > 0)
{
int i;
PSprintf("gsave 0.2 setlinewidth newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke\n",
PSprintf("gsave 0.2 setlinewidth newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke\n",
page_dimens.left_margin,
(page_dimens.bot_margin + (footnote_ptsize * n_saved_ftns) + 4),
(page_dimens.text_width * 0.4));
for (i = 0; n_saved_ftns; n_saved_ftns--, i++)
for (i = 0; n_saved_ftns; n_saved_ftns--, i++)
{
PSprintf("newpath %.2f %.2f M RF %.2f SF (%d) S 3 -2 R RF %d SF (%s) S\n",
PSprintf("newpath %.2f %.2f M RF %.2f SF (%d) S 3 -2 R RF %d SF (%s) S\n",
page_dimens.left_margin,
page_dimens.bot_margin + 5 + (n_saved_ftns - 1) * footnote_ptsize,
(0.7 * footnote_ptsize), cur_ftn_no - n_saved_ftns,
(0.7 * footnote_ptsize), cur_ftn_no - n_saved_ftns,
footnote_ptsize, footnotes[i]);
}
PSprintf("grestore\n");
@ -514,10 +514,10 @@ PSshowpage(void)
*
*/
static void
PSnewpage(void)
PSnewpage(void)
{
PS_curr_page++;
/* the PostScript reference Manual states that the Page: Tag
should have a label and a ordinal; otherwise programs like
psutils fail -gustaf */
@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ PSnewpage(void)
* PSinit_latin1 - handle ISO encoding
*
* print out initializing PostScript text for ISO Latin1 font encoding
* This code is copied from the Idraw program (from Stanford's InterViews
* This code is copied from the Idraw program (from Stanford's InterViews
* package), courtesy of Steinar Kjaernsr|d, steinar@ifi.uio.no
*
*/
@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ PSinit_latin1(void)
*
*/
static void
PSinit(void)
PSinit(void)
{
PS_size = PS_len = PS_offset = PS_hexi = PS_page_offset = 0;
PS_start_y = 0;
@ -639,8 +639,8 @@ PSinit(void)
* title title of document
* date date modified/printed
*/
static void
PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
static void
PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
{
static char *notitle="Untitled";
int set_to_null=0;
@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
time_t clock = time(NULL);
#if !defined(VMS) || defined (__DECC)
strftime(time_buf, sizeof(time_buf),
strftime(time_buf, sizeof(time_buf),
"Printed %a %b %e %T %Y", localtime(&clock));
#else
sprintf(time_buf,"Printed %s",asctime(localtime(&clock)));
@ -734,16 +734,16 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
PSprintf("/title (%s) D\n", title);
PSprintf("/date (%s) D\n", time_str);
PSconst_out(txt);
/* Output the newpage definition. */
PSprintf("/NP {");
if (HTML_Print_Headers)
if (HTML_Print_Headers)
{
PSprintf("gsave 0.4 setlinewidth\n");
PSprintf(" newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke",
PSprintf(" newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke",
page_dimens.left_margin,
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height),
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height),
page_dimens.text_width);
PSprintf(" newpath %.2f %.2f M %.2f 0 RL stroke\n",
page_dimens.left_margin, page_dimens.bot_margin,
@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height + 6), title);
PSprintf(" nstr cvs dup stringwidth pop pgno stringwidth pop add\n");
PSprintf(" %.2f E sub %.2f M pgno S S\n",
(page_dimens.left_margin + page_dimens.text_width),
(page_dimens.left_margin + page_dimens.text_width),
(page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height + 6));
PSprintf(" BF 10 SF %.2f %.2f M (%s) S\n",
page_dimens.left_margin, page_dimens.bot_margin - 12, url);
@ -762,11 +762,11 @@ PSheader(char *title, int font, char *url, char *time_str)
page_dimens.bot_margin - 12);
}
PSprintf(" %.2f %.2f translate %.5f %.5f scale } D\n",
page_dimens.left_margin,
page_dimens.left_margin,
page_dimens.bot_margin + page_dimens.text_height,
Points_Pixel, Points_Pixel);
PSinit_latin1();
PSprintf("%%%%EndProlog\n");
if (set_to_null) {
@ -804,9 +804,9 @@ PStrailer(void)
*
*/
static void
PSmoveto(int x, int y)
PSmoveto(int x, int y)
{
if (y > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
if (y > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
{
PS_start_y = y;
PSshowpage();
@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ PSmoveto(int x, int y)
static void
PSmove_offset(int offset)
{
if (offset != PS_offset)
if (offset != PS_offset)
{
PSprintf("0 %d R\n", PS_offset - offset );
PS_offset = offset;
@ -838,12 +838,12 @@ PSmove_offset(int offset)
* Return an indication of whether or not the current element has a footnote.
*
* an element has a footnote if it is text or an image and its anchorHRef is not null.
* If the element is a textual element with an anchorHRef, that has been split across
* If the element is a textual element with an anchorHRef, that has been split across
* lines then it should be followed by a linefeed element and a text element with the
* same anchorHRef. In this case say that the element doesn't have a footnote so as
* to avoid duplicate footnotes.
*/
static int
static int
has_footnote(struct ele_rec *el)
{
int rc = 0;
@ -906,10 +906,10 @@ has_footnote(struct ele_rec *el)
static void
PSfootnote(char *href, double height)
{
PSprintf("gsave 0 %.2f R RF %d SF (%d) S grestore\n",
PSprintf("gsave 0 %.2f R RF %d SF (%d) S grestore\n",
height, footnote_ptsize, cur_ftn_no++);
if (n_saved_ftns == ftn_array_size)
if (n_saved_ftns == ftn_array_size)
{
ftn_array_size += 16;
if (!footnotes) {
@ -919,7 +919,7 @@ PSfootnote(char *href, double height)
footnotes = (char **)realloc((void *)footnotes,
(ftn_array_size * sizeof(char *)));
}
if (footnotes == NULL)
if (footnotes == NULL)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -950,9 +950,9 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
unsigned char ch;
int underline = eptr->underline_number;
int ascent;
PSfont(hw, eptr->font, fontfamily); /* set font */
if (PS_fontascent == 0)
if (PS_fontascent == 0)
ascent = eptr->font->ascent;
else
ascent = PS_fontascent;
@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
every character stored as an octal escape (worst case scenario). */
s2 = (String) malloc(strlen(s) * 4 + 1);
if (s2 == NULL)
if (s2 == NULL)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -984,14 +984,14 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
*stmp++ = B_SLASH;
*stmp++ = ch;
}
else if (ch > (unsigned char) MAX_ASCII)
else if (ch > (unsigned char) MAX_ASCII)
{
/* convert to octal */
*stmp++ = B_SLASH;
*stmp++ = ((ch >> 6) & 007) + '0';
*stmp++ = ((ch >> 3) & 007) + '0';
*stmp++ = (ch & 007) + '0';
}
}
else
{
*stmp++ = ch;
@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
}
*(stmp) = '\0';
PSprintf("(%s)%c\n", s2, (underline)?'U':'S');
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
{
PSfootnote(eptr->anchorHRef, 0.7 * ascent);
}
@ -1014,10 +1014,10 @@ PStext(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily, String s)
* of two. The size of the higher level bullets is just somewhat smaller
*
*/
static void
static void
PSbullet(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
{
int width = ( eptr->font->max_bounds.lbearing
int width = ( eptr->font->max_bounds.lbearing
+ eptr->font->max_bounds.rbearing);
int offset = eptr->y_offset + eptr->font->ascent;
int level = eptr->indent_level;
@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ PSwidget(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
* does the run-length encoding. This is done to reduce the file size and
* therefore the time to send the file to the printer. You get longer
* processing time instead.
*
*
* rle is encoded as such:
* <count> <value> # 'run' of count+1 equal pixels
* <count | 0x80> <count+1 data bytes> # count+1 non-equal pixels
@ -1133,18 +1133,18 @@ PSwidget(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
*
* returns length of the rleline vector
*
*/
*/
static int
PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
unsigned char *rleline,
int wide)
int wide)
{
int i, j, blocklen, isrun, rlen;
unsigned char block[256], pix;
blocklen = isrun = rlen = 0;
for (i = 0; i < wide; i++)
for (i = 0; i < wide; i++)
{
/* there are 5 possible states:
* 0: block empty.
@ -1156,23 +1156,23 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
pix = scanline[i];
if (!blocklen)
if (!blocklen)
{
/* case 0: empty */
block[blocklen++] = pix;
isrun = 1;
}
else if (isrun)
else if (isrun)
{
if (pix == block[blocklen-1])
{
{
/* case 1: isrun, prev==cur */
block[blocklen++] = pix;
}
else
else
{
/* case 2: isrun, prev!=cur */
if (blocklen>1)
if (blocklen>1)
{
/* we have a run block to flush */
rleline[rlen++] = blocklen-1;
@ -1190,12 +1190,12 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
}
}
else
{
{
/* not a run */
if (pix == block[blocklen-1])
if (pix == block[blocklen-1])
{
/* case 3: non-run, prev==cur */
if (blocklen>1)
if (blocklen>1)
{
/* have a non-run block to flush */
rleline[rlen++] = (blocklen-1) | 0x80;
@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
/* start new run block with pix */
block[0] = pix;
blocklen = isrun = 1;
}
}
else
{
/* blocklen<=1 turn into a run */
@ -1212,17 +1212,17 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
block[blocklen++] = pix;
}
}
else
else
{
/* case 4: non-run, prev!=cur */
block[blocklen++] = pix;
}
}
/* max block length. flush */
if (blocklen == 128)
{
if (isrun)
if (isrun)
{
rleline[rlen++] = blocklen-1;
rleline[rlen++] = block[0];
@ -1258,7 +1258,7 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
/*
* PScolor_image - created postscript colorimage operator
* PScolor_image - created postscript colorimage operator
*
* spits out code that checks if the PostScript device in question
* knows about the 'colorimage' operator. If it doesn't, it defines
@ -1267,8 +1267,8 @@ PSrle_encode(unsigned char *scanline,
*
*/
static void
PScolor_image(void)
static void
PScolor_image(void)
{
static char *txt[] = {
@ -1318,21 +1318,21 @@ PScolor_image(void)
PSconst_out(txt);
}
/*
* PScolormap - write colormap
*
* spits out code for the colormap of the following image
* if !color, it spits out a mono-ized graymap
*
*
*/
static void
PScolormap(int color,
int nc,
int *rmap,
int *gmap,
int *bmap)
PScolormap(int color,
int nc,
int *rmap,
int *gmap,
int *bmap)
{
int i;
@ -1342,12 +1342,12 @@ PScolormap(int color,
/* load up the colormap */
PSprintf("currentfile cmap readhexstring\n");
for (i=0; i<nc; i++)
for (i=0; i<nc; i++)
{
if (color)
if (color)
PSprintf("%02x%02x%02x ", rmap[i]>>8,
gmap[i]>>8, bmap[i]>>8);
else
else
PSprintf("%02x ", MONO(rmap[i], gmap[i], bmap[i]));
if ((i%10) == 9)
PSprintf("\n");
@ -1359,10 +1359,10 @@ PScolormap(int color,
/*
* PSrle_cmapimage - define rlecmapimage operator
*
*
*/
static void
PSrle_cmapimage(int color)
PSrle_cmapimage(int color)
{
static char *txt[] = {
@ -1415,11 +1415,11 @@ PSrle_cmapimage(int color)
};
PSconst_out(txt);
if (color)
if (color)
{
PSconst_out(txt_color);
}
else
}
else
{
PSconst_out(txt_gray);
}
@ -1441,14 +1441,14 @@ PSwrite_bw(unsigned char *pic, int w, int h, int flipbw)
int i, j;
int err=0;
unsigned char outbyte, bitnum, bit;
outbyte = bitnum = 0;
for (i=0; i<h && err != EOF; i++) {
for (j=0; j<w && err != EOF; j++) {
bit = *(pic++);
outbyte = (outbyte<<1) | ((bit)&0x01);
bitnum++;
if (bitnum==8) {
if (flipbw)
outbyte = ~outbyte & 0xff;
@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ PSwrite_bw(unsigned char *pic, int w, int h, int flipbw)
}
}
err=PShex('\0', True); /* Flush the hex buffer if needed */
return err;
}
@ -1477,15 +1477,15 @@ PSwrite_bw(unsigned char *pic, int w, int h, int flipbw)
* rectangle is shown.
* If anchor is set, a black border is shown around the image.
* Positioning is not exactly that of Xmosaic's screen, but close enough.
*
*
*/
static void
static void
PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
{
ImageInfo *img = eptr->pic_data;
unsigned char *imgp = img->image_data;
int anchor = (eptr->anchorHRef != NULL);
int anchor = (eptr->anchorHRef != NULL);
int ncolors = img->num_colors;
int i, j;
int w = img->width;
@ -1506,7 +1506,7 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
PSmove_offset(eptr->y_offset);
if (anchor)
if (anchor)
{
/* draw an outline by drawing a slightly larger black square
* below the actual image
@ -1517,8 +1517,8 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
PSprintf("grestore\n");
extra = 4;
}
if (imgp == NULL)
if (imgp == NULL)
{
/* image was not available... do something instead
* draw an empty square for example
@ -1536,20 +1536,20 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
return;
}
/* this is a hack to see if the image is Black & White,
/* this is a hack to see if the image is Black & White,
* Greyscale or 8 bit color
* assume it's bw if it has only one or two colors, both some grey's
* assume it's greyscale if all the colors (>2) are grey
* Images with only one color do occur too.
*/
if ( ( (ncolors == 2)
if ( ( (ncolors == 2)
&& ( (Isgray(img,0) && Isgray(img,1))
|| (Is_bg(img,0) && Is_fg(img,1))
|| (Is_bg(img,0) && Is_fg(img,1))
|| (Is_fg(img,0) && Is_bg(img,1)) ))
|| ( (ncolors == 1)
&& (Isgray(img,0)
|| Is_bg(img,0)
|| Is_bg(img,0)
|| Is_fg(img,0))))
{
colortype = F_BWDITHER;
@ -1571,13 +1571,13 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
}
}
}
/* build a temporary dictionary */
PSprintf("20 dict begin\n\n");
/* define string to hold a scanline's worth of data */
PSprintf("/pix %d string def\n\n", slen);
/* position and scaling */
PSprintf("gsave currentpoint %d sub translate", h);
if (anchor)
@ -1585,45 +1585,45 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
else
PSprintf(" 0 2 translate");
PSprintf(" %d %d scale\n", w, h);
if (colortype == F_BWDITHER)
if (colortype == F_BWDITHER)
{
/* 1-bit dither code uses 'image' */
int flipbw = 0;
/* set if color#0 is 'white' */
if ((ncolors == 2 &&
MONO(img->reds[0], img->greens[0],img->blues[0]) >
MONO(img->reds[1], img->greens[1], img->blues[1])) ||
(ncolors == 1 &&
(ncolors == 1 &&
MONO(img->reds[0], img->greens[0],img->blues[0]) >
MONO(127, 127, 127) ))
{
flipbw=1;
flipbw=1;
}
/* dimensions of data */
PSprintf("%d %d %d\n", w, h, bits);
/* mapping matrix */
PSprintf("[%d 0 0 %d 0 %d]\n\n", w, -h, h);
PSprintf("{currentfile pix readhexstring pop}\n");
PSprintf("image\n");
/* write the actual image data */
err = PSwrite_bw(imgp, w, h, flipbw);
}
}
else
{
/* all other formats */
unsigned char *rleline = (unsigned char *) NULL;
int rlen;
/* if we're using color, make sure 'colorimage' is defined */
if (colorps)
PScolor_image();
PScolormap(colorps, ncolors, img->reds, img->greens, img->blues);
PSrle_cmapimage(colorps);
@ -1632,9 +1632,9 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
/* mapping matrix */
PSprintf("[%d 0 0 %d 0 %d]\n", w, -h, h);
PSprintf("rlecmapimage\n");
rleline = (unsigned char *) malloc(w * 2);
if (!rleline)
if (!rleline)
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
return;
}
for (i=0; i<h && err != EOF; i++)
for (i=0; i<h && err != EOF; i++)
{
rlen = PSrle_encode(imgp, rleline, w);
imgp += w;
@ -1655,14 +1655,14 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
}
free(rleline);
}
/* stop using temporary dictionary */
PSprintf("end\n");
PSprintf("grestore\n");
/* move currentpoint just right of image */
PSprintf("%d 0 R\n", w + extra);
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
PSprintf("%d 0 R\n", w + extra);
if (HTML_Print_Footers && has_footnote(eptr))
{
PSmove_offset(0);
PSfootnote(eptr->anchorHRef, 2.0);
@ -1701,11 +1701,11 @@ PSimage(HTMLWidget hw, struct ele_rec *eptr, int fontfamily)
* 2: new century schoolbook
* 3: lucida
*/
String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
struct ele_rec *elist,
struct ele_rec *startp,
struct ele_rec *endp,
int start_pos,
int start_pos,
int end_pos,
int space_width,
int lmargin,
@ -1722,11 +1722,11 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
struct ele_rec *end;
struct ele_rec *last;
struct ele_rec *tmpptr;
unsigned long fg_pixel, bg_pixel;
unsigned long fg_pixel, bg_pixel;
int footnotes_this_page = 0;
int footnotes_this_line;
int reserved_space;
if (startp == NULL)
return(NULL);
@ -1735,17 +1735,17 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
* Get the foreground and background colors so we can check later
* for black&white documents
*/
XtVaGetValues (hw->html.view,
XtVaGetValues (hw->html.view,
#ifdef MOTIF
XtNforeground, &fg_pixel,
#endif
XtNbackground, &bg_pixel,
XtNbackground, &bg_pixel,
NULL);
#ifndef MOTIF
XtVaGetValues ((Widget)hw,
XtVaGetValues ((Widget)hw,
XtNforeground, &fg_pixel,
NULL);
#endif
#endif
fg_color.pixel = fg_pixel;
bg_color.pixel = bg_pixel;
XQueryColor(XtDisplay(hw->html.view),
@ -1760,12 +1760,12 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
DefaultColormap(XtDisplay(hw->html.view),
DefaultScreen(XtDisplay(hw->html.view)))),
&bg_color);
/* this piece of code is needed if the user selects a portion
* of the document with the mouse.
* I think it will never be used, but I left it in anyway. F.
*/
if (SwapElements(startp, endp, start_pos, end_pos))
if (SwapElements(startp, endp, start_pos, end_pos))
{
start = endp;
end = startp;
@ -1778,7 +1778,7 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
start = startp;
end = endp;
}
/* Setup page size according to user preference. */
if (HTML_Print_Paper_Size_A4)
@ -1787,10 +1787,10 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
page_dimens = us_letter_page_dimens;
page_dimens.text_height = ( page_dimens.page_height
- page_dimens.top_margin
- page_dimens.top_margin
- page_dimens.bot_margin);
page_dimens.text_width = ( page_dimens.page_width
- page_dimens.left_margin
- page_dimens.left_margin
- page_dimens.right_margin);
/* Calculate the number of Postscript points per pixel of current
@ -1810,10 +1810,10 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
* wide), but I guess that the hw->html.doc_width includes some
* left and right margins, so it seems to work in practice.
*/
if (pagewidth > page_dimens.text_width)
if (pagewidth > page_dimens.text_width)
Points_Pixel = Points_Pixel * page_dimens.text_width / pagewidth;
Pixels_Page = (int) (page_dimens.text_height / Points_Pixel);
Pixels_Page = (int) (page_dimens.text_height / Points_Pixel);
PSinit();
PSheader(hw->html.title, fontfamily, url, time_str);
PSnewpage();
@ -1821,14 +1821,14 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
last = start;
eptr = start;
while ((eptr != NULL) && (eptr != end))
while ((eptr != NULL) && (eptr != end))
{
/* Skip the special internal text added for multi-page
* documents.
*/
if (eptr->internal == True)
if (eptr->internal == True)
{
if (eptr->type == E_LINEFEED)
if (eptr->type == E_LINEFEED)
{
PS_page_offset += eptr->line_height;
}
@ -1837,14 +1837,14 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
}
/* check if this is a newline */
if (line != eptr->line_number)
if (line != eptr->line_number)
{
/* calculate max height */
height = 0;
footnotes_this_line = 0;
line = eptr->line_number;
tmpptr = eptr;
while (tmpptr != NULL && tmpptr->line_number == line)
while (tmpptr != NULL && tmpptr->line_number == line)
{
if (tmpptr->line_height > height)
height = tmpptr->line_height;
@ -1858,18 +1858,18 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
xpos = 0;
/* check if line fits completly on page */
reserved_space = 0;
if (footnotes_this_page || footnotes_this_line)
if (footnotes_this_page || footnotes_this_line)
{
reserved_space = ( ( footnote_space
+ ( footnote_ptsize
* ( footnotes_this_page
* ( footnotes_this_page
+ footnotes_this_line)))
/ Points_Pixel);
}
if (ypos + height + reserved_space > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
if (ypos + height + reserved_space > PS_start_y + Pixels_Page)
{
PS_start_y = ypos;
PSshowpage();
@ -1879,24 +1879,24 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
footnotes_this_page += footnotes_this_line;
PSmoveto( xpos, ypos);
}
switch (eptr->type)
switch (eptr->type)
{
case E_TEXT:
PStext(hw, eptr, fontfamily,
(String)((eptr == start) ? (eptr->edata + start_pos) : eptr->edata));
break;
case E_BULLET:
case E_BULLET:
PSbullet(hw, eptr, fontfamily);
break;
case E_IMAGE:
case E_IMAGE:
PSimage(hw, eptr, fontfamily);
break;
case E_LINEFEED:
case E_LINEFEED:
break;
case E_HRULE:
@ -1915,7 +1915,7 @@ String ParseTextToPSString(HTMLWidget hw,
last = eptr;
eptr = eptr->next;
}
PSshowpage();
PStrailer();

212
libhtmlw/HTML.c
View File

@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ static XtResource resources[] =
{ WbNtitleText,
WbCTitleText, XtRString, sizeof (char *),
XtOffset (HTMLWidget, html.title),
XtRString, (char *) NULL
XtRString, (char *) NULL
},
/*
@ -593,21 +593,21 @@ static XtResource resources[] =
},
/* end amb */
{ WbNpreviouslyVisitedTestFunction,
WbCPreviouslyVisitedTestFunction, XtRPointer,
WbCPreviouslyVisitedTestFunction, XtRPointer,
sizeof (XtPointer),
XtOffset (HTMLWidget, html.previously_visited_test),
XtRImmediate, (caddr_t) NULL
},
{ WbNresolveImageFunction,
WbCResolveImageFunction, XtRPointer,
WbCResolveImageFunction, XtRPointer,
sizeof (XtPointer),
XtOffset (HTMLWidget, html.resolveImage),
XtRImmediate, (caddr_t) NULL
},
{ WbNresolveDelayedImage,
WbCResolveDelayedImage, XtRPointer,
WbCResolveDelayedImage, XtRPointer,
sizeof (XtPointer),
XtOffset (HTMLWidget, html.resolveDelayedImage),
XtRImmediate, (caddr_t) NULL
@ -615,12 +615,12 @@ static XtResource resources[] =
{
WbNpointerMotionCallback,
WbCPointerMotionCallback, XtRPointer,
WbCPointerMotionCallback, XtRPointer,
sizeof (XtPointer),
XtOffset (HTMLWidget, html.pointer_motion_callback),
XtRImmediate, (caddr_t) NULL
},
};
@ -674,12 +674,12 @@ HTMLClassRec htmlClassRec = {
},
{ /* constraint_class fields */
NULL, /* resource list */
0, /* num resources */
0, /* constraint size */
NULL, /* init proc */
NULL, /* destroy proc */
NULL, /* set values proc */
NULL, /* resource list */
0, /* num resources */
0, /* constraint size */
NULL, /* init proc */
NULL, /* destroy proc */
NULL, /* set values proc */
NULL, /* extension */
},
@ -691,13 +691,13 @@ HTMLClassRec htmlClassRec = {
NULL, /* syn_cont_resources */
0, /* num_syn_cont_resources */
XmInheritParentProcess, /* parent_process */
NULL, /* extension */
NULL, /* extension */
},
#endif /* MOTIF */
{ /* html_class fields */
{ /* html_class fields */
0 /* none */
}
}
};
@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ extern int hacked_y;
WidgetClass htmlWidgetClass = (WidgetClass)&htmlClassRec;
static Cursor in_anchor_cursor = (Cursor)NULL;
static char *mailToKludgeSubject = NULL;
static char *mailToKludgeSubject = NULL;
static char *mailToKludgeURL = NULL;
char *cattrs[]={"text","bgcolor","alink","vlink","link",NULL};
@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ hw_do_color(Widget w, char *att, char *cname)
}
cmap = hw->core.colormap;
val=cname;
if (*val!='#') {
if (XAllocNamedColor(XtDisplay(w),cmap,cname,&col,&ecol)) {
@ -868,22 +868,22 @@ hw_do_color(Widget w, char *att, char *cname)
t[0]=val[4];
t[1]=val[5];
sscanf(t,"%x",&b);
col.red = ((unsigned) r) << 8;
col.green = ((unsigned) g) << 8;
col.blue = ((unsigned) b) << 8;
col.flags = DoRed | DoGreen | DoBlue;
if (!XAllocColor(XtDisplay(w),cmap,&col)) {
return -1;
}
} else {
return -1;
}
}
if (!my_strcasecmp(att,"text")) {
hw->manager.foreground = col.pixel;
}
@ -891,11 +891,11 @@ hw_do_color(Widget w, char *att, char *cname)
/* calculate shadow colors */
calc = XmGetColorCalculation();
calc(&col, &fg, &sel, &ts, &bs);
if (XAllocColor(XtDisplay(w),cmap,&ts))
if (XAllocColor(XtDisplay(w),cmap,&ts))
hw->manager.top_shadow_color = ts.pixel;
if (XAllocColor(XtDisplay(w),cmap,&bs))
if (XAllocColor(XtDisplay(w),cmap,&bs))
hw->manager.bottom_shadow_color = bs.pixel;
hw->core.background_pixel = col.pixel;
hw->html.view->core.background_pixel = col.pixel ;
hw->html.activeAnchor_bg = col.pixel;
@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ hw_do_color(Widget w, char *att, char *cname)
if (!my_strcasecmp(att,"alink")) {
hw->html.activeAnchor_fg = col.pixel;
}
return -1;
}
@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ XGCValues values;
#define MAX_Y_EXP_DIFF 10 /*pixels between exposes to make one expose area*/
/*
* Process an expose event in the View (or drawing area). This
* Process an expose event in the View (or drawing area). This
* Can be a regular expose event, or perhaps a GraphicsExpose Event.
*/
static void
@ -1100,7 +1100,7 @@ goto single_expose;
x1 = nx + nwidth;
changed=1;
}
if (y1 < (ny + nheight)) {
y1 = ny + nheight;
changed=1;
@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ ScrollWidgets(hw)
((y+wptr->height)>0 &&
(y+wptr->height)<=hw->html.view_height)) &&
((x>0 &&
x<=hw->html.view_width) ||
x<=hw->html.view_width) ||
((x+wptr->width)>0 &&
(x+wptr->width)<=hw->html.view_width))) {
wptr->seeable=1;
@ -1271,7 +1271,7 @@ ScrollToPos(w, hw, value)
if (value > hw->html.scroll_y)
{
int dy;
dy = value - hw->html.scroll_y;
if (dy > hw->html.view_height)
{
@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ ScrollToPos(w, hw, value)
else if (value < hw->html.scroll_y)
{
int dy;
dy = hw->html.scroll_y - value;
if (dy > hw->html.view_height)
{
@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ ScrollToPos(w, hw, value)
ViewRedisplay(hw,
0, 0,
hw->html.view_width, dy);
}
}
}
@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ ScrollToPos(w, hw, value)
if (value > hw->html.scroll_x)
{
int dx;
dx = value - hw->html.scroll_x;
if (dx > hw->html.view_width)
{
@ -1407,7 +1407,7 @@ ScrollToPos(w, hw, value)
else if (value < hw->html.scroll_x)
{
int dx;
dx = hw->html.scroll_x - value;
if (dx > hw->html.view_width)
{
@ -1484,7 +1484,7 @@ ScrollMove(w, client_data, call_data)
currentLength = hw->html.view_height;
value = hw->html.scroll_y + scrollDir * currentLength;
}
else
else
{
totalLength = hw->html.doc_width;
currentLength = hw->html.view_width;
@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ ScrollMove(w, client_data, call_data)
if (value > (int)totalLength) value = totalLength;
if (value < 0) value = 0;
setScrollBar(w, value, totalLength, currentLength);
ScrollToPos(w, hw, value);
#endif
@ -1508,14 +1508,14 @@ JumpMove(w, client_data, call_data)
caddr_t call_data;
{
HTMLWidget hw = (HTMLWidget)client_data;
int value = (int)(*(float *)call_data *
(w == hw->html.vbar ?
hw->html.doc_height :
int value = (int)(*(float *)call_data *
(w == hw->html.vbar ?
hw->html.doc_height :
hw->html.doc_width));
ScrollToPos(w, hw, value);
}
#endif
/*
* Create the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.
@ -1544,10 +1544,10 @@ CreateScrollbars(
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XxNwidth, 10); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XxNheight, 10); argcnt++;
hw->html.view = XtCreateWidget("View",
#ifdef MOTIF
#ifdef MOTIF
xmDrawingAreaWidgetClass,
#else
drawingAreaWidgetClass,
drawingAreaWidgetClass,
#endif
(Widget)hw, arg, argcnt);
XtManageChild(hw->html.view);
@ -1728,7 +1728,7 @@ ConfigScrollBars(
*/
#ifdef MOTIF
vx = hw->manager.shadow_thickness;
vy = hw->manager.shadow_thickness;
vy = hw->manager.shadow_thickness;
#else
vx = vy = 0;
#endif
@ -1741,7 +1741,7 @@ ConfigScrollBars(
vy += HbarHeight(hw);
}
XtMoveWidget(hw->html.view, vx, vy);
XtResizeWidget(hw->html.view, hw->html.view_width,
XtResizeWidget(hw->html.view, hw->html.view_width,
hw->html.view_height,
hw->html.view->core.border_width);
/*
@ -1757,7 +1757,7 @@ ConfigScrollBars(
* the viewing area
*/
XtResizeWidget(hw->html.vbar, hw->html.vbar->core.width,
hw->html.view_height + (2 *
hw->html.view_height + (2 *
#ifdef MOTIF
hw->manager.shadow_thickness
#else
@ -1779,16 +1779,16 @@ ConfigScrollBars(
{
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
fprintf (stderr, "view_height %d, doc_height %d\n",
fprintf (stderr, "view_height %d, doc_height %d\n",
hw->html.view_height, hw->html.doc_height);
}
#endif
#ifdef NOT_RIGHT
/* Eric -- your previous equation wasn't doing it.
This isn't either... */
ss =
ss =
(int)((float)hw->html.view_height *
((float)hw->html.view_height /
((float)hw->html.view_height /
(float)(hw->html.doc_height - (int)hw->html.view_height)));
if (ss > hw->html.view_height)
{
@ -1855,14 +1855,14 @@ ConfigScrollBars(
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNvalue, hw->html.scroll_y); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNsliderSize, ss); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNincrement, DEFAULT_INCREMENT); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNpageIncrement,
hw->html.view_height > DEFAULT_INCREMENT ?
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNpageIncrement,
hw->html.view_height > DEFAULT_INCREMENT ?
hw->html.view_height - DEFAULT_INCREMENT : 1); argcnt++;
XtSetValues(hw->html.vbar, arg, argcnt);
#else
setScrollBar(hw->html.vbar,
setScrollBar(hw->html.vbar,
hw->html.scroll_y,
hw->html.doc_height,
hw->html.doc_height,
hw->html.view_height);
#endif /* MOTIF */
@ -1970,14 +1970,14 @@ ConfigScrollBars(
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNvalue, hw->html.scroll_x); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNsliderSize, ss); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNincrement, DEFAULT_INCREMENT); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNpageIncrement,
hw->html.view_width > DEFAULT_INCREMENT ?
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNpageIncrement,
hw->html.view_width > DEFAULT_INCREMENT ?
hw->html.view_width - DEFAULT_INCREMENT : 1); argcnt++;
XtSetValues(hw->html.hbar, arg, argcnt);
#else
setScrollBar(hw->html.hbar,
setScrollBar(hw->html.hbar,
hw->html.scroll_x,
hw->html.doc_width,
hw->html.doc_width,
hw->html.view_width);
#endif /* MOTIF */
}
@ -2026,7 +2026,7 @@ ReformatWindow(
if (hw->core.width <= swidth)
{
hw->core.width = swidth + 10;
}
}
new_width = hw->core.width - swidth - (2 * st);
temp = FormatAll(hw, &new_width);
@ -2216,19 +2216,19 @@ Initialize(
if (new->core.width == 0)
{
new->core.width = new->html.margin_width << 1 ;
}
}
if (new->core.width == 0)
{
new->core.width = 10 ;
}
}
if (new->core.height == 0)
{
new->core.height = new->html.margin_height << 1 ;
}
}
if (new->core.height == 0)
{
new->core.height = 10 ;
}
}
/*
* Make sure the underline numbers are within bounds.
@ -2236,22 +2236,22 @@ Initialize(
if (new->html.num_anchor_underlines < 0)
{
new->html.num_anchor_underlines = 0;
}
}
if (new->html.num_anchor_underlines > MAX_UNDERLINES)
{
new->html.num_anchor_underlines = MAX_UNDERLINES;
}
}
if (new->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines < 0)
{
new->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines = 0;
}
}
if (new->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines > MAX_UNDERLINES)
{
new->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines = MAX_UNDERLINES;
}
}
/*
* Parse the raw text with the HTML parser. And set the formatted
* Parse the raw text with the HTML parser. And set the formatted
* element list to NULL.
*/
new->html.html_objects = HTMLParse(NULL, request->html.raw_text,new);
@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ ViewClearAndRefresh(
#endif
{
int r,b;
/*
* Only refresh if we have a window already.
* (if we have a GC we have a window)
@ -2482,7 +2482,7 @@ ViewClearAndRefresh(
hw->manager.top_shadow_color ? 0 : 1;
hw->manager.bottom_shadow_color =
hw->manager.bottom_shadow_color ? 0 : 1;
XtVaSetValues(hw->html.view,
XmNbackground, hw->core.background_pixel,
XmNtopShadowColor, r,
@ -2494,7 +2494,7 @@ ViewClearAndRefresh(
XmNtopShadowColor, r,
XmNbottomShadowColor, b,
NULL);
XClearArea(XtDisplay(hw), XtWindow(hw->html.view),
0, 0, 0, 0, False);
ViewRedisplay(hw, 0, 0,
@ -2612,7 +2612,7 @@ Resize(
if (hw->core.width <= swidth)
{
hw->core.width = swidth + 10 ;
}
}
if (hw->html.use_vbar == True)
{
@ -3989,7 +3989,7 @@ TrackMotion(w, event, params, num_params)
}
eptr = LocateElement(hw, x, y, &epos);
/* We're hitting a new anchor if eptr exists and
eptr != cached tracked element and anchorHRef != NULL. */
if (eptr != NULL && eptr != hw->html.cached_tracked_ele &&
@ -4002,7 +4002,7 @@ TrackMotion(w, event, params, num_params)
}
/* We're leaving an anchor if eptr exists and
a cached ele exists and we're not entering a new anchor. */
else if (eptr != NULL && hw->html.cached_tracked_ele != NULL &&
else if (eptr != NULL && hw->html.cached_tracked_ele != NULL &&
eptr->anchorHRef == NULL)
{
LEAVING_ANCHOR (hw);
@ -4014,13 +4014,13 @@ TrackMotion(w, event, params, num_params)
/* We're adding a subject attribute to the anchor tag
/* We're adding a subject attribute to the anchor tag
of course this subject attribute is dependent on that the HREF attribute
is set to a mailto URL. I think this is a kludge. libwww is not set up
for this, so to minimize modifications, this routine exists for
for this, so to minimize modifications, this routine exists for
libwww:HTSendMaitlTo() to call to get the subject for the mailto URL.
The static globals mailToKludgeSubject, etc are set in HTMLInput when
an anchor is clicked.
an anchor is clicked.
*/
GetMailtoKludgeInfo(url,subject)
char **url;
@ -4051,7 +4051,7 @@ _HTMLInput(
String *params, /* unused */
Cardinal *num_params) /* unused */
#endif
{
{
HTMLWidget hw = (HTMLWidget)XtParent(w);
struct ele_rec *eptr;
WbAnchorCallbackData cbdata;
@ -4353,16 +4353,16 @@ _HTMLpwdInput(
char *keySymString;
char *star = "*";
int length, passwdLength, i, insertPos, maxLength;
Boolean stringInPlace;
Boolean stringInPlace;
if (event->type == KeyPress)
{
HTMLWidget hw = (HTMLWidget)XtParent(w);
WidgetInfo *wptr;
if (XtClass((Widget)hw) != htmlWidgetClass)
if (XtClass((Widget)hw) != htmlWidgetClass)
return; /* it was not for us */
/*
* find the structure for this widget
*/
@ -4378,7 +4378,7 @@ _HTMLpwdInput(
passwdLength = wptr->password ? strlen(wptr->password) : 0;
length = XLookupString((XKeyEvent *)event,
length = XLookupString((XKeyEvent *)event,
buffer, 50, &ks, NULL);
keySymString = XKeysymToString(ks);
XtVaGetValues(w,
@ -4404,7 +4404,7 @@ _HTMLpwdInput(
if ((!strcmp("BackSpace",keySymString))
|| (!strcmp("Backspace",keySymString))
|| (!strcmp("Delete",keySymString)) )
|| (!strcmp("Delete",keySymString)) )
{
insertPos --;
@ -4421,7 +4421,7 @@ _HTMLpwdInput(
}
#endif
XtCallActionProc(w,
XtCallActionProc(w,
insertPos>-1 ? "delete-previous-character" :
"delete-next-character",
event, NULL,0);
@ -4440,15 +4440,15 @@ _HTMLpwdInput(
if (passwdLength < maxLength)
{
char *pwd = wptr->password =
(char *)realloc(wptr->password,
(char *)realloc(wptr->password,
sizeof(char)*(passwdLength+2));
for (i=passwdLength+1; i>insertPos; i--)
pwd[i] = pwd[i-1];
pwd[insertPos] = buffer[0];
}
}
else
else
{
if (wptr->password == NULL)
wptr->password = (char *)malloc(sizeof(char)*2);
@ -4508,19 +4508,19 @@ SetValues(
if (request->html.num_anchor_underlines < 0)
{
new->html.num_anchor_underlines = 0;
}
}
if (request->html.num_anchor_underlines > MAX_UNDERLINES)
{
new->html.num_anchor_underlines = MAX_UNDERLINES;
}
}
if (request->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines < 0)
{
new->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines = 0;
}
}
if (request->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines > MAX_UNDERLINES)
{
new->html.num_visitedAnchor_underlines = MAX_UNDERLINES;
}
}
/*reformatted = 0;*/
if ((request->html.raw_text != current->html.raw_text)||
@ -4778,7 +4778,7 @@ ConvertSelection(w, selection, target, type, value, length, format)
bcopy((char*)std_targets, (char*)targetP,
sizeof(Atom)*std_length);
*/
memcpy((char*)targetP, (char*)std_targets,
memcpy((char*)targetP, (char*)std_targets,
sizeof(Atom)*std_length);
XtFree((char*)std_targets);
*type = XA_ATOM;
@ -5209,7 +5209,7 @@ HTMLGotoId(Widget w, int element_id, int correction)
#else
ScrollToPos(hw->html.vbar, hw, newy);
ScrollToPos(hw->html.hbar, hw, 0);
setScrollBar(hw->html.vbar, newy,
setScrollBar(hw->html.vbar, newy,
hw->html.doc_height,
hw->html.view_height);
#endif
@ -6104,7 +6104,7 @@ HTMLSetText(Widget w, char *text, char *header_text, char *footer_text, int elem
InitBody((Widget)hw);
/* restore default colors as required */
if(hw->manager.foreground != hw->html.foreground_SAVE) {
XFreeColors(XtDisplay(hw),hw->core.colormap,
&hw->manager.foreground,1,0);
@ -6115,12 +6115,12 @@ HTMLSetText(Widget w, char *text, char *header_text, char *footer_text, int elem
&hw->html.anchor_fg,1,0);
hw->html.anchor_fg = hw->html.anchor_fg_SAVE;
}
if(hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg != hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg_SAVE){
if(hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg != hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg_SAVE){
XFreeColors(XtDisplay(hw),hw->core.colormap,
&hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg,1,0);
hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg = hw->html.visitedAnchor_fg_SAVE;
}
if(hw->html.activeAnchor_fg != hw->html.activeAnchor_fg_SAVE){
if(hw->html.activeAnchor_fg != hw->html.activeAnchor_fg_SAVE){
XFreeColors(XtDisplay(hw),hw->core.colormap,
&hw->html.activeAnchor_fg,1,0);
hw->html.activeAnchor_fg = hw->html.activeAnchor_fg_SAVE;
@ -6129,13 +6129,13 @@ HTMLSetText(Widget w, char *text, char *header_text, char *footer_text, int elem
XFreeColors(XtDisplay(hw),hw->core.colormap,
&hw->manager.top_shadow_color,1,0);
hw->manager.top_shadow_color = hw->html.top_color_SAVE;
}
}
if(hw->html.bottom_color_SAVE != hw->manager.bottom_shadow_color){
XFreeColors(XtDisplay(hw),hw->core.colormap,
&hw->manager.bottom_shadow_color,1,0);
hw->manager.bottom_shadow_color = hw->html.bottom_color_SAVE;
}
if(hw->core.background_pixel != hw->html.background_SAVE){
}
if(hw->core.background_pixel != hw->html.background_SAVE){
XFreeColors(XtDisplay(hw),hw->core.colormap,
&hw->core.background_pixel,1,0);
hw->html.activeAnchor_bg = hw->html.activeAnchor_bg_SAVE;
@ -6277,7 +6277,7 @@ HTMLSetText(Widget w, char *text, char *header_text, char *footer_text, int elem
/*
* Display the new text
*/
ViewClearAndRefresh(hw);
ViewClearAndRefresh(hw);
/*
* Clear any previous selection
@ -6897,7 +6897,7 @@ HTMLSearchText (Widget w, char *pattern, ElementRef *m_start, ElementRef *m_end,
}
/* the following is a hack to make the html widget not acknowledge
any button events while it is busy so that the rbm will not grab the
any button events while it is busy so that the rbm will not grab the
server. Hopefully this will be removed when the application is re-written
to pay more attention to the event loop - TPR 2/9/96 */
@ -6913,8 +6913,8 @@ void HTMLSetAppInsensitive(Widget hw)
height = hw->core.height;
/* ???? Should this be cast to a HTMLWidget and XtWindow changed to html.view*/
sens_win = XCreateWindow(XtDisplay((Widget) hw), XtWindow(hw), x,
y, width, height, 0,CopyFromParent, InputOnly,
sens_win = XCreateWindow(XtDisplay((Widget) hw), XtWindow(hw), x,
y, width, height, 0,CopyFromParent, InputOnly,
CopyFromParent, 0, NULL);
XMapRaised(XtDisplay((Widget) hw), sens_win);
}
@ -6931,7 +6931,7 @@ void HTMLSetAppSensitive(Widget hw)
*
* Fixed up and rewritten by SWP...
*/
void HTMLDrawBackgroundImage(Widget wid, int x, int y, int width,
void HTMLDrawBackgroundImage(Widget wid, int x, int y, int width,
int height) {
int w_whole=0, h_whole=0,
@ -6966,7 +6966,7 @@ HTMLWidget hw = (HTMLWidget) wid;
* Figure out the height of the area to draw.
* If there is a height offset, index the number of height tiles.
*/
w_start_offset = (x+hw->html.scroll_x) % hw->html.bg_width;
w_start_offset = (x+hw->html.scroll_x) % hw->html.bg_width;
if (w_start_offset || (!w_start_offset && width<hw->html.bg_width)) {
w_whole++;
start_width=hw->html.bg_width-w_start_offset;
@ -7129,7 +7129,7 @@ void HTMLSetFocusPolicy(Widget w, int to)
else
{
XtVaSetValues(shell, XmNkeyboardFocusPolicy, XmEXPLICIT, NULL);
/* when we have preference dialog this will have to
/* when we have preference dialog this will have to
undo all the translations that are currently installed
in the widgets and set the keyboardFocus policy of the
toplevel shell to pointer */

10
libhtmlw/HTML.h
View File

@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ extern int HTMLSearchText (Widget w, char *pattern,
extern void HTMLSetAppInsensitive(Widget hw);
extern void HTMLSetAppSensitive(Widget hw);
extern void HTMLTraverseTabGroups();
extern void HTMLDrawBackgroundImage(Widget w, int x, int y, int width,
extern void HTMLDrawBackgroundImage(Widget w, int x, int y, int width,
int height);
extern void HTMLSetFocusPolicy(Widget w, int to);
#endif /* _NO_PROTO */
@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ typedef struct table_field {
int colWidth; /* uniform width for all element in this col*/
int rowHeight; /* uniform hieght for all element in the row*/
Boolean header; /* is this field created with <TH> or <TD> */
/* contents */
FieldType type;
char *text;
@ -429,9 +429,9 @@ struct delay_rec {
#define M_TABLE_HEADER 47
#define M_TABLE_ROW 48
#define M_TABLE_DATA 49
#define M_SUP 50
#define M_SUB 51
#define M_FIGURE 52
#define M_SUP 50
#define M_SUB 51
#define M_FIGURE 52
#define M_COMMENT 53
#define M_DOC_HEAD 54 /* amb 2 */
#define M_UNDERLINED 55 /* amb 2 */

8
libhtmlw/HTMLP.h
View File

@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ typedef struct _HTMLPart
Pixmap bgmap_SAVE;
Pixmap bgclip_SAVE;
int bg_height;
int bg_width;
int bg_width;
Pixel foreground_SAVE;
Pixel anchor_fg_SAVE;
@ -152,9 +152,9 @@ typedef struct _HTMLPart
Pixel activeAnchor_fg_SAVE;
Pixel activeAnchor_bg_SAVE;
Pixel top_color_SAVE;
Pixel bottom_color_SAVE;
Pixel bottom_color_SAVE;
Pixel background_SAVE;
int num_anchor_underlines;
int num_visitedAnchor_underlines;
Boolean dashed_anchor_lines;
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ typedef struct _HTMLPart
XtPointer previously_visited_test;
XtPointer resolveImage;
XtPointer resolveDelayedImage;
XtPointer pointer_motion_callback;
/* PRIVATE */

52
libhtmlw/HTMLformat.c
View File

@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ CreateElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject = ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ CreateElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->underline_number = 0;
/*
/*
if (eptr->edata != NULL)
{
free((char *)eptr->edata);
@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ CreateElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject= ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ CreateElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject = ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ SetElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject= ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ SetElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -1307,7 +1307,7 @@ SetElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject = ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -1466,7 +1466,7 @@ SetElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject= ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -1527,7 +1527,7 @@ SetElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
eptr->anchorSubject= ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_SUBJECT);
if (!eptr->anchorSubject) {
eptr->anchorSubject =
eptr->anchorSubject =
ParseMarkTag(AnchorText,
MT_ANCHOR, AT_TITLE);
}
@ -1591,7 +1591,7 @@ SetElement(hw, type, fp, x, y, edata, w, h, bw)
/*
* Change our drawing font
* Change our drawing font
*/
void
NewFont(fp)
@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ PreformatPlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
SetElement(hw, E_TEXT, currentFont,
line_x, *y, line, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
/*
* Save width here to avoid an
* Save width here to avoid an
* XTextExtents call later.
*/
Current->width = *x - line_x + 1;
@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@ PreformatPlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
SetElement(hw, E_TEXT, currentFont,
line_x, *y, line, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
/*
* Save width here to avoid an
* Save width here to avoid an
* XTextExtents call later.
*/
Current->width = *x - line_x + 1;
@ -2498,7 +2498,7 @@ FormatPlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
SetElement(hw, E_TEXT, currentFont,
line_x, *y, line, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
/*
* Save width here to avoid an
* Save width here to avoid an
* XTextExtents call later.
*/
Current->width = *x - line_x + 1;
@ -2651,7 +2651,7 @@ FormatPlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
SetElement(hw, E_TEXT, currentFont,
line_x, *y, line, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
/*
* Save width here to avoid an
* Save width here to avoid an
* XTextExtents call later.
*/
Current->width = *x - line_x + 1;
@ -2679,7 +2679,7 @@ FormatPlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
SetElement(hw, E_TEXT, currentFont,
line_x, *y, line, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
/*
* Save width here to avoid an
* Save width here to avoid an
* XTextExtents call later.
*/
Current->width = *x - line_x + 1;
@ -2711,8 +2711,8 @@ int extra;
extra = 10;
LineFeed(hw, x, y);
SetElement(hw, E_TABLE, currentFont, *x, *y, (char *) mptr, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
LineFeed(hw, x, y);
SetElement(hw, E_TABLE, currentFont, *x, *y, (char *) mptr, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
if (!Current->table_data) {
/* no table */
return 0;
@ -2724,7 +2724,7 @@ int extra;
BaseLine = Current->table_data->height;
*x += Current->width + 1;
LineFeed(hw, x, y);
LineFeed(hw, x, y);
}
/*
@ -2769,7 +2769,7 @@ ImagePlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
SetElement(hw, E_TEXT, currentFont,
*x, *y, tptr, NULL, NULL, IMAGE_DEFAULT_BORDER);
/*
* Save width here to avoid an
* Save width here to avoid an
* XTextExtents call later.
*/
Current->width = all.width;
@ -2877,7 +2877,7 @@ ImagePlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
* Yank out the name field, and stick it in text.
* We may use this for ALT to at some later date.
*/
if (Current->pic_data != NULL)
if (Current->pic_data != NULL)
{
tptr = ParseMarkTag(mptr->start, MT_IMAGE, "NAME");
/*temp******/
@ -2895,7 +2895,7 @@ ImagePlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
* change the size, or anchor status of the image, thus we MUST
* doit before we muck with the Baseline and stuff.
*/
if (Current->pic_data != NULL)
if (Current->pic_data != NULL)
{
/*
* Handle the USEMAP attribute of IMG tags. This is used for
@ -2949,7 +2949,7 @@ ImagePlace(hw, mptr, x, y, width)
*/
tptr = ParseMarkTag(mptr->start, MT_IMAGE, "ALIGN");
/*temp******/
if (!tptr)
if (!tptr)
{
tptr = ParseMarkTag(mptr->start, MT_FIGURE, "ALIGN");
}
@ -4865,7 +4865,7 @@ FormatChunk(hw, x, y)
* Format all objects
*/
mptr = hw->html.html_objects;
Last = NULL;
Last = NULL;
while (mptr != NULL)
{
TriggerMarkChanges(hw, &mptr, x, y);
@ -5781,7 +5781,7 @@ XGCValues values;
eptr->pic_data, 0);
if (eptr->pic_data->transparent &&
eptr->pic_data->clip==None) {
eptr->pic_data->clip =
eptr->pic_data->clip =
XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData
(XtDisplay(hw),
XtWindow(hw->html.view),
@ -5881,7 +5881,7 @@ XGCValues values;
values.clip_x_origin=x+extra;
values.clip_y_origin=y+extra;
valuemask=GCClipMask|GCClipXOrigin|GCClipYOrigin;
XChangeGC(XtDisplay(hw),
XChangeGC(XtDisplay(hw),
hw->html.drawGC,
valuemask, &values);
@ -6004,7 +6004,7 @@ PlaceLine(hw, line)
break;
case E_LINEFEED:
if(!hw->html.bg_image)
LinefeedRefresh(hw, eptr);
LinefeedRefresh(hw, eptr);
break;
case E_IMAGE:
ImageRefresh(hw, eptr);

10
libhtmlw/HTMLimages.c
View File

@ -465,20 +465,20 @@ MakeImage(dsp, data, width, height, depth, img_info, clip)
bit_data = (unsigned char *)malloc(width * height * 2);
bitp = bit_data;
datap = data;
theVisual = DefaultVisual(dsp, DefaultScreen(dsp));
rshift = 15 - highbit(theVisual->red_mask);
gshift = 15 - highbit(theVisual->green_mask);
bshift = 15 - highbit(theVisual->blue_mask);
bmap_order = BitmapBitOrder(dsp);
for (w = (width * height); w > 0; w--)
{
temp = (((img_info->reds[(int)*datap] >> rshift) &
temp = (((img_info->reds[(int)*datap] >> rshift) &
theVisual->red_mask) |
((img_info->greens[(int)*datap] >> gshift) &
((img_info->greens[(int)*datap] >> gshift) &
theVisual->green_mask) |
((img_info->blues[(int)*datap] >> bshift) &
((img_info->blues[(int)*datap] >> bshift) &
theVisual->blue_mask));
if (bmap_order == MSBFirst)
{

26
libhtmlw/HTMLjot.c
View File

@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ ClearJot(hw, w, width, height)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return;
}
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ ClearJot(hw, w, width, height)
hw->html.drawGC,
0, 0, jptr->width, jptr->height);
}
FreeStrokes(jptr->strokes);
jptr->strokes = NULL;
jptr->last_stroke = NULL;
@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ EVJotExpose(w, data, event)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return;
}
@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ EVJotPress(w, data, event)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return;
}
@ -409,12 +409,12 @@ EVJotMove(w, data, event)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return;
}
if (jptr->drawing == False)
{
{
return;
}
@ -463,12 +463,12 @@ EVJotRelease(w, data, event)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return;
}
if (jptr->drawing == False)
{
{
return;
}
@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ EJB_JOTfromJot(w)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return(NULL);
}
@ -648,12 +648,12 @@ JOTfromJot(w, buffer_len)
jptr = GetJot(w);
if (jptr == NULL)
{
{
return(NULL);
}
dlen = sizeof(MY_INK_POINT) * jptr->stroke_cnt;
dataArray = (MY_INK_POINT *)malloc(dlen);
cnt = 0;
sptr = jptr->strokes;
@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ JOTfromJot(w, buffer_len)
pptr = (INK_PENDATA_RECORD *)malloc(inkRecordPenDataSize(dlen));
pptr->header.recordType = inkRecordPenData;
pptr->header.recordLength = inkRecordPenDataSize(dlen);
pptr->bounds.origin.x = jptr->min_x;
pptr->bounds.origin.x = jptr->min_x;
pptr->bounds.origin.y = jptr->min_y;
pptr->bounds.size.w = jptr->max_x - jptr->min_x + 1;
pptr->bounds.size.h = jptr->max_y - jptr->min_y + 1;
@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ JOTfromJot(w, buffer_len)
bcopy((char *)pptr, (char *)(buffer + inkRecordBundleSize),
inkRecordPenDataSize(dlen));
*/
memcpy((char *)(buffer + inkRecordBundleSize), (char *)pptr,
memcpy((char *)(buffer + inkRecordBundleSize), (char *)pptr,
inkRecordPenDataSize(dlen));
/*
bcopy((char *)eptr, (char *)(buffer + inkRecordBundleSize +

16
libhtmlw/HTMLparse.c
View File

@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ clean_white_space(txt)
}
/*
* If there are more words, insert a space and if space was
* If there are more words, insert a space and if space was
* removed move up remaining text.
*/
*start++ = ' ';
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ ExpandEscapes(esc, endp, termination)
{
int escLen, ampLen;
cnt = 0;
escLen = strlen(esc);
escLen = strlen(esc);
while (AmpEscapes[cnt].tag != NULL)
{
ampLen = strlen(AmpEscapes[cnt].tag);
@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ get_mark(start, endp)
ptr += 2;
while ((*ptr != '\0') && ((*ptr == ' ') || (*ptr == '\n')
|| (*ptr == '-') ))
ptr++; /* skip spaces and newlines */
ptr++; /* skip spaces and newlines */
if (*ptr == '>') /* completed end comment */
{
*endp = ptr;
@ -1048,13 +1048,13 @@ HTMLParse(old_list, str, hw)
tmp_bgname=NULL;
}
}
mark->next = NULL;
current = AddObj(&list, current, mark, preformat);
}
start = (char *)(end + 1);
@ -1483,7 +1483,7 @@ AnchorTag(ptrp, startp, endp)
ptr++;
}
}
/*
* For a tag with no value, this is a boolean flag.
* Return the string "1" so we know the tag is there.

98
libhtmlw/HTMLtable.c
View File

@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ extern char *ParseMarkTag();
extern int htmlwTrace;
#endif
/* Allocate a TableField and initialize to default values
* return 0 on failure
/* Allocate a TableField and initialize to default values
* return 0 on failure
*/
static TableField *NewTableField()
{
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ TableField *tf;
tf->contHoriz = False;
tf->maxWidth = DEFAULT_FIELD_WIDTH;
tf->minWidth = DEFAULT_FIELD_WIDTH;
tf->maxHeight = DEFAULT_FIELD_HEIGHT;
tf->maxHeight = DEFAULT_FIELD_HEIGHT;
tf->minHeight = DEFAULT_FIELD_HEIGHT;
tf->header = False;
@ -87,11 +87,11 @@ char *end;
/* PourText() this routine pours a text string of a particular font into a
rectangular area of specified dimensions. The return value is a list of
/* PourText() this routine pours a text string of a particular font into a
rectangular area of specified dimensions. The return value is a list of
text lines that will fit within the given width.
If a height is specified, then text will be truncated if necessary to fit.
If height is 0, then all of the text is in the list.
If height is 0, then all of the text is in the list.
The actual pixel height of the text is returned in variable height.
*/
int PourText(text,font,width,height,percentVertSpace,formattedText,numberOfLines)
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ int y;
*numberOfLines = 0;
return(0);
}
textList = ListCreate();
stringWidth = XTextWidth(font,text,strlen(text));
if (stringWidth < width) {
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ int y;
GetWord(textPtr,&wordStart,&wordEnd);
wordLength = (int) (wordEnd - wordStart);
wordWidth = XTextWidth(font,wordStart, wordLength);
if ((builtWidth + spaceWidth + wordWidth) < width) {
if ((builtWidth + spaceWidth + wordWidth) < width) {
/* then add to line */
if (builtWidth) {
/* only add space if something on line already*/
@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ int y;
strncat(tmpBuff, wordStart, wordLength);
builtWidth += wordWidth;
}
else if (wordWidth < width) {
else if (wordWidth < width) {
/* start new line */
ListAddEntry(textList, strdup(tmpBuff));
*tmpBuff = '\0';
@ -174,10 +174,10 @@ int y;
strncat(tmpBuff, wordStart, wordLength);
builtWidth += wordWidth;
}
else {
else {
/* word is too big to fit on a line */
/* so break up word */
/* start new line */
ListAddEntry(textList, strdup(tmpBuff));
*tmpBuff = '\0';
@ -190,10 +190,10 @@ int y;
while ((*wordEnd) && (width > wordWidth)) {
wordEnd++;
wordLength = (int) (wordEnd - wordStart);
wordWidth = XTextWidth(font,wordStart,
wordWidth = XTextWidth(font,wordStart,
wordLength);
}
strncat(tmpBuff, wordStart, wordLength);
builtWidth += wordWidth;
@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ int y;
*numberOfLines = numLines;
return(numLines);
} /* PourText() */
@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ int x,y;
/* move 2D link list table to an array for speed */
if (!(t->table = (TableField *) malloc(sizeof(TableField)
if (!(t->table = (TableField *) malloc(sizeof(TableField)
* t->numColumns * t->numRows))) {
return(0); /* out of memory */
}
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ int x,y;
x = 0;
field = (TableField *) ListHead(rowList);
while (field) {
memcpy(&(t->table[y * t->numColumns + x]), field,
memcpy(&(t->table[y * t->numColumns + x]), field,
sizeof(TableField));
x++;
field = (TableField *) ListNext(rowList);
@ -349,10 +349,10 @@ int x,y;
y++;
rowList = (List) ListNext(tableList);
}
return(1);
}
/* return the number of connected fields */
@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ int maxWidthOfColumn;
int maxHeightOfRow;
int sumMinWidth; /* summation of max widths */
int maxWidthOfRow;
int minWidthOfRow;
int minWidthOfRow;
int numAdjacent;
float percentToShrink;
int accumulateColWidth;
@ -455,9 +455,9 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
minWidthOfRow += field->minWidth;
}
/* save the length of the longest and shortest row */
sumMaxWidth = (sumMaxWidth > maxWidthOfRow) ?
sumMaxWidth = (sumMaxWidth > maxWidthOfRow) ?
sumMaxWidth : maxWidthOfRow;
sumMinWidth = (sumMinWidth > minWidthOfRow) ?
sumMinWidth = (sumMinWidth > minWidthOfRow) ?
sumMinWidth : minWidthOfRow;
}
@ -508,15 +508,15 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
/* find widest field in column */
maxWidthOfColumn = 0;
for (y = 0; y < t->numRows; y++ ) {
maxWidthOfColumn =
(maxWidthOfColumn >
maxWidthOfColumn =
(maxWidthOfColumn >
t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].maxWidth)?
maxWidthOfColumn :
maxWidthOfColumn :
t->table[y * t->numColumns+x].maxWidth;
}
/* assign uniform width to column */
for (y = 0; y < t->numRows; y++) {
t->table[y*t->numColumns + x].colWidth
t->table[y*t->numColumns + x].colWidth
= maxWidthOfColumn
+ 2 * FIELD_BORDER_SPACE;
}
@ -525,10 +525,10 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
/* find highest of minimum heights */
maxHeightOfRow = 0;
for (x=0; x < t->numColumns; x++) {
maxHeightOfRow =
(maxHeightOfRow >
maxHeightOfRow =
(maxHeightOfRow >
t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].minHeight)?
maxHeightOfRow:
maxHeightOfRow:
t->table[y * t->numColumns+x].minHeight;
}
/* assign uniform height to row */
@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
/* format it */
for (y = 0; y < t->numRows; y++) {
field = &(t->table[y*t->numColumns+x]);
field->colWidth = (int) (percentToShrink *
field->colWidth = (int) (percentToShrink *
((float) CalculateMaxWidthOfColumn(t,x)));
field->rowHeight = 0;
numAdjacent = TableHowManyConnectedHorizFields
@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
(percentToShrink *
((float) CalculateMaxWidthOfColumn(t,xx))));
}
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (htmlwTrace) {
fprintf(stderr,"About to call PourText\n");
@ -653,17 +653,17 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
}
/* assign height */
for (x = 0; x < t->numColumns; x++) {
t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].rowHeight =
t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].rowHeight =
maxHeightOfRow;
}
}
/* make sure all widths in a column are the same size */
for (x = 0; x < t->numColumns; x++) {
maxWidthOfColumn = 0;
maxWidthOfColumn = 0;
/* find biggest Width for this column */
for (y = 0; y < t->numRows; y++) {
maxWidthOfColumn = (maxWidthOfColumn >
maxWidthOfColumn = (maxWidthOfColumn >
t->table[y*t->numColumns+x].colWidth)?
maxWidthOfColumn:
t->table[y*t->numColumns+x].colWidth;
@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ int accumulateColWidth;
t->table[y*t->numColumns+x].colWidth = maxWidthOfColumn;
}
}
}
@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Boolean expandedSomething;
/* check for and take care of previous rowspans */
if (rowCount > 1) {
/* get field above this one */
previousRow = (List) ListGetIndexedEntry(tableList,
previousRow = (List) ListGetIndexedEntry(tableList,
rowCount - 2);/*zero indexed*/
aboveField =(TableField *)ListGetIndexedEntry(previousRow,
*columnCount);
@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ Boolean fixed;
}
m = m->next;
}
if (field->header) {
field->font = hw->html.plainbold_font;
}
@ -904,7 +904,7 @@ char *tptr;
while(TableExpandFields(tableList, rowList,
rowCount, &columnCount));
/* if: is this the first container <tr> or the
/* if: is this the first container <tr> or the
separator */
if (ListHead(ListHead(tableList))) {
rowList = ListCreate();
@ -1111,8 +1111,8 @@ int yy;
break;
}
/*
placeY = y + height/2 +
(field->font->max_bounds.ascent
placeY = y + height/2 +
(field->font->max_bounds.ascent
- field->font->max_bounds.descent)/2;
*/
@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ int x,y;
x++;
if (x < t->numColumns) {
/* do width */
while ((x < t->numColumns) &&
while ((x < t->numColumns) &&
t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].contHoriz) {
(*expandWidth) += t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].colWidth;
x++;
@ -1169,14 +1169,14 @@ int x,y;
y++;
if (y < t->numRows) {
/* do height */
while ((y < t->numRows) &&
while ((y < t->numRows) &&
t->table[y * t->numColumns + x].contVert) {
(*expandHeight) += t->table[y * t->numColumns+x].rowHeight;
y++;
}
}
}
@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ int expandedWidth,expandedHeight;
if (eptr->table_data->borders){
/*
XDrawRectangle(XtDisplay(hw), XtWindow(hw->html.view),
hw->html.drawGC,
hw->html.drawGC,
x+(eptr->table_data->borders/2),y+eptr->table_data->borders,
eptr->table_data->bwidth,
eptr->table_data->bheight);
@ -1237,14 +1237,14 @@ int expandedWidth,expandedHeight;
/* draw field borders */
if (eptr->table_data->borders){
if (!field->contVert) { /* draw above line */
XDrawLine(XtDisplay(hw),
XDrawLine(XtDisplay(hw),
XtWindow(hw->html.view),
hw->html.drawGC,
/*hw->manager.bottom_shadow_GC,*/
vertMarker, horizMarker,
vertMarker + colWidth, horizMarker);
/*
XDrawLine(XtDisplay(hw),
XDrawLine(XtDisplay(hw),
XtWindow(hw->html.view),
hw->manager.top_shadow_GC,
vertMarker, horizMarker+1,
@ -1252,7 +1252,7 @@ int expandedWidth,expandedHeight;
*/
}
if (!field->contHoriz) { /* draw left side*/
XDrawLine(XtDisplay(hw),
XDrawLine(XtDisplay(hw),
XtWindow(hw->html.view),
hw->html.drawGC,
vertMarker, horizMarker,
@ -1272,10 +1272,10 @@ int expandedWidth,expandedHeight;
vertMarker += colWidth;
field++;
}
}
horizMarker += rowHeight;
}
}
XSetLineAttributes(XtDisplay(hw),
hw->html.drawGC,

70
libhtmlw/HTMLwidgets.c
View File

@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ char **ParseCommaList();
void FreeCommaList();
char *MapOptionReturn();
static char traversal_table[] =
static char traversal_table[] =
"\
~Shift ~Meta ~Ctrl <Key> Tab: traversal_forward()\n\
Shift ~Meta ~Ctrl <Key> Tab: traversal_back()\n\
@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ CollectSubmitInfo(fptr, name_list, value_list)
cbdata.attribute_count--;
}
break;
/*** cvarela@ncsa.uiuc.edu: August 17, 1994
Adding multiple submit buttons support ***/
/* mods 3/11/95 -- amb */
@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ PrepareFormEnd(hw, w, fptr)
FormInfo *fptr;
{
#ifdef MOTIF
XtAddCallback(w, XmNactivateCallback,
XtAddCallback(w, XmNactivateCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)CBSubmitForm, (caddr_t)fptr);
#else
XtAddCallback(w, XtNcallback,
@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ PrepareFormReset(hw, w, fptr)
FormInfo *fptr;
{
#ifdef MOTIF
XtAddCallback(w, XmNactivateCallback,
XtAddCallback(w, XmNactivateCallback,
(XtCallbackProc)CBResetForm, (caddr_t)fptr);
#else
XtAddCallback(w, XtNcallback,
@ -2256,9 +2256,9 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
{
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable("<Btn1Down>: Arm() traversal_current()"));
}
@ -2324,7 +2324,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
w = XmCreateToggleButton(hw->html.view, widget_name,
arg, argcnt);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtSetMappedWhenManaged(w, False);
@ -2362,7 +2362,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
w = XmCreatePushButton(hw->html.view, widget_name,
arg, argcnt);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtSetMappedWhenManaged(w, False);
XtManageChild(w);
@ -2400,7 +2400,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
w = XmCreatePushButton(hw->html.view, widget_name,
arg, argcnt);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtSetMappedWhenManaged(w, False);
XtManageChild(w);
@ -2432,7 +2432,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
w = XmCreatePushButton(hw->html.view, widget_name,
arg, argcnt);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtSetMappedWhenManaged(w, False);
XtManageChild(w);
@ -2655,7 +2655,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
XtManageChild(button);
XmStringFree(label);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(button,
XtOverrideTranslations(button,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
if ((vlist_cnt > 0)&&
(vlist[0] != NULL)&&
@ -2688,9 +2688,9 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNx, x); argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNy, y); argcnt++;
/* kill margins */
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNmarginWidth, 0);
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNmarginWidth, 0);
argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNmarginHeight, 0);
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNmarginHeight, 0);
argcnt++;
XtSetArg(arg[argcnt], XmNsubMenuId, pulldown);
argcnt++;
@ -2714,12 +2714,12 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
widget_name, arg, argcnt);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
{
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtOverrideTranslations(pulldown,
XtOverrideTranslations(pulldown,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
}
argcnt = 0;
xmstr = XmStringCreateSimple ("");
@ -2822,10 +2822,10 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
w = XmCreateList(scroll, widget_name,
arg, argcnt);
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
XtManageChild(w);
w = scroll;
for (i=0; i<list_cnt; i++)
@ -2903,10 +2903,10 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
w = XmCreateTextField(hw->html.view, widget_name,
arg, argcnt);
XtOverrideTranslations(w, XtParseTranslationTable(text_translations));
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
/*
* The proper order here is XtSetMappedWhenManaged, XtManageChild. But a bug
@ -3012,9 +3012,9 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
XtOverrideTranslations(w, XtParseTranslationTable(text_translations));
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
w = scroll;
@ -3061,7 +3061,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
type = W_TEXTAREA;
cols = atoi(list[0]);
rows = atoi(list[1]);
/* be a textfield if only one row */
if(rows==1)
type=W_TEXTFIELD;
@ -3117,7 +3117,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
widget_name, arg, argcnt);
XtOverrideTranslations(w, XtParseTranslationTable(text_translations));
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
}
/*
@ -3158,7 +3158,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
XtManageChild(w);
XtOverrideTranslations(w, XtParseTranslationTable(text_translations));
if(!hw->html.focus_follows_mouse)
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtOverrideTranslations(w,
XtParseTranslationTable(traversal_table));
@ -3216,7 +3216,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
height = 0;
}
wptr = AddNewWidget(hw, fptr, w, type, id, x, y, width,
wptr = AddNewWidget(hw, fptr, w, type, id, x, y, width,
height, name, value, mapping, checked);
}
else
@ -3280,7 +3280,7 @@ MakeWidget(hw, text, x, y, id, fptr)
WidgetInfo *wptr;
Dimension width, height;
wlist = hw->html.widget_list;
while (wlist != NULL)
{
@ -4148,13 +4148,13 @@ unsigned long bp=BlackPixel(XtDisplay(hw),DefaultScreen(XtDisplay(hw)));
void traversal_forward(Widget w, XEvent *event,
String *params, Cardinal *num_params)
{
{
HTMLTraverseTabGroups(w, XmTRAVERSE_NEXT_TAB_GROUP);
}
void traversal_back(Widget w, XEvent *event,
String *params, Cardinal *num_params)
{
{
HTMLTraverseTabGroups(w, XmTRAVERSE_PREV_TAB_GROUP);
}
@ -4227,7 +4227,7 @@ void HTMLTraverseTabGroups(Widget w, int how)
top = (Widget) hw;
while(!XtIsTopLevelShell(top))
top = XtParent(top);
switch(how)
{
case XmTRAVERSE_NEXT_TAB_GROUP:
@ -4251,7 +4251,7 @@ void HTMLTraverseTabGroups(Widget w, int how)
}
/* automagickly scroll */
if(XtIsManaged(hw->html.vbar) &&
if(XtIsManaged(hw->html.vbar) &&
(lptr->y > (hw->html.view_height+hw->html.scroll_y-10)))
{
int val, ss, in, pg_in, amount;
@ -4273,7 +4273,7 @@ void HTMLTraverseTabGroups(Widget w, int how)
Widget text;
XtVaGetValues(lptr->w, XmNworkWindow, &text, NULL);
XtSetKeyboardFocus(top, text);
}
}
else
XtSetKeyboardFocus(top, lptr->w);
break;
@ -4298,7 +4298,7 @@ void HTMLTraverseTabGroups(Widget w, int how)
}
/* automagickly scroll */
if(XtIsManaged(hw->html.vbar) &&
if(XtIsManaged(hw->html.vbar) &&
(lptr->y < hw->html.scroll_y+10))
{
int val, ss, in, pg_in, amount;
@ -4329,9 +4329,9 @@ void HTMLTraverseTabGroups(Widget w, int how)
break;
case XmTRAVERSE_CURRENT:
lptr = hw->html.widget_list;
/* check parent to allow for text areas (lptr->w would be scroll) */
while(lptr!=NULL)
while(lptr!=NULL)
{
if((lptr->w == w) || (lptr->w == XtParent(w)))
break;

2
libhtmlw/Makefile
View File

@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ LIBTARGET = libhtmlw.a
all: $(LIBTARGET)
CFILES = HTML.c HTMLlists.c HTMLformat.c HTMLparse.c HTMLimages.c HTMLwidgets.c HTML-PSformat.c DrawingArea.c HTMLjot.c HTMLtable.c list.c
CFILES = HTML.c HTMLlists.c HTMLformat.c HTMLparse.c HTMLimages.c HTMLwidgets.c HTML-PSformat.c DrawingArea.c HTMLjot.c HTMLtable.c list.c
OBJS = $(CFILES:.c=.o)
$(OBJS): HTML.h HTMLP.h

4
libhtmlw/Makefile.in
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# @configure_output@
# This file is used by Autoconf to make the real Makefile.
# DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE!
# If you want to change something do it to the Makefile autoconf
# If you want to change something do it to the Makefile autoconf
# creates. You should never have to edit this file.
CC= @CC@
@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ LIBTARGET = libhtmlw.a
all: $(LIBTARGET)
CFILES = HTML.c HTMLlists.c HTMLformat.c HTMLparse.c HTMLimages.c HTMLwidgets.c HTML-PSformat.c DrawingArea.c HTMLjot.c HTMLtable.c list.c
CFILES = HTML.c HTMLlists.c HTMLformat.c HTMLparse.c HTMLimages.c HTMLwidgets.c HTML-PSformat.c DrawingArea.c HTMLjot.c HTMLtable.c list.c
OBJS = $(CFILES:.c=.o)
$(OBJS): HTML.h HTMLP.h

2
libhtmlw/Makefile.orig
View File

@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ LIBTARGET = libhtmlw.a
all: $(LIBTARGET)
CFILES = HTML.c HTMLlists.c HTMLformat.c HTMLparse.c HTMLimages.c HTMLwidgets.c HTML-PSformat.c DrawingArea.c HTMLjot.c HTMLtable.c list.c
CFILES = HTML.c HTMLlists.c HTMLformat.c HTMLparse.c HTMLimages.c HTMLwidgets.c HTML-PSformat.c DrawingArea.c HTMLjot.c HTMLtable.c list.c
OBJS = $(CFILES:.c=.o)
$(OBJS): HTML.h HTMLP.h

268
libhtmlw/inkstore.h
View File

@ -8,18 +8,18 @@
** of representatives of Slate Corporation, Lotus Development Corporation,
** GO, Microsoft, Apple, General Magic, and others.
**
** This document and the accompanying code samples on disk comprise Version
** 1.0 of the Jot specification for the storage and interchange of electronic
** ink data. Permission is granted to incorporate and otherwise use any
** portion of the specification. You may make copies of the specification
** for distribution to others, provided you include the notice "Copyright
** This document and the accompanying code samples on disk comprise Version
** 1.0 of the Jot specification for the storage and interchange of electronic
** ink data. Permission is granted to incorporate and otherwise use any
** portion of the specification. You may make copies of the specification
** for distribution to others, provided you include the notice "Copyright
** 1993, Slate Corporation. All Rights Reserved" on both the document and
** the disk label. You may not modify this specification without written
** the disk label. You may not modify this specification without written
** permission from Slate Corporation.
**
** The specification is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind. Slate
** further disclaims all implied warranties of merchantability or of fitness
** for a particular purpose. The entire risk arising out of the use or
** The specification is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind. Slate
** further disclaims all implied warranties of merchantability or of fitness
** for a particular purpose. The entire risk arising out of the use or
** performance of the specification remains with you.
**
**--------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -54,10 +54,10 @@
** electronic ink data interchange, and neither assumes nor dictates the
** nature of how the application deals with ink data internally. The format
** is not intended to be the "internal" ink format of an application, though
** there is no reason why it could not serve such a purpose.
** there is no reason why it could not serve such a purpose.
**
** The scope and goals of this format design are limited to the represent-
** ation of electronic ink data embedded in some other electronic document,
** ation of electronic ink data embedded in some other electronic document,
** not to the larger document itself (such as an e-mail or enhanced word-
** processing data file).
**
@ -70,28 +70,28 @@
** or sub-strokes, and then storing a list of encodings of these sub-strokes.
** In other words, Jot preserves all information about the original input as
** opposed attempting any sort of abstract characterization of the input.
**
**
** The storage format has a number of properties:
**
**
** * Simple. Typical operations on the ink data are easy. If you only wish
** to read stroke coordinates and bounding information from the data,
** complex information that might be present will not hinder the process.
** Likewise, it is easy to write out just simple information. The
** complex information is all optional.
**
** * Compact. The storage format is intended to be as compact as possible
**
** * Compact. The storage format is intended to be as compact as possible
** without sacrificing simplicity or fidelity. Optional information such
** as time stamps or color specifications occupy space only when they are
** present. Specifications that apply to many strokes (such as line width
** or color) are represented just once.
**
**
** * Compression. The stroke information that describes the ink can
** optionally be represented in a compressed format. Compression
** techniques include both compression and reduction of the ink data.
**
**
** * Inclusive. The format is capable of storing every property of ink
** conceivable as of today.
**
** conceivable as of today.
**
** * Expandable and Compatible. The format is expandable, so as developers
** discover new information that should be recorded in an ink storage
** format, these new features can be added without changing the behavior of
@ -100,21 +100,21 @@
** applications reading older versions of the format. Likewise, new
** application programs can handle previous versions of the format without
** special work.
**
**
** The format is not designed to easily support lots of in-memory
** manipulation of the ink data, such as deleting strokes, changing line
** widths, and so on. A format supporting these types of manipulations would
** be at odds with the above goals. All the information needed to perform
** these manipulations is present in this data format, so an application
** might augment this format to facilitate manipulation of the ink data.
**
**
** Applications are likely to use some other format internally for real-time
** ink manipulation. Many operating environments provide some internal means
** for storing and manipulating ink data, the details of which may be hidden
** to some extent from the application designer. Many such real-time data
** structures store fewer types of and/or less information (such as not
** preserving information about the tablet point data rate) than are covered
** in this definition.
** in this definition.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -141,15 +141,15 @@
** April 12, 1993 - Release of version 0.99 of the specification. Moved
** reference sections 28 and 29 to a separate file called
** sample.h
** May 01, 1993 - Release of version 1.00 of the specification.
** Changed INK_OFFSET_RECORD units from twips to pen
** May 01, 1993 - Release of version 1.00 of the specification.
** Changed INK_OFFSET_RECORD units from twips to pen
** units for consistency and ease of implementation.
** Fixed a typo in reference section 26.0 in the diagram.
** The text accompanying the diagram was correct.
** Fixed a typo in reference section 27.0. The old text
** "delta-X == 0 or 1" was replaced with the correct text
** "delta-X == 2". The accompanying diagram was correct.
** Removed all sizeof() constructs and replaced with
** Removed all sizeof() constructs and replaced with
** appropriate #defines to reduce compiler dependencies.
** Tagged all struct definitions with tag_ prefix.
** Added comments and reordered some existing comments.
@ -171,12 +171,12 @@
** storage of point data in "standard compression" format. Sign bits are
** used to indicate item types, so the bytes are stored high-order to low-
** order (exactly opposite). See the sample code and reference section 23.0
** for more information on the compressed format. Uncompressed data is
** for more information on the compressed format. Uncompressed data is
** written in Intel order.
**
** All structures are packed for the purposes of writing to a stream.
**
** Signed integer values are two's-complement. Rectangles are stored
**
** Signed integer values are two's-complement. Rectangles are stored
** x,y,w,h.
**
** These definitions are intended to insulate the sample ink compaction and
@ -193,13 +193,13 @@
** Record Sequence
** ---------------
**
** In this document, one piece of ink data is called an ink bundle.
** In this document, one piece of ink data is called an ink bundle.
** Typically this might correspond to the strokes that make up the ink from
** the time when the pen touches down until the user finishes writing
** (usually determined by a timeout or the pen leaving proximity). Thus an
** ink bundle usually contains many ink strokes, and the strokes do not have
** to describe a continuous line of ink.
**
**
** As stated in reference section 5.0, all data conforming to this
** specification appears as a stream of ink bundles each of which must begin
** with an INK_BUNDLE_RECORD and end with an INK_END_RECORD. There may be
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@
** INK_GROUP_RECORD optional // tags the following PENDATA
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD recommended // actual points
** INK_GROUP_RECORD optional // tags the following PENDATA
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD recommended // actual points
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD recommended // actual points
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD recommended // more points in same group
** INK_SCALE_RESET_RECORD optional // resets to default scaling/offset
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD recommended // actual points
@ -223,32 +223,32 @@
** INK_END_RECORD required // end of bundle number one
**
** It is perfectly reasonable to write out only the following (though doing
** so will cause the ink to be rendered in a completely default manner --
** so will cause the ink to be rendered in a completely default manner --
** black hairline width at 1:1 scaling with offset 0):
**
** INK_BUNDLE_RECORD
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD
** INK_END_RECORD
**
**
**
** Specification Revisions
** -----------------------
**
** Future enhancements to this specification may modify certain record types.
** It is guaranteed that any record modified in a subsequent revision of the
** specification will be a strict superset of that record's definition in any
** previous revision of the specification. That is, modified record types
** will only be lengthened, not shortened. If a particular record type must
** be extended such that it would not be a superset of the original, a new
** record type would be added to cover that particular extension.
**
** This extension strategy has two important ramifications:
**
** 1) A reading application should *ALWAYS* use the size of a record as
** Future enhancements to this specification may modify certain record types.
** It is guaranteed that any record modified in a subsequent revision of the
** specification will be a strict superset of that record's definition in any
** previous revision of the specification. That is, modified record types
** will only be lengthened, not shortened. If a particular record type must
** be extended such that it would not be a superset of the original, a new
** record type would be added to cover that particular extension.
**
** This extension strategy has two important ramifications:
**
** 1) A reading application should *ALWAYS* use the size of a record as
** recorded in the record structure itself (i.e., the recordLength field
** of the INK_RECORD_HEADERx structure) rather than the sizeof() or any
** other size determined at compile time to determine how may bytes to
** read as the data structures are parsed. This is due to the fact that
** other size determined at compile time to determine how may bytes to
** read as the data structures are parsed. This is due to the fact that
** a record may grow in a future revision of the standard. The only
** exception to this rule is the INK_BUNDLE_RECORD which contains a
** version number that will be modified with each change to that record.
@ -256,17 +256,17 @@
** version used at compile time, the size of the record should exactly
** match the #define of inkRecordBundleSize.
**
** 2) Any particular record may be read into a target data structure up to
** the size of the target data structure and the rest may be ignored.
** This is due to the 'strict superset' rule which means that any
** 2) Any particular record may be read into a target data structure up to
** the size of the target data structure and the rest may be ignored.
** This is due to the 'strict superset' rule which means that any
** extension of any record type must leave the meaning, content, and size
** of any existing fields as is. So, for example, if an INK_SCALE_RECORD
** was modified by adding 2 bytes, the reading application can safely read
** the data into the INK_SCALE_RECORD known at compile time and throw
** away the extra two bytes: the header, x, and y will be in the same
** away the extra two bytes: the header, x, and y will be in the same
** place and will have the same meaning.
**
**
**
** Files of Ink
** ------------
**
@ -386,14 +386,14 @@ typedef struct tag_XY16 {
} XY16, FAR *P_XY16;
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Note:
** Note:
** Angles from vertical can exceed +-90 degrees: in this case, the "back" end
** of the stylus is nearer the tablet surface than the "front" end.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Note:
** Standard compaction will normally store angles in nibbles, or single
** Note:
** Standard compaction will normally store angles in nibbles, or single
** bytes, rather than in four-byte records.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ typedef U16 INK_RECORD_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_RECORD_TYPE;
)
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Note: most compilers will not generate code for the above macro but will
** Note: most compilers will not generate code for the above macro but will
** determine the proper value at compile time.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_RECORD_HEADER32 {
** the following minimum requirements:
**
** 1) header.recordType == INK_RECORD_BUNDLE
** 2) header.recordLength >= inkRecordBundleSize (See general notes in
** 2) header.recordLength >= inkRecordBundleSize (See general notes in
** reference section 1.0 for important information about record sizes.)
** 3) compactionType is an expected and supported value
** 4) penUnitsPerX and penUnitsPerY seem reasonable and expected:
@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_END_RECORD {
** data, while smaller, is still whole. That is, compression under Jot is
** loss-less. Compaction refers to a process where certain pieces of less
** important data are actually omitted from the stream and are possibly
** reconstructed by the reader of the data.
** reconstructed by the reader of the data.
**
** Using Jot, a writing application may choose to compress only, compact only
** or use some combination. The standard compression mechanism defined here
@ -654,13 +654,13 @@ typedef U8 INK_COMPACTION_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_COMPACTION_TYPE;
/*************************/
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** The INK_BUNDLE_FLAGS contain some flags that apply to an entire bundle.
** The INK_BUNDLE_FLAGS contain some flags that apply to an entire bundle.
** If you wanted to store several pieces of ink that had different
** INK_BUNDLE_FLAGS, you would do it by storing several different bundles.
**
** Advisory flags:
**
** inkPointsRemoved
** inkPointsRemoved
** Indicates whether all original points are still present or whether
** some points were removed to save space. For applications that are
** only interested in the visual aspects of ink, many points can be
@ -677,12 +677,12 @@ typedef U8 INK_COMPACTION_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_COMPACTION_TYPE;
** replacing individual points with an "elided point" item does not
** constitute removing points. ("Elided" means omitted or skipped).
**
** inkProxDataRemoved
** inkProxDataRemoved
** Indicates that the original points between strokes (proximity) were
** removed to save space. An out-of-prox point should be stored between
** strokes to delimit them. Some applications depend on knowing the
** time between strokes or at the ends of strokes for certain
** functions.
** functions.
**
** Note:
** "Proximity" is defined as the stylus being close enough to the tablet
@ -691,17 +691,17 @@ typedef U8 INK_COMPACTION_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_COMPACTION_TYPE;
** recommended practice is to include "out of proximity" points in the
** recorded ink data when they are used as part of determining the
** amount of time a stylus was out of contact with the tablet, or for
** triggering the completion of an action such as a "gesture".
** triggering the completion of an action such as a "gesture".
**
** inkStrokeLimitsPresent
** inkStrokeLimitsPresent
** Indicates that INK_BUTTONS items are also present, and that they
** indicate what the storing app decided the stroke start/end points
** were. (Note: the reading application may otherwise use a different
** algorithm for using tip force values to delimit strokes.)
** algorithm for using tip force values to delimit strokes.)
**
** Note:
** If inkStrokeLimitsPresent is set, then inkButtonDataPresent must also
** be set.
** be set.
**
** Data flags:
**
@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ typedef U8 INK_COMPACTION_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_COMPACTION_TYPE;
** the offset value is added ("pre-multiply")
** rather than after ("post-multiply")
**
** Note:
** Note:
** A previous draft version included a provision for compacting data to an
** approximation based on Bezier curves. Initial results did not show
** promise in terms of efficiency and performance.
@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ typedef U8 INK_COMPACTION_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_COMPACTION_TYPE;
** not be used directly to render the data. The definition of these anchor
** and control points, and the example code for the approximation and
** regeneration of the "true" coordinates could not be worked out at this
** time.
** time.
**
** Some standard values for pen units per meter follow:
**
@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ typedef U8 INK_COMPACTION_TYPE, FAR *P_INK_COMPACTION_TYPE;
**
** The specific format for each of these types of data is described in the
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD documentation (reference section 8.0).
**
**
** Note:
** The order in which these flags are defined has nothing to do with the
** order in which the data appears in the INK_POINT structure when reading
@ -798,7 +798,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_BUNDLE_RECORD {
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** A penData record contains the actual pen data for one or more pen strokes.
** The bounds applies to all the strokes contained within this record.
** The bounds applies to all the strokes contained within this record.
** Multiple strokes are typically grouped into one record to increase the
** efficiency of the compression algorithm, though strokes may be stored
** individually, if desired.
@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_BUNDLE_RECORD {
** written by other applications that might group multiple strokes
** into a single INK_PENDATA_RECORD.
**
** Note:
** Note:
** In practice, our experience is that unpacking the data in order to compute
** the bounds for each stroke to check for strokes that intrude into a given
** region is not an excessive burden. The checks that would have been done
@ -860,31 +860,31 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_PENDATA_RECORD {
** of one) is represented as 0x00010000, a scale of 0.5 as 0x00008000.
**
** Note:
** All ink is located relative to the lower-left (0,0) corner of a logical
** page or window. Scale and offset operations are cumulative, much in the
** All ink is located relative to the lower-left (0,0) corner of a logical
** page or window. Scale and offset operations are cumulative, much in the
** same way as in PostScript. One begins with a normalized graphics state
** and sequentially applies the scale and offset operations to that matrix.
** and sequentially applies the scale and offset operations to that matrix.
** The INK_SCALE_RESET record returns the graphics state to its default state
** (i.e., the transformation matrix is set to an identity matrix and the
** offset is reset to the default of 0). By default, scaling is applied
** after adding in any offset specified in an INK_OFFSET_RECORD. If the ink
** bundle has the inkPreMultiplyScale bit set, for all ink in that bundle
** scaling is applied before adding in any offset.
**
**
** As used in this format, ink scale and offset values are set by the storing
** application, to be applied by the rendering application. If the storing
** application collected the ink at scales of (2.0,2.0), the storing
** application should insert an INK_SCALE_RECORD with a scale of (0.5,0.5)
** for the rendering application to multiply all ink X and Y coordinates by.
**
** It is the responsibility of the storing application to deal with any
** It is the responsibility of the storing application to deal with any
** effects from round-off or truncation error due to the limits of precision
** in the FIXED_FRACTION values used in INK_SCALE_RECORDs.
**
** An ink scale record indicates a scale change that stays in effect until
** another ink scale record is encountered. Ink scale values compound: if
** the current scale is (2.0,2.0) and an INK_SCALE_RECORD is encountered with
** scale of (2.0,3.0), the scale to be applied to ink then becomes(4.0,6.0).
** scale of (2.0,3.0), the scale to be applied to ink then becomes(4.0,6.0).
** In absence of any ink scale record, the default ink scale is unity. In
** general, a typical usage pattern for an application that supports drawing
** ink while zoomed at scale is to record a number of strokes at a given
@ -940,10 +940,10 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_SCALE_RECORD {
** would have an offset position, markup ink over an entire form would not
** have a offset position (or would have an offset position of (0,0) and a
** scale of (1,1)) because it is relative to the entire form coordinate
** system, not relative to some piece in the form.
** system, not relative to some piece in the form.
**
** Note:
** This approach allows a reader to "blindly" apply the scale and offset
** This approach allows a reader to "blindly" apply the scale and offset
** values specified to ink data, and puts the burden for computing
** compounding of multiple zoom levels, etc., on the writing application.
**
@ -993,10 +993,10 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_SCALE_RESET_RECORD {
** "erase" function, such as the ability to erase annotation ink on an
** "original" document (perhaps a FAX image) the "erase" color restores the
** background image where painted. The "background image" is defined by the
** rendering application.
** rendering application.
**
** Applications which do not support a true "erase" function may interpret
** this as some other drawing function, such as drawing the "background"
** this as some other drawing function, such as drawing the "background"
** color.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1022,8 +1022,8 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_COLOR_RECORD {
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Standardized opacity values:
** A recommended practice is that an opacity value of 128 (midway between
** 0 and 255) be used for "highlighter" colors. A recommended practice is
** that grey values as defined below be used for "standard grey"
** 0 and 255) be used for "highlighter" colors. A recommended practice is
** that grey values as defined below be used for "standard grey"
** highlighters.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_COLOR_RECORD {
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Time is measured in milliseconds.
**
**
** Note:
** Because of the difficulty synchronizing clocks on different machines
** at the time granularity of digitizing tablets, and because the "editing"
@ -1069,12 +1069,12 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_COLOR_RECORD {
** End time records are not required. The interpretation of an end time
** which is in conflict with the end time inferred from the assumed data rate
** of points and the number of points (including elided points) is not
** defined.
** defined.
**
** Start time is the time for the first point in the following penData record
** and end time is the time of the last point in the following penData
** record, because if you are recording tip force, the exact definition of
** pen up and pen down may be fuzzy and/or application dependent.
** pen up and pen down may be fuzzy and/or application dependent.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_END_TIME_RECORD {
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** INK_PENDATA_RECORDs can be grouped. If they are grouped, each
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD can be assigned a group number. All
** INK_PENDATA_RECORDs with the same group number belong to the same group.
** INK_PENDATA_RECORDs with the same group number belong to the same group.
**
** The exact interpretation of grouping is up the applications involved.
** Writing applications may group ink data, but not all reading applications
@ -1156,7 +1156,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_GROUP_RECORD {
/**************************/
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Some applications may support the idea of rendering ink as if it were
** Some applications may support the idea of rendering ink as if it were
** drawn by a certain shaped pen tip. The most common pen tips would be
** round or rectangular. The exact details of how to render a given pen
** tip will be application specific, but this record states what pen tip
@ -1169,15 +1169,15 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_GROUP_RECORD {
** at the end of the structure.
**
** The writing application should be aware that the reading application will
** only do "the best possible" job of rendering and that fully compliant
** only do "the best possible" job of rendering and that fully compliant
** reading applications may not be able to render certain nib types and/or
** colors. Both reading and writing applications should pay particular
** attention to the following notes regarding defaults and ink drawn at a
** width of zero.
**
**
** A pen tip which is drawing ink in zero width renders at the minimum
** visible width the reading application will support.
**
**
** A recommended practice is that ink which should not render (should this
** be called for) be drawn with a color value of (0,0,0, 0), i.e., black,
** completely transparent.
@ -1185,14 +1185,14 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_GROUP_RECORD {
** Pen tip size should scale when an INK_SCALE_RECORD is encountered. The
** writing application should write a new INK_PENTIP_RECORD after an
** INK_SCALE_RECORD if the writing application does not want the pen tip
** size to scale along with the ink. If the pen tip scales to zero width,
** size to scale along with the ink. If the pen tip scales to zero width,
** it should be rendered by the reading application according to the comment
** above.
**
** The default pen tip if no pentip record exists is INK_PENTIP_ROUND, with a
** width of one twip. The dimensions of a round nib specify diameter, not
** radius: the X/Y coordinate is the center of this diameter. Similarly, for
** for rectangular nibs, the X/Y coordinate is the center of the rectangle.
** for rectangular nibs, the X/Y coordinate is the center of the rectangle.
**
** Note:
** This specification does not specify information for an algorithmic
@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_GROUP_RECORD {
** application to draw wider ink as the user presses down harder with the
** stylus. Applications wishing to implement such features may do so using
** application-specific record types for this revision of the specification.
**
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
typedef S16 INK_PENTIP, FAR *P_INK_PENTIP;
@ -1248,7 +1248,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_PENTIP_RECORD {
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** For some applications, it will be important to know the sampling rate of
** the pen digitizer.
** the pen digitizer.
**
** This record would likely be present once in a bundle and would typically
** be after the INK_BUNDLE_RECORD, but before the first pen data.
@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_PENTIP_RECORD {
** ink at the specified rate. It is likely that most types of rendering
** applications will render ink as rapidly as possible to construct a display
** in minimum time, and that some types of animation applications will
** intentionally set an arbitrary sampling rate to vary the display rate.
** intentionally set an arbitrary sampling rate to vary the display rate.
**
** Note:
** For hardware which supports a highly variable sampling rate, the writing
@ -1328,15 +1328,15 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_UNITS_PER_Z_RECORD {
** start and end are likely to differ, a recommended practice for writing
** applications that use the tip force value to determine the "touch" points
** in a stroke is to mark those points using the touch bit in the INK_BUTTONS
** structure.
** structure.
**
** It is also recommended that vendors supporting tip force sensing in their
** hardware linearize their transducers to the greatest extent possible.
** hardware linearize their transducers to the greatest extent possible.
**
** Because of the likelihood that tip force transducers may not be accurately
** linearized, negative tip force values, while perhaps somewhat absurd
** are possible and are permitted in this specification.
**
** are possible and are permitted in this specification.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
typedef struct tag_INK_UNITS_PER_FORCE_RECORD {
@ -1366,8 +1366,8 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_UNITS_PER_FORCE_RECORD {
** subRecordTypes that they wish to use. Then, using these subRecordTypes
** they can put a wide variety of information into the file. By examining
** the appData signature and comparing it to theirs, an application can
** decide whether it knows how to interpret the various subRecordtypes.
**
** decide whether it knows how to interpret the various subRecordtypes.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
typedef struct tag_INK_APP_RECORD {
@ -1393,16 +1393,16 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_APP_RECORD {
** Uncompacted point format:
** -------------------------
**
** This structure immediately follows the rest of the INK_PENDATA_RECORD.
** This structure immediately follows the rest of the INK_PENDATA_RECORD.
** The structure has several optional components, present or not present as
** indicated by the INK_BUNDLE_FLAGS in the INK_BUNDLE_RECORD. The format is
** a sequence of "point values", each containing all the scalar data for each
** sampled tablet point.
**
** sampled tablet point.
**
** In the uncompacted format, there is a single structure that contains all
** of the state information for each point from the tablet. Components not
** present (as indicated by the INK_BUNDLE_FLAGS) are just that: not present,
** do not exist, do not occupy space.
** do not exist, do not occupy space.
**
** Compacted point format:
** -----------------------
@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_APP_RECORD {
** force data, and explicit starts and ends of strokes: the starts and ends
** of the strokes are then points that were considered to be such by the
** original application storing the data. The INK_BUTTONS record reflects
** the state of the next X/Y point following.
** the state of the next X/Y point following.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1493,12 +1493,12 @@ typedef U32 INK_BUTTONS, FAR * P_INK_BUTTONS;
/**************************/
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** INK_POINT data. The INK_POINT structure varies in size depending on
** INK_POINT data. The INK_POINT structure varies in size depending on
** flags set in the bundle header. The XY32 position is always present, but
** the force, rho, height, angle, and buttons members are only present when
** indicated by the corresponding flag in the bundle header. When optional
** data is present, it is present in the order defined by this structure;
** that is, position, force, height, rho, angle, and finally buttons.
** that is, position, force, height, rho, angle, and finally buttons.
**
** The INK_POINT structure has the following elements:
**
@ -1511,20 +1511,20 @@ typedef U32 INK_BUTTONS, FAR * P_INK_BUTTONS;
** height - optional, present if inkHeightDataPresent is asserted
** Units are in pen unitsPerZ as specified by inkPointDefaultUnitsPerZ or
** by an INK_UNITS_PER_Z_RECORD, whichever is appropriate. Units increase
** as the stylus is taken away from the tablet. Zero means "just in
** as the stylus is taken away from the tablet. Zero means "just in
** contact". Negative values could possibly result from spring action if
** the stylus is pressed hard, or if the tablet is not perfectly accurate.
** rho - optional, present if inkRotationDataPresent is asserted
** Angles are measured in degrees from some nominal orientation of
** "stylus button on top" (somewhat arbitrary). Angles increase with
** Angles are measured in degrees from some nominal orientation of
** "stylus button on top" (somewhat arbitrary). Angles increase with
** clockwise rotation as seen from the rear end of the stylus.
** angle - optional, present if inkAngleDataPresent is asserted
** Angles are measured in pen angle units from the vertical. Theta
** Angles are measured in pen angle units from the vertical. Theta
** increases in the positive-X direction, phi in the positive-Y.
** buttons - optional, present if inkButtonDataPresent is asserted
**
**
** When the INK_BUNDLE_RECORD member compactionType is inkStdCompression,
** all data in this structure is compressed according to the methods
** all data in this structure is compressed according to the methods
** described in reference section 23.0. For more details on how to interpret
** the compressed data stream, see the sample code. The bundle flags which
** indicate whether a particular piece of data is present are used regardless
@ -1532,12 +1532,12 @@ typedef U32 INK_BUTTONS, FAR * P_INK_BUTTONS;
** in compressed format, it is NOT written in Intel order but rather most
** significant byte first. In compressed form, some of the eight bit delta
** values are reserved for button data and elided (skipped) point counts.
** This has two important ramifications. 1) When expecting a point,
** This has two important ramifications. 1) When expecting a point,
** compacted button data or elided point data may be encountered instead, and
** 2) when the inkButtonDataPresent flag is asserted in the bundle header,
** button data will appear in the place of a point and not in addition to a
** point. If inkButtonDataPresent is not asserted, the reader need not check
** the point data for the special case of button data; however, the point
** the point data for the special case of button data; however, the point
** data must still be checked to see if it is a count of elided points rather
** than an actual point.
**
@ -1561,7 +1561,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** The following default values are assumed before the start of any
** The following default values are assumed before the start of any
** INK_BUNDLE:
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1587,7 +1587,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
**
** A recommended practice is always to use the compacted point format, not
** the uncompacted point format. Sample code for reading and writing the
** compacted format is included in an appendix.
** compacted format is included in an appendix.
**
** This structure also immediately follows the rest of the
** INK_PENDATA_RECORD.
@ -1601,10 +1601,10 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
** The storing application, as an alternative to eliminating points, can
** specify a "skip" record for elided points. The skipRecord indicates that
** a number of points were skipped, and the reading application is free to
** insert values for the elided points (interpolating where appropriate).
** insert values for the elided points (interpolating where appropriate).
** The intent is to allow for accurate time information to be maintained
** between time stamps for synchronization with recorded voice, press-hold
** gesture recognition, etc.
** gesture recognition, etc.
**
** Compacted data is written most significant byte first so that reading
** applications can read the first byte and determine (from the top two bits)
@ -1618,9 +1618,9 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
** and MAX_S7. Similarly, the reserved encoding for 8 bit deltas are all 8
** bit delta pairs where both X and Y are within the inclusive range MIN_S3
** and MAX_S3. In revision 1.0 of Jot, three of the reserved encodings for 8
** bit deltas are used for special cases: skip counts (reference section
** bit deltas are used for special cases: skip counts (reference section
** 27.0) and button changes (reference section 26.0).
**
**
** x/y position:
** ------------
**
@ -1744,7 +1744,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
** |1|0|(S3 delta-theta)|(S3 delta-phi)|
** -------------------------------------
**
** Note:
** Note:
** Leading bit values of |1|1| are reserved
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1760,16 +1760,16 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
** Since the X/Y data is always present, we use some of the reserved delta
** encodings to encode button states and elided (skipped) points. We use the
** 8-bit delta encodings that are unused: the values that can fit into the
** smaller 4-bit delta encodings.
** smaller 4-bit delta encodings.
**
** Button/tip records:
** ------------------
**
** It is assumed that the state of barrel buttons and the touching sensor on
** the stylus change infrequently. A compacted button/tip record is only
** included when the state changes in one of the switches. The button state
** value applies to the X/Y point immediately following the button state
** record.
** included when the state changes in one of the switches. The button state
** value applies to the X/Y point immediately following the button state
** record.
**
**
** (Taken from 8-bit byte delta X/Y: two bytes total)
@ -1779,7 +1779,7 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
** (delta-X) (delta-Y)
**
** An eight-bit delta with delta-X == 0 or 1, and delta-Y in the range
** (-4..3) indicates a button state encoding.
** (-4..3) indicates a button state encoding.
**
** It is likely to be the case that many hardware platforms have only one
** barrel button.
@ -1794,10 +1794,10 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
**
** The lowest order bit of the delta-X bits is used to indicate that
** additional bytes follow: "1" indicates that the next byte is used for the
** next 7 barrel buttons with state. The high order bit of each sequential
** next 7 barrel buttons with state. The high order bit of each sequential
** byte in the series is "1" if an additional byte must be fetched, "0"
** otherwise. In these additional bytes, the additional buttons are
** associated in order starting with the low-order bit.
** otherwise. In these additional bytes, the additional buttons are
** associated in order starting with the low-order bit.
**
**------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -1825,10 +1825,10 @@ typedef struct tag_INK_POINT {
** skip count value.
**
** The elided points are points removed between the point immediately prior
** to the skipped-point record and the point immediately afterward. This
** implies that at least one point must follow every skip record (though
** to the skipped-point record and the point immediately afterward. This
** implies that at least one point must follow every skip record (though
** the point may not appear next in the stream if there are intervening
** button state transitions). Reading applications that are interested in
** button state transitions). Reading applications that are interested in
** recovering elided points will typically interpolate. Skip counts of zero
** are meaningless and not permitted.
**

16
libhtmlw/list.c
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
* list contains pointers to the head, tail, and current list position.
* the list itsself is doubly linked with both next and previous pointers.
*
* ddt
* ddt
*/
#include <stdio.h>
#include "listP.h"
@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE *m;
FREE(m);
}
FREE(theList);
}
@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE *l;
theList->current = l;
theList->listCount++;
return(1);
}
@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE *l;
theList->current = l;
return(NIL);
}
/*
@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ List theList;
char *entry;
int count;
struct LISTINSTANCE *saveCurrent;
*/
*/
if (theList) {
return(theList->listCount);
}

6
libhtmlw/list.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/

8
libhtmlw/listP.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE {
struct LISTSTRUCT {
struct LISTINSTANCE *head;
struct LISTINSTANCE *tail;
struct LISTINSTANCE *current;
struct LISTINSTANCE *current;
int listCount;
};

6
libnet/collage.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/

6
libnet/doodle.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/

12
libnet/list.c
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE *m;
FREE(m);
}
FREE(theList);
}
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE *l;
}
theList->current = l;
return(1);
}
@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE *l;
theList->current = l;
return(NIL);
}
/*

6
libnet/list.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/

8
libnet/listP.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ struct LISTINSTANCE {
struct LISTSTRUCT {
struct LISTINSTANCE *head;
struct LISTINSTANCE *tail;
struct LISTINSTANCE *current;
struct LISTINSTANCE *current;
};
#endif

6
libnet/mesg.c
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/

142
libnet/net.c
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -62,8 +62,8 @@ static char rcs_id[] = "$Id: net.c,v 1.4 1995/10/15 18:48:57 spowers Exp $";
* most case.
*
*
* mods:
* 2/22/93 (ddt) print out message if user has loaded unsupported
* mods:
* 2/22/93 (ddt) print out message if user has loaded unsupported
* dimensional array
*/
@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ SQueue *sq;
while(sq) {
if (sq->netPort == netPort) {
ListDeleteEntry(sendQueue,sq);
if (sq->failCB)
if (sq->failCB)
sq->failCB(sq->data,sq->failCBData);
FREE(sq->header);
FREE(sq);
@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ static int NetUserListAdd(name)
char *name;
{
char *p;
if ((!name) || (!strlen(name)))
return(-1);
p = (char *) ListHead(userList);
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ void DEFUN(NetSetUserID,(user), char *user)
else if (!user && userID)
userID = NULL;
}
static DOCB *NetSearchByName(name,list)
char *name;
@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ DOCB *docb;
docb = (DOCB *) ListNext(list);
}
return((DOCB *) 0);
}
@ -372,11 +372,11 @@ caddr_t changeData;
void (*destroy)(); /* Data object destroyed callback */
caddr_t destroyData;
{
DOCB *docb;
DOCB *docb;
char itsNew;
/*Yeah this is huge,repetitive and could easily be condensed, but it
wasn't when I started, and I don't feel like changing it now
wasn't when I started, and I don't feel like changing it now
condensed on Feb 93 by gbourhis */
#define REGISTERMODULE(list) \
do { \
@ -455,13 +455,13 @@ caddr_t destroyData;
};
return(1);
}
static int DimensionsEqual(dim1,rank1,dim2,rank2)
static int DimensionsEqual(dim1,rank1,dim2,rank2)
int *dim1,rank1,*dim2,rank2;
{
register int x;
@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ register int x;
}
static void CopyDimensions(dim1,rank1,dim2,rank2)
static void CopyDimensions(dim1,rank1,dim2,rank2)
/* copies dim2 to dim1 */
int *dim1,*rank1;
int *dim2,rank2;
@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ int numPortNames;
else if (dtmFlowControl == DTM_SYNC) {
printf("Just made an SYNC out netPort=%x port %x (%s)\n",
n,n->port,n->portName);
}
}
else {
printf("********Just made an *UNKOWN* out port %s (%d)\n",
n->portName,n->port);
@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ char *outPortAddr;
return(NetInternalCreateOutPort(outPortAddr,TRUE));
}
static void NetChangeOutPort(address,oldOut)
static void NetChangeOutPort(address,oldOut)
char *address;
NetPort *oldOut;
{
@ -781,8 +781,8 @@ int num;
strcpy(d->label,title);
d->dot = DOT_SDL;
SDLgetPrimitive(header,&(d->dost));
if ((num = DTMreadDataset(n->port, primbuff,
if ((num = DTMreadDataset(n->port, primbuff,
MAX_SDL_VERTICES, DTM_TRIPLET)) == DTMERROR){
ErrMesg("Error reading DTM SDL");
NetReject(n->port,header);
@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ int num;
d->entity = ENT_Network;
return(d);
#endif
#endif
}
static Com *NetReadCOM(n,header)
@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ int size;
d->dost = DOST_Double;
elementSize = sizeof(double);
break;
default:
default:
d->dost = DOST_Char;
elementSize = 1;
printf(
@ -892,8 +892,8 @@ int size;
VDATAgetNumRecords(header,&(d->dim[1]));
d->rank = 2;
VDATAgetPathLength(header,&(d->pathLength));
if (!(d->magicPath = (VdataPathElement **)
MALLOC(sizeof(VdataPathElement *)
if (!(d->magicPath = (VdataPathElement **)
MALLOC(sizeof(VdataPathElement *)
* d->pathLength))){
ErrMesg("Out of Memory reading VDATA path\n");
DTMendRead(n->port);
@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ int size;
}
DTMendRead(n->port);
return(d);
#endif
}
@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ int stat;
return(0);
}
for(x = 0, size = 1; x < rank; x++)
for(x = 0, size = 1; x < rank; x++)
size *= dims[x];
ANIMgetID(header,id,DTM_STRING_SIZE);
@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ int stat;
case DTM_DOUBLE:
dostType = DOST_Double;
break;
default:
default:
dostType = DOST_Char;
printf(
"SDS of unknown type just received casting to char\n");
@ -1261,7 +1261,7 @@ char id[DTM_STRING_SIZE];
}
}
if (DTMreadDataset(n->port,d->data,xdim*ydim,DTM_CHAR) ==
if (DTMreadDataset(n->port,d->data,xdim*ydim,DTM_CHAR) ==
DTMERROR) {
ErrMesg("Error reading RIS dataset");
NetReject(n->port,header);
@ -1339,7 +1339,7 @@ static char title[DTM_STRING_SIZE];
DTMendRead(n->port);
return(0);
}
t.textString[t.dim] = '\0';
#ifdef DEBUG
printf("NetReadText(): *t.textString = %c dim = %d\n",
@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ List *list;
char *portName;
{
NetPort *netPort;
netPort = (NetPort *) ListHead(list);
while (netPort) {
if (!strcmp(portName,netPort->portName)) {
@ -1541,7 +1541,7 @@ char buff[256];
#endif
return(0);
}
sprintf(buff,
"Just established a connection with\n%s (%s)\n",
s.id,s.inPort);
@ -1585,7 +1585,7 @@ char buff[256];
}
else {
/***** this assumes only one out port **********/
ListDeleteEntry(netOutList,ListHead(netOutList));
ListDeleteEntry(netOutList,ListHead(netOutList));
}
break;
@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ char buff[256];
}
strcpy(s.inPort,s.netPort->portName);
return(&s);
} /* NetReadDTM() */
@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ int runType;
ANIMgetID(header,id,80);
a.id = id;
ANIMgetFrame(header,&(a.frameNumber));
if (-1 == ANIMgetFunc(header,(&func)))
if (-1 == ANIMgetFunc(header,(&func)))
a.func = AF_NO_FUNC;
else {
switch(func) {
@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ int runType;
break;
};
}
if (-1 == ANIMgetRunType(header,(&runType)))
if (-1 == ANIMgetRunType(header,(&runType)))
a.runType= ART_NONE;
else {
switch (runType) {
@ -1742,7 +1742,7 @@ int runType;
break;
};
}
a.data = 0;
return(&a);
#endif
@ -1822,7 +1822,7 @@ static Col col;
col.title = title;
col.id = UserID;
col.func = "DOODLE";
if (sendDiscrete)
if (sendDiscrete)
col.selType = COL_DOODLE_DISC;
else
col.selType = COL_DOODLE_CONT;
@ -1831,7 +1831,7 @@ static Col col;
return(&col);
#endif
}
static void NetCallDestroyCallback(list,d)
List list;
Data *d;
@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ static AnimMesg a;
a.func = AF_NO_FUNC;
a.runType = ART_NONE;
a.data = d;
/* distribute data */
if (!DataInList(d)) {
DataAddEntry(d);
@ -2016,7 +2016,7 @@ char *ExceptModuleName;
else {
d = *dSend;
}
/* distribute data */
if (!DataInList(d)) {
DataAddEntry(d);
@ -2052,7 +2052,7 @@ register char *p;
if (!(docb = (DOCB *) ListNext(PALList)))
return(0); /* none to distribute to */
}
/* get data field make a new one if doesn't exist */
if (!(d = DataSearchByLabelAndDOT(title,DOT_Palette8))) {
if (!(d = DataNew())) {
@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ register char *p;
return(1);
#endif
} /* NetPALDistribute() */
#undef CALLCB
#define CALLCB(List, CallB, CallData, ClientData) \
do { \
@ -2204,7 +2204,7 @@ int i;
else if (PALcompareClass(header)) {
if (!(docb = (DOCB *) ListHead(PALList))) {
NetReject(n->port,header);
NetReject(n->port,header);
return(0);
}
if (d = NetReadPal(n,header)) {
@ -2216,12 +2216,12 @@ int i;
CALLCB(PALList, changeCB, d, changeData);
}
}
}/* PAL */
else if (RIScompareClass(header)) {
if (!(docb = (DOCB *) ListHead(RIS8List))) {
NetReject(n->port,header);
NetReject(n->port,header);
return(0);
}
if (d = NetReadRIS8(n,header)) {
@ -2233,11 +2233,11 @@ int i;
CALLCB(RIS8List, changeCB, d, changeData);
}
}
}/* RIS */
else if (TXTcompareClass(header)) {
if (!(docb = (DOCB *) ListHead(TXTList))) {
NetReject(n->port,header);
NetReject(n->port,header);
return(0);
}
if (t = NetReadText(n,header)) {
@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ int i;
} /*SRV*/
else if (COLcompareClass(header)) {
if (!(docb = (DOCB *) ListHead(COLList))) {
NetReject(n->port,header);
NetReject(n->port,header);
return(0);
}
if (c = NetReadCOL(n,header)) {
@ -2298,7 +2298,7 @@ int i;
}
}
else {
NetReject(n->port,header);
NetReject(n->port,header);
}
return(d);
@ -2311,7 +2311,7 @@ List netPortList;
int port;
{
NetPort *netPort;
netPort = (NetPort *) ListHead(netPortList);
while (netPort) {
if (netPort->port == port) {
@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ NetPort *n;
/* printf("NetClientPollAndRead(): I've been called\n");*/
#endif
n = (NetPort *) ListHead(netInList);
n = (NetPort *) ListHead(netInList);
while (n) {
while (DTMavailRead(n->port)) {
#ifdef DEBUG
@ -2432,9 +2432,9 @@ int status;
#ifdef USE_WRITEMSG
if (DTMERROR == DTMwriteMsg(netPort->port,
header,strlen(header)+1,
data,num,type))
data,num,type))
#else
status = DTMbeginWrite(netPort->port,header,strlen(header)+1);
status = DTMbeginWrite(netPort->port,header,strlen(header)+1);
#ifdef DEBUG
printf("NetSend():sent header \"%s\" to %s\n",header,netPort->portName);
#endif
@ -2489,7 +2489,7 @@ long num AND
DTMTYPE type AND
void (*cb) PARAMS((GenericPtr data, caddr_t cbData)) AND
caddr_t cbData AND
void (*failCB) PARAMS((GenericPtr data, caddr_t failCBData)) AND
void (*failCB) PARAMS((GenericPtr data, caddr_t failCBData)) AND
caddr_t failCBData AND
int doQueue) /* TRUE -> Save and resend; FALSE -> let client resend*/
@ -2502,7 +2502,7 @@ int status;
#ifdef DEBUG
printf("no out port: discarding %s\n",header);
#endif
if (failCB)
if (failCB)
failCB(data,failCBData);
return(-1);
}
@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ int status;
#endif
}
else {
if (cb)
if (cb)
cb(data,cbData);
}
return(0);
@ -2588,13 +2588,13 @@ int status;
}
else {
/* couldn't send now and no queuing, so call failCB()*/
if (failCB)
if (failCB)
failCB(data,failCBData);
}
return(0);
}
else if (status == 1) {
if (cb)
if (cb)
cb(data,cbData);
return(1);
}
@ -2604,7 +2604,7 @@ int status;
return(-1);
}
return(-1);
} /* NetClientSendMessage() */
@ -2630,7 +2630,7 @@ time_t t;
port->portName,
sq->netPort,
sq->netPort->portName);
fprintf(stderr,"*");
fprintf(stderr,"*");
}
#endif
while (sq) {
@ -2807,7 +2807,7 @@ register long i;
NetMakeCOLFromDoodle(title,a,length+1,sendDiscrete),
moduleName);
}
status = NetClientSendMessage(netPort,header,a,(length + 1),
COL_TRIPLET, NetFreeDataCB, 0,0,0,doQueue);
@ -3367,7 +3367,7 @@ DEFUN(_NetSendRaster8,(netPort,d,shouldCopy,
else
NetRISDistribute(&d, moduleName);
if (shouldCopy) {
int buffSize = d->dim[0] * d->dim[1] * sizeof(char);
register int x;
@ -3432,7 +3432,7 @@ int status;
ANIMsetClass(header);
ANIMsetTitle(header,title);
ANIMsetID(header,userID);
switch (command) {
case AF_STOP:
ANIMsetFunc(header,ANIM_FUNC_STOP);
@ -3475,7 +3475,7 @@ NetPort *netPort;
Data *d;
int shouldCopy; /* should this data be copied before returning? */
/* if not, charData and palette8 must not be freed or */
/* changed until data is sent */
/* changed until data is sent */
int distributeInternally; /* boolean */
char *moduleName; /* Send internally to all DOCB except this one */
/* in most cases this would be the calling module's name*/
@ -3542,10 +3542,10 @@ char *nodeName;
char *field;
int numRecords;
int numElements;
int type;
int type;
char *vdata;
int shouldCopy; /* copy Vdata before returning in case of delayed send */
int distributeInternally;
int distributeInternally;
char *moduleName; /* distribute Internally to all except */
{
#if 0
@ -3612,7 +3612,7 @@ int size;
numRecords * numElements,
dtmType,0,0,0,0,1);
}
return(status);
#endif
}
@ -3654,7 +3654,7 @@ Data *nextD;
moduleName,FALSE);
break;
case DOT_Image:
if ( (nextD)
if ( (nextD)
&& (nextD->dot == DOT_Palette8)
&& !nextD->associated )
nextD->associated = d->label;
@ -3690,7 +3690,7 @@ Data *nextD;
#endif
status = -1;
break;
};
d = nextD;
}
@ -3711,9 +3711,9 @@ char header[DTM_MAX_HEADER];
COMsetID(header,userID);
COMsetDomain(header,domain);
COMsetMesg(header,message);
return(NetClientSendMessage(netPort,header,0,0,0,cb,0,failCB,0,1));
}
#if 0 /* not used */
@ -3786,7 +3786,7 @@ time_t now;
ecbd->cbData = cbData;
ecbd->failCB = failCB;
ecbd->failCBData = failCBData;
EXECsetClass(header);
EXECsetID(header,userID);
@ -3879,7 +3879,7 @@ caddr_t failCBData;
{
char header[DTM_MAX_HEADER];
char tmp[DTM_STRING_SIZE];
MSGsetClass(header);
COLsetID(header, userID);
strncpy(tmp, message, DTM_STRING_SIZE - 1);

8
libnet/net.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ typedef struct {
short int *data;
} Dol;
typedef enum { AF_NO_FUNC, AF_STOP, AF_FPLAY, AF_RPLAY
typedef enum { AF_NO_FUNC, AF_STOP, AF_FPLAY, AF_RPLAY
} AnimFunc;
typedef enum { ART_NONE, ART_SINGLE, ART_CONT, ART_BOUNCE

8
libnet/netP.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ typedef struct {
} ExecHostStatusReturn;
typedef union {
ExecHostStatusReturn hsReturn;
ExecHostStatusReturn hsReturn;
} ExecRetInfo;
typedef struct {

14
libnet/netdata.c
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Data *DataNew()
d->expandX = d->expandY = 1.0;
}
return(d);
}
@ -55,9 +55,9 @@ void DataDestroy(d)
Data *d;
{
(void)ListDeleteEntry(dataList,d);
if (d->label)
if (d->label)
FREE(d->label);
if (d->data)
if (d->data)
FREE(d->data);
FREE(d);
}
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Data *d;
d = (Data *) ListHead(dataList);
while (d) {
if ((d->label)&&((!strcmp(s,d->label)) && (d->dot == dot)
if ((d->label)&&((!strcmp(s,d->label)) && (d->dot == dot)
&& (d->dost == dost))) {
return(d);
}

8
libnet/netdata.h
View File

@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
* Permission is granted to copy and distribute source with out fee.
* Commercialization of this product requires prior licensing
* from the National Center for Supercomputing Applications of the
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* University of Illinois. Commercialization includes the integration of this
* code in part or whole into a product for resale. Free distribution of
* unmodified source and use of NCSA software is not considered
* commercialization.
*
*/
@ -88,4 +88,4 @@ extern Data *DataSearchByLabelAndDOTAndDOST
PARAMS((char *s, int dot, int dost));
extern int DataInList PARAMS((Data *d));
#endif
#endif

2
libnut/Makefile.in
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# @configure_output@
# This file is used by Autoconf to make the real Makefile.
# DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE!
# If you want to change something do it to the Makefile autoconf
# If you want to change something do it to the Makefile autoconf
# creates. You should never have to edit this file.
CC= @CC@

16
libnut/ellipsis.c
View File

@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
#ifdef ELLIPSIS_TEST
void usage_statement(void);
#endif
int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
int num_chars, int mode, int eLength);
#ifdef ELLIPSIS_TEST
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
#endif
int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
int num_chars, int mode, int eLength) {
int string_len;
@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
switch(mode) {
case 1: {
puff = num_chars - eLength;
feem = string_len - puff;
@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
break;
}
case 3: {
puff = num_chars - eLength;
feem = string_len - puff;
@ -151,9 +151,9 @@ int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
}
break;
}
default: {
#ifdef ELLIPSIS_TEST
usage_statement();
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ int compact_string(char *main_string, char *ellipsis_string,
return(-1);
#endif
}
}
ellipsis_string[num_chars]='\0';

2
libnut/str-tools.c
View File

@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ int my_strncasecmp(char *str1, char *str2, int n)
return -1;
if(str1[i]+offset1>str2[i]+offset2)
return 1;
/*
/*
if (toupper(str1[i])<toupper(str2[i])) {
return(-1);
}

76
libnut/system.c
View File

@ -757,9 +757,9 @@ $NEW_DESCRIPTOR (string_interval);
/*
* Written by: Tommy Reilly
*
* Simple function that stat's a file to see if it exists.
* Simple function that stat's a file to see if it exists.
*
* Simple returns 1 or 0.
* Simple returns 1 or 0.
*/
int file_exists(char* name)
{
@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ int file_exists(char* name)
* Written by: Tommy Reilly (with major code snarfing from Scott Powers)
*
* This is essentially Scott's my_move function re-written without rename
* and without erasing the source file.
* and without erasing the source file.
*
* If "overwrite" is true, the destination file will automatically be
* overwritten. If it is false and the file exists, my_move will return
@ -810,32 +810,32 @@ int my_copy(char *src, char *dest, char *retBuf, int bufsize, int overwrite)
char *cmd;
int ret;
#endif
if (!retBuf)
if (!retBuf)
{
return(SYS_NO_RETBUF);
}
if (!src || !*src)
if (!src || !*src)
{
strcpy(retBuf,"There was no source file specified.\n");
return(SYS_NO_SRC_FILE);
}
if (!dest || !*dest)
if (!dest || !*dest)
{
strcpy(retBuf,"There was no destination file specified.\n");
return(SYS_NO_DEST_FILE);
}
*retBuf='\0';
if (!overwrite)
if (!overwrite)
{
#if defined(MULTINET) && defined(__alpha)
if (decc$stat(dest,&dest_stat))
#else
if (stat(dest,&dest_stat))
if (stat(dest,&dest_stat))
#endif
{
sprintf(retBuf,"Stat [%s] error:\n File already exists.\n",dest);
@ -843,64 +843,64 @@ int my_copy(char *src, char *dest, char *retBuf, int bufsize, int overwrite)
}
}
#ifndef VMS /* Must copy file header as well as contents. PGE */
if ((fd_src=open(src,O_RDONLY))==(-1))
if ((fd_src=open(src,O_RDONLY))==(-1))
{
copy_error=strdup(my_strerror(errno));
if (!copy_error)
if (!copy_error)
{
strcpy(retBuf,"There was not enough memory allocate.\n");
return(SYS_NO_MEMORY);
}
if (strlen(copy_error)>(bufsize-strlen(retBuf)))
if (strlen(copy_error)>(bufsize-strlen(retBuf)))
{
fprintf(stderr,"%s\n",copy_error);
}
else
else
{
sprintf(retBuf,"%sCopy([%s] to [%s]) error:\n %s\n\n",retBuf,src,dest,copy_error);
}
free(copy_error);
return(SYS_SRC_OPEN_FAIL);
}
if ((fd_dest=open(dest,O_WRONLY|O_CREAT,0644))==(-1))
if ((fd_dest=open(dest,O_WRONLY|O_CREAT,0644))==(-1))
{
copy_error=strdup(my_strerror(errno));
if (!copy_error)
if (!copy_error)
{
strcpy(retBuf,"There was not enough memory allocate.\n");
return(SYS_NO_MEMORY);
}
if (strlen(copy_error)>(bufsize-strlen(retBuf)))
if (strlen(copy_error)>(bufsize-strlen(retBuf)))
{
fprintf(stderr,"%s\n",copy_error);
}
else
else
{
sprintf(retBuf,"%sCopy([%s] to [%s]) error:\n %s\n\n",retBuf,src,dest,copy_error);
}
free(copy_error);
close(fd_src);
return(SYS_DEST_OPEN_FAIL);
}
/*both files open and ready*/
while (n_src>0)
while (n_src>0)
{
n_src=read(fd_src,buf,BUFSIZ-1);
if (n_src>0)
if (n_src>0)
{
n_dest=write(fd_dest,buf,n_src);
if (n_dest>0)
if (n_dest>0)
{
continue;
}
@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ int my_copy(char *src, char *dest, char *retBuf, int bufsize, int overwrite)
sprintf(retBuf,"Write([%s]) error:\n %s\n\n",dest,my_strerror(errno));
return(SYS_WRITE_FAIL);
}
if (!n_src)
if (!n_src)
{
continue;
}
@ -918,10 +918,10 @@ int my_copy(char *src, char *dest, char *retBuf, int bufsize, int overwrite)
sprintf(retBuf,"Read([%s]) error:\n %s\n\n",src,my_strerror(errno));
return(SYS_READ_FAIL);
}
close(fd_src);
close(fd_dest);
#else /* VMS, PGE */
cmd = malloc(sizeof(char) * (20 + strlen(src) + strlen(dest)));
if(!cmd)
@ -935,13 +935,13 @@ int my_copy(char *src, char *dest, char *retBuf, int bufsize, int overwrite)
#endif /* VMS, PGE */
return(SYS_SUCCESS);
}
}
/*
* Written by: Tommy Reilly (originally by Scott Powers I think)
*
* This is a function that finds the users home directory.
* This is a function that finds the users home directory.
*
* Return Values:
* SYS_NO_MEMORY -- No memory to allocate with.
@ -953,7 +953,7 @@ int get_home(char **ret)
#ifndef VMS /* PGE */
char *home = NULL;
struct passwd *pwdent;
if(!(home = getenv("HOME")))
{
if (!(pwdent=getpwuid(getuid())))
@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ int get_home(char **ret)
*ret=NULL;
return(SYS_INTERNAL_FAIL);
}
else
else
{
/*
home = malloc(sizeof(char) * (strlen(pwdent->pw_dir) + 1));

40
libwww2/CUkerb.c
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
/* Ben Fried deserves credit for writing the code that upon which
* this source is based. ADC
* this source is based. ADC
*/
#include "../config.h"
#include "../config.h"
#if defined(KRB4) || defined(KRB5)
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ int scheme_login(scheme)
* Returns 1 if pipe open fails
* Returns 0 otherwise (even if klog fails!)
***************************************************************************/
int AFSgetTGT(username, password, err_string)
int AFSgetTGT(username, password, err_string)
char *err_string, *username, *password;
{
char reason[256];
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ int k4getTGT(username, password, err_string)
#endif /* KRB4 */
#ifdef KRB5
/****************************************************************************
* k5getTGT() -- calls K5 libraries to get TGT (non-AFS)
* k5getTGT() -- calls K5 libraries to get TGT (non-AFS)
* most of this was copied from the Krb5 kinit.c
*
* Returns 0 on success (err_string = "")
@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ int k5getTGT(username, password, err_string)
}
my_creds.server = server;
my_creds.times.starttime = 0;
my_creds.times.starttime = 0;
my_creds.times.endtime = 0; /* now + KRB5_DEFAULT_LIFE; */
my_creds.times.renew_till = 0;
@ -292,9 +292,9 @@ int k5getTGT(username, password, err_string)
if (code) {
sprintf(err_string,"krb5_get_in_tkt error: %s", error_message(code));
return 1;
}
}
else {
return 0;
return 0;
}
}
#endif
@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ int str_to_kdata(in_str, out_str)
/****************************************************************************
* compose_kerberos_auth_string
* compose_kerberos_auth_string
*
* Accepts: scheme (one of the HTAA_KERBEROS values)
* hostname
@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ char *compose_kerberos_auth_string(scheme, hostname)
if (!k5context) {
krb5_init_context(&k5context);
if (code) {
sprintf(krb_err_str,"Error initializing Kerb5 context: %s\n",error_message(code));
sprintf(krb_err_str,"Error initializing Kerb5 context: %s\n",error_message(code));
application_user_info_wait(krb_err_str);
return (char *) NULL;
}
@ -441,11 +441,11 @@ char *compose_kerberos_auth_string(scheme, hostname)
}
}
code = krb5_mk_req(k5context, &k5auth_context, AP_OPTS_USE_SESSION_KEY,
"khttp", hostname, NULL, k5ccache, &k5ap_req);
if (!code) {
if (!code) {
/* get username from credentials cache */
@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ char *compose_kerberos_auth_string(scheme, hostname)
return (char *) NULL;
}
krb5_sname_to_principal(k5context, hostname, "khttp",
krb5_sname_to_principal(k5context, hostname, "khttp",
KRB5_NT_SRV_HST, &k5serverp);
memset((char *)&k5in_creds, 0, sizeof(k5in_creds));
@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ char *compose_kerberos_auth_string(scheme, hostname)
code = krb5_get_credentials(k5context,KRB5_GC_CACHED,k5ccache,&k5in_creds,&k5out_creds);
if ((code == KRB5_CC_NOTFOUND) || (now >= k5out_creds->times.endtime)) {
if ((code == KRB5_CC_NOTFOUND) || (now >= k5out_creds->times.endtime)) {
/* replace "Matching creds not found" */
sprintf(krb_err_str,"Kerberos ticket expired\n");
code = 666;
@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ char *compose_kerberos_auth_string(scheme, hostname)
sprintf(krb_err_str,"krb5_mk_req: %s\n",error_message(code));
}
}
else {
else {
pass = kdata_to_str(k5ap_req.data, k5ap_req.length);
}
}
@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ char *compose_kerberos_auth_string(scheme, hostname)
* validate_kerberos_server_auth
* Accepts: scheme (one of the HTAA_KERBEROS values)
* the Authorization line from the request
* Returns: NIL on success, T on failure
* Returns: NIL on success, T on failure
(currently return value not used)
************************************************************************/
int validate_kerberos_server_auth(scheme, str)
@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ int validate_kerberos_server_auth(scheme, str)
else if (scheme == HTAA_KERBEROS_V4) {
retval = k4validate_kerberos_server_auth(str);
}
#endif
#endif
#ifdef KRB5
else if (scheme == HTAA_KERBEROS_V5) {
retval = k5validate_kerberos_server_auth(str);
@ -644,9 +644,9 @@ int k4validate_kerberos_server_auth(str)
if (ntohl(*(long *)k4authent.dat) != k4checksum + 1) {
fprintf(stderr,"\n\nchecksum just doesn't check out\n\n");
return 1;
return 1;
}
return 0;
}
#endif
@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ int k5validate_kerberos_server_auth(instr)
k5ap_rep.length = str_to_kdata(instr, tmpstr);
if (k5ap_rep.length == 0)
if (k5ap_rep.length == 0)
return 1;
k5ap_rep.data = tmpstr;
@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ int k5validate_kerberos_server_auth(instr)
krb5_free_ap_rep_enc_part(k5context, k5ap_rep_result);
if (code)
if (code)
return 1;
return 0;

68
libwww2/HTAABrow.c
View File

@ -167,20 +167,20 @@ PUBLIC void HTAASetup_clearall (HTList *s)
** On Exit: password information is gone.
**
** May 1996 PLB Created.
**
**
*/
PUBLIC void HTAAServer_clear ()
{
HTList *n, *nn;
HTAAServer *s;
n = server_table;
while (n) {
nn = n->next;
s = (HTAAServer *)n->object;
if (s) {
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace)
if (www2Trace)
fprintf(stderr, "Clearing passwd info for %s\n", s->hostname?s->hostname:"NULL");
#endif
HTAARealm_clearall (s->realms);
@ -192,9 +192,9 @@ PUBLIC void HTAAServer_clear ()
n = nn;
}
server_table = NULL;
secret_key = NULL;
current_setup = NULL;
current_hostname = NULL;
secret_key = NULL;
current_setup = NULL;
current_hostname = NULL;
current_docname = NULL;
}
@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAServer *HTAAServer_new ARGS2(WWW_CONST char*, hostname,
if (hostname) StrAllocCopy(server->hostname, hostname);
if (!server_table) server_table = HTList_new();
HTList_addObject(server_table, (void*)server);
return server;
@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAServer *HTAAServer_lookup ARGS2(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
/*************************** HTAASetup *******************************/
/*************************** HTAASetup *******************************/
/* PRIVATE HTAASetup_lookup()
@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAServer *HTAAServer_lookup ARGS2(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
** Otherwise, a HTAASetup structure representing
** the protected server setup on the corresponding
** document tree.
**
**
*/
PRIVATE HTAASetup *HTAASetup_lookup ARGS3(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
int, portnumber,
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ PRIVATE void HTAASetup_updateSpecifics ARGS2(HTAASetup *, setup,
** On Entry:
** realm_table a list of realm objects
**
** On Exit:
** On Exit:
** returns: Nothing. realm_table is no longer valid.
*/
PUBLIC void HTAARealm_clearall ARGS1(HTList *, realm_table)
@ -468,10 +468,10 @@ PUBLIC void HTAARealm_clearall ARGS1(HTList *, realm_table)
if (r) {
#ifdef PAUL_IS_A_GIMP
if (www2Trace)
if (www2Trace)
fprintf(stderr, "Clearing %s %s:%s\n",
r->realmname?r->realmname:"NULL",
r->realmname?r->username:"NULL",
r->realmname?r->realmname:"NULL",
r->realmname?r->username:"NULL",
r->realmname?r->password:"NULL");
#endif
@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAARealm *HTAARealm_lookup ARGS2(HTList *, realm_table,
if (realm_table && realmname) {
HTList *cur = realm_table;
HTAARealm *realm;
while (NULL != (realm = (HTAARealm*)HTList_nextObject(cur))) {
if (0==strcmp(realm->realmname, realmname))
return realm;
@ -624,11 +624,11 @@ PRIVATE char *compose_auth_string ARGS2(HTAAScheme, scheme,
/* for MD5 -- DXP */
char * nonce; /* Server specified integer value */
char * opaque; /* more random MD5 junk... */
FREE(result); /* From previous call */
if ((scheme != HTAA_BASIC && scheme != HTAA_PUBKEY && scheme != HTAA_MD5)
if ((scheme != HTAA_BASIC && scheme != HTAA_PUBKEY && scheme != HTAA_MD5)
|| !setup ||
!setup->scheme_specifics || !setup->scheme_specifics[scheme] ||
!setup->server || !setup->server->realms)
@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ PRIVATE char *compose_auth_string ARGS2(HTAAScheme, scheme,
if (!realm->password)
return "";
}
len = strlen(realm->username ? realm->username : "") +
strlen(realm->password ? realm->password : "") + 3;
@ -740,13 +740,13 @@ PRIVATE char *compose_auth_string ARGS2(HTAAScheme, scheme,
if (!opaque)
return "";
if (!(A1 = (unsigned char*)malloc(strlen(realm->username) +
strlen(realm->realmname) +
if (!(A1 = (unsigned char*)malloc(strlen(realm->username) +
strlen(realm->realmname) +
strlen(realm->password) + 3 + 1)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
if (!(A2 = (unsigned char*)malloc(4 + strlen(current_docname) + 1 + 1 )))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
/* make A1 */
*A1 = (unsigned char)0;
@ -768,18 +768,18 @@ PRIVATE char *compose_auth_string ARGS2(HTAAScheme, scheme,
strcat((char*)A2, "\0");
if (!(md5_cleartext = (unsigned char*)malloc(100 + 1)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
if (!(md5_ciphertext = (unsigned char*)malloc(100 + 1)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
if (!(hex1 = (unsigned char*)malloc(32 + 1)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
if (!(hex2 = (unsigned char*)malloc(32 + 1)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
if (!(digest1 = (unsigned char*)malloc(16)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
if (!(digest2 = (unsigned char*)malloc(16)))
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
outofmem(__FILE__, "compose_auth_string");
MD5Mem(A1, strlen((char*)A1), digest1);
MD5Mem(A2, strlen((char*)A2), digest2);
@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_composeAuth ARGS3(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace)
fprintf(stderr,
fprintf(stderr,
"Composing Authorization for %s:%d/%s\n",
hostname, portnumber, docname);
#endif
@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_composeAuth ARGS3(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
retry = NO;
current_portnumber = portnumber;
if (hostname) StrAllocCopy(current_hostname, hostname);
else FREE(current_hostname);
@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_composeAuth ARGS3(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
else FREE(current_docname);
}
else retry = YES;
if (!current_setup || !retry)
current_setup = HTAASetup_lookup(hostname, portnumber, docname);
@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_composeAuth ARGS3(WWW_CONST char *, hostname,
/* BROWSER PUBLIC HTAA_shouldRetryWithAuth()
**
** DETERMINES IF WE SHOULD RETRY THE SERVER
@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ PUBLIC BOOL HTAA_shouldRetryWithAuth ARGS3(char *, start_of_headers,
char *fieldname = HTNextField(&p);
char *arg1 = HTNextField(&p);
char *args = p;
if (0==my_strcasecmp(fieldname, "WWW-Authenticate:")) {
if (HTAA_UNKNOWN != (scheme = HTAAScheme_enum(arg1))) {
HTList_addObject(valid_schemes, (void*)scheme);
@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ PUBLIC BOOL HTAA_shouldRetryWithAuth ARGS3(char *, start_of_headers,
/* So we have already tried with authorization. */
/* Either we don't have access or username or */
/* password was misspelled. */
/* Update scheme-specific parameters */
/* (in case they have expired by chance). */
HTAASetup_updateSpecifics(current_setup, scheme_specifics);
@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ PUBLIC BOOL HTAA_shouldRetryWithAuth ARGS3(char *, start_of_headers,
}
if (!template)
template = HTAA_makeProtectionTemplate(current_docname);
current_setup = HTAASetup_new(server,
current_setup = HTAASetup_new(server,
template,
valid_schemes,
scheme_specifics);

36
libwww2/HTAABrow.h
View File

@ -1,31 +1,31 @@
/* BROWSER SIDE ACCESS AUTHORIZATION MODULE
This module is the browser side interface to Access Authorization (AA) package. It
contains code only for browser.
Important to know about memory allocation:
Routines in this module use dynamic allocation, but free automatically all the memory
reserved by them.
Therefore the caller never has to (and never should) free() any object returned by
these functions.
Therefore also all the strings returned by this package are only valid until the next
call to the same function is made. This approach is selected, because of the nature of
access authorization: no string returned by the package needs to be valid longer than
until the next call.
This also makes it easy to plug the AA package in: you don't have to ponder whether to
free()something here or is it done somewhere else (because it is always done somewhere
else).
The strings that the package needs to store are copied so the original strings given as
parameters to AA functions may be freed or modified with no side effects.
Also note:The AA package does not free() anything else than what it has itself
allocated.
*/
#ifndef HTAABROW_H
@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ Routines for Browser Side Recording of AA Info
Most of the browser-side AA is done by the following two functions (which are called
from file HTTP.c so the browsers using libwww only need to be linked with the new
library and not be changed at all):
HTAA_composeAuth() composes the Authorization: line contents, if the AA package
thinks that the given document is protected. Otherwise this function returns NULL.
This function also calls the functions HTPrompt(),HTPromptPassword() and HTConfirm()
to get the username, password and some confirmation from the user.
HTAA_shouldRetryWithAuth() determines whether to retry the request with AA or with a
new AA (in case username or password was misspelled).
HTAA_TryWithAuth() sets up everything for an automatic first try with authentication.
HTAA_ClearAuth() clears the currently allocated authentication record.
*/
/* PUBLIC HTAA_composeAuth()
@ -156,19 +156,19 @@ PUBLIC void HTAA_ClearAuth NOPARAMS;
#ifdef PEM_AUTH
/*
* PUBLIC HTAA_makecommand()
*
*
* ENCRYPT AN HTTP REQUEST, AND ENCAPSULATE IT IN
* A NEW HTTP PEM AUTHORIZED REQUEST
*
*
* ON ENTRY:
* command the HTTP request
*
*
* ON EXIT:
* returns the new HTTP request with PEM
*
* Do not free this string. This function *requires* that the
*
* Do not free this string. This function *requires* that the
* HTAA_composeAuth function has been called prior to it.
*
*
*/
PUBLIC char *HTAA_makecommand PARAMS((char * command, char **body, int *bl));
#endif /* PEM_AUTH */

2
libwww2/HTAAFile.c
View File

@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ PRIVATE int read_item ARGS4(FILE *, fp,
** READ A FIELD FROM A PASSWORD, GROUP
** OR ACCESS CONTROL LIST FILE
** i.e. an item terminated by colon,
** end-of-line, or end-of-file.
** end-of-line, or end-of-file.
** ON ENTRY:
** fp is the file to read the characters from
** contents is the character array to put the characters

24
libwww2/HTAAFile.h
View File

@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
/* FILE ROUTINES FOR ACCESS AUTHORIZATION PACKAGE
This module implements the routines used for accessing (and parsing) the files used in
the access authorization:
password file
group file
access control list (ACL) file
*/
@ -37,23 +37,23 @@
Naming conventions
Record is an entire line in file.
Field is an entity separated by colons and/or by end-of-line.
List is a field in which there are items separated by commas.
Record-oriented Read Routines
Password, group and ACL are internally read in by the following functions:
HTAAFile_nextRec() skips to the beginning of the next record (must be called even
after the last field of a record is read to proceed to the next
record).
HTAAFile_readField() reads a field (separated by colons).
HTAAFile_readList() reads a field containing a comma-separated list of items.
*/
/* PUBLIC HTAAFile_nextRec()

22
libwww2/HTAAProt.c
View File

@ -81,14 +81,14 @@ PUBLIC int HTAA_getUid NOARGS
if (isNumber(current_prot->uid_name)) {
if (NULL != (pw = getpwuid(atoi(current_prot->uid_name)))) {
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
"%s(%s) returned (%s:%s:%d:%d:...)\n",
"HTAA_getUid: getpwuid",
current_prot->uid_name,
pw->pw_name, pw->pw_passwd,
pw->pw_uid, pw->pw_gid);
#endif
return pw->pw_uid;
return pw->pw_uid;
}
}
else { /* User name (not a number) */
@ -118,9 +118,9 @@ PUBLIC int HTAA_getUid NOARGS
** Default is 65534 (nogroup).
*/
PUBLIC int HTAA_getGid NOARGS
{
{
struct group *gr = NULL;
if (current_prot && current_prot->gid_name) {
if (isNumber(current_prot->gid_name)) {
if (NULL != (gr = getgrgid(atoi(current_prot->gid_name)))) {
@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ PUBLIC int HTAA_getGid NOARGS
else { /* Group name (not number) */
if (NULL != (gr = getgrnam(current_prot->gid_name))) {
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
"%s(\"%s\") returned (%s:%s:%d:...)\n",
"HTAA_getGid: getgrnam",
current_prot->gid_name,
@ -216,9 +216,9 @@ PRIVATE void HTAA_parseProtFile ARGS2(HTAAProt *, prot,
break;
if (lex_item == LEX_ALPH_STR) { /* Valid setup record */
StrAllocCopy(fieldname, lex_buffer);
if (LEX_FIELD_SEP != (lex_item = lex(fp)))
unlex(lex_item); /* If someone wants to use colon */
/* after field name it's ok, but */
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ PRIVATE void HTAA_parseProtFile ARGS2(HTAAProt *, prot,
"authentication scheme:",
lex_buffer);
#endif
if (LEX_ITEM_SEP != (lex_item = lex(fp)))
break;
/*
@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ PRIVATE void HTAA_parseProtFile ARGS2(HTAAProt *, prot,
HTAssocList_add(prot->values, fieldname, lex_buffer);
lex_item = lex(fp); /* Read record separator */
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
"%s `%s' bound to value `%s'\n",
"HTAA_parseProtFile: Name",
fieldname, lex_buffer);
@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAProt *HTAAProt_new ARGS3(WWW_CONST char *, cur_docname,
if (!prot_cache)
prot_cache = HTList_new();
while (NULL != (cache_item = (HTAAProtCache*)HTList_nextObject(cur))) {
if (!strcmp(cache_item->prot_filename, prot_filename))
break;
@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ PUBLIC HTAAProt *HTAA_getDefaultProtection NOARGS
if (!current_prot) {
current_prot = default_prot;
default_prot = NULL;
}
}
return current_prot;
}

16
libwww2/HTAAProt.h
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/* PROTECTION SETUP FILE
*/
#ifndef HTAAPROT_H
@ -39,15 +39,15 @@ typedef struct {
Callbacks for rule system
The following three functioncs are called by the rule system:
HTAA_clearProtections() when starting to translate a filename
HTAA_setDefaultProtection() when "defprot" rule is matched
HTAA_setCurrentProtection() when "protect" rule is matched
Protection setup files are cached by these functions.
*/
/* PUBLIC HTAA_setDefaultProtection()
@ -117,11 +117,11 @@ Getting Protection Settings
HTAA_getCurrentProtection() returns the current protection mode (if there was a
"protect" rule). NULL, if no "protect" rule has been matched.
HTAA_getDefaultProtection() sets the current protection mode to what it was set to
by "defprot" rule and also returns it (therefore after this call also
HTAA_getCurrentProtection() returns the same structure.
*/
/* PUBLIC HTAA_getCurrentProtection()

16
libwww2/HTAAServ.c
View File

@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_statusMessage NOARGS
/* Success */
case HTAA_OK:
return "AA: Access should be ok but something went wrong";
return "AA: Access should be ok but something went wrong";
break;
/* Others */
@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ PRIVATE char *status_name ARGS1(HTAAFailReasonType, reason)
} /* switch */
}
@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAFailReasonType check_authorization ARGS4(WWW_CONST char *, pathname
"host", HTClientHost);
else fprintf(stderr, "%s %s %s %s\n",
"HTAA_checkAuthorization: request from",
HTClientHost,
HTClientHost,
"accepted by only mask match (no ACL, only",
"Protect rule, and only mask enabled)");
}
@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAFailReasonType check_authorization ARGS4(WWW_CONST char *, pathname
? htaa_user->username : "NOT-AUTHENTICATED"));
#endif
}
/*
/*
** Check mask group
*/
if (prot->mask_group) {
@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ PRIVATE HTAAFailReasonType check_authorization ARGS4(WWW_CONST char *, pathname
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
else if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr, "%s %s %s %s %s\n",
"HTAA_checkAuthorization: request from",
HTClientHost,
HTClientHost,
"accepted by just mask group match",
"(no ACL, only Protect rule, and only",
"mask enabled)");
@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ PUBLIC int HTAA_checkAuthorization ARGS4(WWW_CONST char *, url,
char *local_copy = NULL;
HTAAMethod method = HTAAMethod_enum(method_name);
HTAAScheme scheme = HTAAScheme_enum(scheme_name);
/*
** Translate into absolute pathname, and
** check for "protect" and "defprot" rules.
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ PUBLIC int HTAA_checkAuthorization ARGS4(WWW_CONST char *, url,
char *localname = HTLocalName(pathname);
free(pathname);
pathname = localname;
}
}
FREE(local_copy);
HTAAFailReason = check_authorization(pathname, method,
@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_composeAuthHeaders NOARGS
#endif
} /* scheme valid for requested document */
} /* for every scheme */
return result;
}

20
libwww2/HTAAServ.h
View File

@ -1,31 +1,31 @@
/* SERVER SIDE ACCESS AUTHORIZATION MODULE
This module is the server side interface to Access Authorization (AA) package. It
contains code only for server.
Important to know about memory allocation:
Routines in this module use dynamic allocation, but free automatically all the memory
reserved by them.
Therefore the caller never has to (and never should) free() any object returned by
these functions.
Therefore also all the strings returned by this package are only valid until the next
call to the same function is made. This approach is selected, because of the nature of
access authorization: no string returned by the package needs to be valid longer than
until the next call.
This also makes it easy to plug the AA package in: you don't have to ponder whether to
free()something here or is it done somewhere else (because it is always done somewhere
else).
The strings that the package needs to store are copied so the original strings given as
parameters to AA functions may be freed or modified with no side effects.
Also note:The AA package does not free() anything else than what it has itself
allocated.
*/
#ifndef HTAASERV_H
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
Check Access Authorization
HTAA_checkAuthorization() is the main access authorization function.
*/
/* PUBLIC HTAA_checkAuthorization()

14
libwww2/HTAAUtil.c
View File

@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ PUBLIC HTAAScheme HTAAScheme_enum ARGS1(WWW_CONST char*, name)
*cur = TOUPPER(*cur);
cur++;
}
if (!strncmp(upcased, "NONE", 4))
return HTAA_NONE;
else if (!strncmp(upcased, "BASIC", 5))
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAAScheme_name ARGS1(HTAAScheme, scheme)
case HTAA_PUBKEY: return "Pubkey"; break;
case HTAA_KERBEROS_V4: return "KerberosV4"; break;
case HTAA_KERBEROS_V5: return "KerberosV5"; break;
case HTAA_MD5: return "Digest"; break;
case HTAA_MD5: return "Digest"; break;
case HTAA_UNKNOWN: return "UNKNOWN"; break;
default: return "THIS-IS-A-BUG";
}
@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ PUBLIC BOOL HTAAMethod_inList ARGS2(HTAAMethod, method,
** returns YES, if filename matches the template.
** NO, otherwise.
*/
PUBLIC BOOL HTAA_templateMatch ARGS2(WWW_CONST char *, template,
PUBLIC BOOL HTAA_templateMatch ARGS2(WWW_CONST char *, template,
WWW_CONST char *, filename)
{
WWW_CONST char *p = template;
@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ PUBLIC BOOL HTAA_templateMatch ARGS2(WWW_CONST char *, template,
for( ; *p && *q && *p == *q; p++, q++) /* Find first mismatch */
; /* do nothing else */
if (!*p && !*q) return YES; /* Equally long equal strings */
else if ('*' == *p) { /* Wildcard */
p++; /* Skip wildcard character */
@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ PUBLIC HTAssocList *HTAA_parseArgList ARGS1(char *, str)
}
}
else { /* No name, just a value */
if (*cur == ',')
if (*cur == ',')
*(cur++) = (char)0; /* Terminate value */
/* else last value on line (already terminated by NULL) */
StrAllocCopy(name, "nnn"); /* Room for item order number */
@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_getUnfoldedLine NOARGS
/* Unfolding */
if (peek_for_folding) {
if (*cur != ' ' && *cur != '\t')
return line; /* Ok, no continuation line */
@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_getUnfoldedLine NOARGS
while (cur < end_pointer && *cur != '\n') /* Find the end-of-line */
cur++; /* (or end-of-buffer). */
/* Terminating line */
if (cur < end_pointer) { /* So *cur==LF, terminate line */

22
libwww2/HTAAUtil.h
View File

@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
/* Utilities for the Authorization parts of libwww
COMMON PARTS OF AUTHORIZATION MODULE TO BOTH SERVER AND BROWSER
This module is the interface to the common parts of Access Authorization (AA) package
for both server and browser. Important to know about memory allocation:
Routines in this module use dynamic allocation, but free automatically all the memory
reserved by them.
Therefore the caller never has to (and never should) free() any object returned by
these functions.
Therefore also all the strings returned by this package are only valid until the next
call to the same function is made. This approach is selected, because of the nature of
access authorization: no string returned by the package needs to be valid longer than
until the next call.
This also makes it easy to plug the AA package in: you don't have to ponder whether to
free() something here or is it done somewhere else (because it is always done somewhere
else).
The strings that the package needs to store are copied so the original strings given as
parameters to AA functions may be freed or modified with no side effects.
Also note: The AA package does not free() anything else than what it has itself
allocated.
*/
#ifndef HTAAUTIL_H
@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ Default filenames
Datatype definitions
HTAASCHEME
The enumeration HTAAScheme represents the possible authentication schemes used by the
WWW Access Authorization.
*/
typedef enum {
@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ typedef enum {
/*
ENUMERATION TO REPRESENT HTTP METHODS
*/
typedef enum {

8
libwww2/HTACL.c
View File

@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ PUBLIC char *HTAA_getAclFilename ARGS1(WWW_CONST char *, pathname)
*filename = '\0'; /* Truncate filename off from directory path */
filename++; /* and the filename begins from the next character */
}
StrAllocCopy(acl_path, directory); /* Also frees acl_path */
/* from previous call. */
StrAllocCat(acl_path, "/");
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ PUBLIC GroupDef *HTAA_getAclEntry ARGS3(FILE *, acl_file,
char *buf;
if (!acl_file) return NULL; /* ACL doesn't exist */
if (group_def) {
GroupDef_delete(group_def); /* From previous call */
group_def = NULL;
@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ PUBLIC GroupDef *HTAA_getAclEntry ARGS3(FILE *, acl_file,
if (!(buf = (char*)malloc((strlen(filename)+2)*sizeof(char))))
outofmem(__FILE__, "HTAA_getAuthorizedGroups");
while (EOF != HTAAFile_readField(acl_file, buf, len+1)) {
if (HTAA_templateMatch(buf, filename)) {
HTList *methods = HTList_new();
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ PUBLIC GroupDef *HTAA_getAclEntry ARGS3(FILE *, acl_file,
fprintf(stderr,
"Filename '%s' matched template '%s', allowed methods:",
filename, buf);
}
}
#endif
if (HTAAMethod_inList(method, methods)) { /* right method? */
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE

2
libwww2/HTACL.h
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/* ACCESS CONTROL LIST ROUTINES
*/
#ifndef HTACL_H

36
libwww2/HTAccess.c
View File

@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ PUBLIC char * HTClientHost = 0; /* Name of remote login host if any */
*/
PUBLIC HTFormat HTOutputFormat = NULL;
PUBLIC HTStream* HTOutputStream = NULL; /* For non-interactive, set this */
PUBLIC HTStream* HTOutputStream = NULL; /* For non-interactive, set this */
PUBLIC BOOL using_gateway = NO; /* are we using a gateway? */
PUBLIC BOOL using_proxy = NO; /* are we using a proxy gateway? */
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ PRIVATE int get_physical ARGS3(
char * host = NULL;
struct Proxy *GetNoProxy();
extern int useKeepAlive;
HTAnchor_setPhysical(anchor, addr);
access = HTParse(HTAnchor_physical(anchor),
@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ PRIVATE int HTLoad ARGS4(
while (1) {
if (status < 0) return status; /* Can't resolve or forbidden */
retry=5;
retry_proxy:
@ -428,9 +428,9 @@ PUBLIC HTStream *HTSaveStream ARGS1(HTParentAnchor *, anchor)
{
HTProtocol * p = HTAnchor_protocol(anchor);
if (!p) return NULL;
return (*p->saveStream)(anchor);
}
@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ PUBLIC HTStream *HTSaveStream ARGS1(HTParentAnchor *, anchor)
**
** On Exit,
** returns 1 Success in opening document
** 0 Failure
** 0 Failure
** -1 Interrupted
**
*/
@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ PRIVATE int HTLoadDocument ARGS4(
use_this_url_instead = NULL;
/* We LOVE goto's!
/* We LOVE goto's!
*
* Let's rephrase this..._You_ love goto's...we _abhore_ goto's. People who
* LOVE goto's should be shot.
@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ PRIVATE int HTLoadDocument ARGS4(
#endif
status = HTLoad(full_address, anchor, format_out, sink);
if (status == HT_LOADED) {
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace) {
@ -498,9 +498,9 @@ PRIVATE int HTLoadDocument ARGS4(
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace)
{
fprintf (stderr, "HTAccess: '%s' is a redirection URL.\n",
fprintf (stderr, "HTAccess: '%s' is a redirection URL.\n",
full_address);
fprintf (stderr, "HTAccess: Redirecting to '%s'\n",
fprintf (stderr, "HTAccess: Redirecting to '%s'\n",
redirecting_url);
}
#endif
@ -518,26 +518,26 @@ PRIVATE int HTLoadDocument ARGS4(
#endif
return -1;
}
if (status == HT_NO_DATA) {
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace) {
fprintf(stderr,
fprintf(stderr,
"HTAccess: `%s' has been accessed, No data left.\n",
full_address);
}
#endif
return 0;
}
if (status<0) { /* Failure in accessing a document */
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
if (www2Trace) fprintf(stderr,
"HTAccess: Can't access `%s'\n", full_address);
#endif
return 0;
}
/* If you get this, then please find which routine is returning
a positive unrecognised error code! */
@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ PRIVATE int HTLoadDocument ARGS4(
**
** On Exit,
** returns 1 Success in opening document
** 0 Failure
** 0 Failure
** -1 Interrupted
**
**
@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ PUBLIC int HTLoadAbsolute ARGS1(WWW_CONST char *,addr)
**
** On Exit,
** returns YES Success in opening document
** NO Failure
** NO Failure
**
**
*/
@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ PUBLIC BOOL HTLoadToStream ARGS3(
**
** On Exit,
** returns YES Success in opening document
** NO Failure
** NO Failure
**
**
*/

56
libwww2/HTAccess.h
View File

@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
/* HTAccess: Access manager for libwww
ACCESS MANAGER
This module keeps a list of valid protocol (naming scheme)
specifiers with associated access code. It allows documents to be
loaded given various combinations of parameters. New access
protocols may be registered at any time.
Part of the libwww library .
*/
#ifndef HTACCESS_H
#define HTACCESS_H
@ -54,17 +54,17 @@ extern HTFormat HTOutputFormat; /* To convert on load, set this */
Load a document from relative name
ON ENTRY,
relative_name The relative address of the file to be accessed.
here The anchor of the object being searched
ON EXIT,
returns YES Success in opening file
NO Failure
*/
extern BOOL HTLoadRelative PARAMS((
WWW_CONST char * relative_name,
@ -76,25 +76,25 @@ extern BOOL HTLoadRelative PARAMS((
Load a document from absolute name
ON ENTRY,
addr The absolute address of the document to be accessed.
filter if YES, treat document as HTML
*/
/*
ON EXIT,
*/
/*
returns YES Success in opening document
NO Failure
*/
extern int HTLoadAbsolute PARAMS((WWW_CONST char * addr));
@ -104,19 +104,19 @@ extern int HTLoadAbsolute PARAMS((WWW_CONST char * addr));
Load a document from absolute name to a stream
ON ENTRY,
addr The absolute address of the document to be accessed.
filter if YES, treat document as HTML
ON EXIT,
returns YES Success in opening document
NO Failure
Note: This is equivalent to HTLoadDocument
*/
extern BOOL HTLoadToStream PARAMS((WWW_CONST char * addr, BOOL filter,
HTStream * sink));
@ -127,13 +127,13 @@ extern BOOL HTLoadToStream PARAMS((WWW_CONST char * addr, BOOL filter,
Make a stream for Saving object back
ON ENTRY,
anchor is valid anchor which has previously beeing loaded
ON EXIT,
returns 0 if error else a stream to save the object to.
*/
@ -148,13 +148,13 @@ Register an access method
typedef struct _HTProtocol {
char * name;
int (*load)PARAMS((
WWW_CONST char * full_address,
HTParentAnchor * anchor,
HTFormat format_out,
HTStream* sink));
HTStream* (*saveStream)PARAMS((HTParentAnchor * anchor));
} HTProtocol;

14
libwww2/HTAnchor.c
View File

@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
** History
**
** Nov 1990 Written in Objective-C for the NeXT browser (TBL)
** 24-Oct-1991 (JFG), written in C, browser-independant
** 24-Oct-1991 (JFG), written in C, browser-independant
** 21-Nov-1991 (JFG), first complete version
**
** (c) Copyright CERN 1991 - See Copyright.html
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ PRIVATE HTList **adult_table=0; /* Point to table of lists of all parents */
PRIVATE HTParentAnchor * HTParentAnchor_new
NOARGS
{
HTParentAnchor *newAnchor =
HTParentAnchor *newAnchor =
(HTParentAnchor *) calloc (1, sizeof (HTParentAnchor)); /* zero-filled */
newAnchor->parent = newAnchor;
return newAnchor;
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ HTAnchor * HTAnchor_findAddress
/* If the address represents a sub-anchor, we recursively load its parent,
then we create a child anchor within that document. */
if (tag && *tag)
if (tag && *tag)
{
char *docAddress = HTParse(address, "", PARSE_ACCESS | PARSE_HOST |
PARSE_PATH | PARSE_PUNCTUATION);
@ -179,8 +179,8 @@ HTAnchor * HTAnchor_findAddress
free (tag);
return (HTAnchor *) foundAnchor;
}
else { /* If the address has no anchor tag,
else { /* If the address has no anchor tag,
check whether we have this node */
int hash;
WWW_CONST char *p;
@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ HTAnchor * HTAnchor_findAddress
HTParentAnchor * foundAnchor;
free (tag);
/* Select list from hash table */
for(p=address, hash=0; *p; p++)
hash = (hash * 3 + (*(unsigned char*)p))
@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ HTAnchor * HTAnchor_findAddress
return (HTAnchor *) foundAnchor;
}
}
/* Node not found : create new anchor */
foundAnchor = HTParentAnchor_new ();
#ifndef DISABLE_TRACE

4
libwww2/HTAssoc.h
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
/* ASSOCIATION LIST FOR STORING NAME-VALUE PAIRS
Lookups from assosiation list are not case-sensitive.
*/
#ifndef HTASSOC_H

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More